Manual Hyundai Alcazar - 2023 (page 48 of 472) (English)

802511

Zoom out

Zoom in

1/472

OWNER'S MANUAL

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

All information in this Owner’s Manual is current at the time of

publication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make

changes at any time without prior notice and without obligation

to incorporate such changes so that our policy of continual

product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes

descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard

equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual

that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

This booklet is not intended to be a substitute for the Owner’s

Manual given in QR Code provided at the backside of the cover

page.

Alcazar

Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may

adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI

and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering

the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations

established by the Department of Transportation and other government

agencies in your country.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic

components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio

or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason,

we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer’s instructions

or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or special

instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

7:2ǘ:$<5$',225&(//8/$5

TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

This manual includes information titled as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and

NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in

death or serious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result

in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result

in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle

damage.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

Table of Contents

Hyundai Warranty Policy

Vehicle Information

Safety System

Instrument Cluster

While Driving

Emergency Situations

Maintenance

Convenience Features

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the

growing number of discriminating people who drive HYUNDAI. The advanced

engineering and high-quality construction of each HYUNDAI we build is some-

thing of which we’re very proud.

Your Owner’s Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your

new HYUNDAI. It is suggested that you read it carefully because the informa-

tion it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your

new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that service and maintenance on your

vehicle be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this

manual, if you sell this HYUNDAI, please leave the manual in the vehicle

for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION

Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor

quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet HYUNDAI specifications.

You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the spec-

ifications listed in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner’s

Manual.

publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted

in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI

Motor Company.

Petrol engine

Unleaded

Your new vehicle is designed to use

only unleaded fuel having an Octane

Rating of RON (Research Octane

Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

87 or higher. (Do not use methanol

blended fuels)

Your new vehicle is designed to

obtain maximum performance with

UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-

mize exhaust emissions and spark

plug fouling.

NOTICE

NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The

use of leaded fuel is detrimental to

the catalytic converter and will

damage the engine control sys-

tem’s oxygen sensor and affect

emission control.

Also, severe wear and crack of pis-

ton ring, valve, etc. may occur and

knocking noise may be heard from

your engine.

Never add any fuel system clean-

ing agents to the fuel tank other

than what has been specified (We

recommend that you consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for

details.)

WARNING

• Do not “top off” after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refueling.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent

fuel spillage in the event of an

accident.

Petrol containing alcohol and

methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of petrol and eth-

anol (also known as grain alcohol),

and petrol or gasohol containing

methanol (also known as wood alco-

hol) are being marketed along with or

instead of leaded or unleaded gaso-

line.

Do not use gasohol containing more

than 20% ethanol, and do not use

petrol or gasohol containing any

methanol. Either of these fuels may

cause drivability problems and dam-

age to the fuel system, engine control

system and emission control system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any

kind if drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or driveability prob-

lems may not be covered by the man-

ufacturer’s warranty if they result from

the use of:

1. Gasohol containing more than

20% ethanol.

2. Petrol or gasohol containing meth-

anol.

3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION

Never use gasohol which contains

methanol. Discontinue use of any

gasohol product which impairs

drivability.

Using Fuel Additives

Using fuel additives such as:

- Silicone fuel additive

- MMT (Manganese, Mn) fuel addi-

tive

- Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel addi-

tive

- Other metallic-based fuel additives

May result in cylinder misfire, poor

acceleration, engine stalling, engine

plugging, heavy knocking noise,

damage to the catalyst, or abnormal

corrosion, and may cause damage to

the engine resulting in a reduction in

the overall life of the powertrain. The

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

may illuminate.

NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or per-

formance problem caused by the

use of these fuels may not be cov-

ered by your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Use of MTBE

HYUNDAI recommends avoiding

fuels containing MTBE (Methyl

Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) in

your vehicle.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%

vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)

may reduce vehicle performance and

produce vapor lock or hard starting.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty

may not cover damage to the fuel

system and any performance prob-

lems that are caused by the use of

fuels containing methanol or fuels

containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary

Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood

alcohol) should not be used in your

vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce

vehicle performance and damage

components of the fuel system,

engine control system and emission

control system.

Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use

unleaded petrol which has an Octane

Rating of RON (Research Octane

Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

87 or higher.

For customers who do not use good

quality petrol including fuel additives

regularly, and have problems starting

or the engine does not run smoothly,

one bottle of additives added to the

fuel tank is recommended according

to the maintenance schedule (refer to

chapter 8, “Normal Maintenance

Schedule”).

Additives are available from your

authorized HYUNDAI dealer along

with information on how to use them.

Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle

in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding

registration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is

available.

Diesel engine

Diesel fuel

Diesel engine must be operated only

on commercially available diesel fuel

that complies with EN 590 or compa-

rable standard. (EN stands for

“European Norm”). Do not use marine

diesel fuel, heating oils, or non-ap-

proved fuel additives, as this will

increase wear and cause damage to

the engine and fuel system. The use

of non-approved fuels and / or fuel

additives will result in a limitation of

your warranty rights.

Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is

used in your vehicle. If two types of

diesel fuel are available, use summer

or winter fuel properly according to

the following temperature conditions.

• Above - 5°C(23°F) ... Summer

type diesel fuel.

• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type

diesel fuel.

Watch the fuel level in the tank very

carefully : If the engine stops through

fuel failure, the circuits must be com-

pletely purged to permit restarting.

CAUTION

Do not let any petrol or water enter

the tank. This would make it nec-

essary to drain it out and to bleed

the lines to avoid jamming the

injection pump and damaging the

engine.

CAUTION

- Diesel Fuel

(if equipped with DPF)

It is recommended to use the regu-

lated automotive diesel fuel for

diesel vehicle equipped with the

DPF system.

If you use diesel fuel including

high sulfur (more than 10 ppm sul-

fur) and unspecified additives, it

can cause the DPF system to be

damaged and white smoke can be

emitted.

Biodiesel

Commercially supplied Diesel blends

of no more than 7% biodiesel, com-

monly known as “B7 Diesel” may be

used in your vehicle if Biodiesel

meets EN 14214 or equivalent speci-

fications. (EN stands for “European

Norm”). The use of biofuels exceed-

ing 7% made from rapeseed methyl

ester (RME), fatty acid methyl ester

(FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester

(VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceed-

ing 7% with biodiesel will cause

increased wear or damage to the

engine and fuel system. Repair or

replacement of worn or damaged

components due to the use of non

approved fuels will not be covered by

the manufactures warranty.

CAUTION

• Never use any fuel, whether die-

sel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise,

that fails to meet the latest petro-

leum industry specification.

• Never use any fuel additives or

treatments that are not recom-

mended or approved by the

vehicle manufacturer.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS

• This vehicle should not be modi-

fied. Modification of your vehicle

could affect its performance, safety

or durability and may even violate

governmental safety and emis-

sions regulations.

In addition, damage or perfor-

mance problems resulting from

any modification may not be cov-

ered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle

to operate abnormally, wire dam-

age, battery discharge and fire. For

your safety, we recommend that

you do not use unauthorized elec-

tronic devices.

9(+,&/(%5($.ǘ,1

PROCESS

No special break-in period is needed.

By following a few simple precautions

for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you

may add to the performance, econo-

my and life of your vehicle:

• Do not race the engine.

• While driving, avoid sudden accel-

eration.

• Do not maintain a single speed for

long periods of time, either fast or

slow.

Varying engine speed is needed to

properly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-

gencies, to allow the brakes to

seat properly.

• Fuel economy and engine perfor-

mance, engine oil consumption

may vary depending on vehicle

break-in process and be stabilized

after driving about 6,000 km. New

engines may consume more oil

during the vehicle break-in period.

• Don’t tow a trailer during the first

2,000 km (1,200 miles) of opera-

tion.

Hyundai New Vehicle Warranty ........................................................................-2

Replacement Parts Warranty ............................................................................-3

Hyundai Extended Warranty ............................................................................-5

Labour Free Service of Vehicle ........................................................................-5

Hyundai Road Side Assistance ....................................................-6

Labour Free Service Coupons..........................................................................-7



. Hyundai Warranty Policy



-2

Hyundai Warranty Policy

HYUNDAI NEW VEHICLE WARRANTY

Hyundai Motor India Limited herein-

after called “HMIL”, warrants that

each new Hyundai vehicle sold shall

be free from any defects in material

and workmanship, under normal use

and maintenance, subject to the fol-

lowing terms and conditions.

1. Warranty Period

This warranty for hyundai vehicle

shall exist for a period of 36 months

from the date of delivery to the first

purchaser irrespective of the mile-

age. However the warranty for hyun-

dai vehicle being used for commer-

cial purpose such as Taxi/Tourist

operation is 36 months/100,000 Kms

from the date of delivery to the first

purchaser which soever is earlier.

This warranty is transferable to sub-

sequent owner for the remaining

warranty period. This warranty is ap-

plicable only in India and not trans-

ferable to any other country.

2. What is covered

Except as provided in paragraph 3

hereof, our Authorized Dealers shall

either repair or replace, any Hyundai

genuine part that is acknowledged by

HMIL to be defective in material or

workmanship within the warranty pe-

riod stipulated above, at no cost to

the owner of the Hyundai vehicle for

parts or labour. Such defective parts

which have been replaced will be-

come the property of HMIL

3. What is not covered

This warranty shall not apply to:

▶Normal maintenance services

other than the three labour free

services, including without lim-

itation, cleaning and polishing,

minor adjustments, engine tun-

ing, oil/fluid changes, filters re-

plenishment, fastener retighten-

ing, wheel balancing, wheel

alignment and tyre rotation etc.

▶Replacement of parts as a result

of normal wear and tear such as

spark plugs, belts, brake pads

and linings, clutch disc/facing,

filters, wiper blades, bulbs, fuses,

etc.

Damage or failure resulting from :

▶Negligence of proper mainte-

nance as required in this Owner’s

Manual and Service Booklet.

▶Misuse, abuse, accident, theft,-

flooding or fire.

▶Use of improper or insufficientfu-

el, fluids or lubricants.

▶Use of parts other than Hyundai

Genuine Parts.

▶Any device and/or accessories-

not supplied by HMIL.

▶Modifications, alterations, tam-

pering or improper repair.

▶Parts used in applications of-

which they were not designed or

not approved by HMIL.

▶Slight irregularities not rec-

ognised as affecting quality or-

function of the vehicle or parts,-

such as slight noise or

vibrations,or items considered-

characteristic of the vehicle.

▶Airborne “fallout”, Industrialfall

out, acid rain, hail and wind-

storms, or other Acts of God.

-3

0

▶Paint scratches, dents or similar-

paint or body damage.

▶Action of road elements (sand,-

gravel, dust or road debris) which

results in stone chipping of paint

or glass.

▶Incidental or consequential dam-

ages, including without limita-

tion, loss of time, inconvenience,

loss of use of vehicle or commer-

cial loss.

such as operation in extremely

dusty, rough, more repeated

short distance driving or heavy

city traffic during hot weather,

maintenance of vehicle should

be done more frequently as men-

tioned in this Owner’s Manual

and Service Booklet

▶Retention of maintenance service

records. It may be necessary for

the customer to show that the re-

quired maintenance has been

performed, as specified in this

Owner’s Manual and Service

Booklet.

▶Delivery of the vehicle during reg-

ular service business hours to

any authorized Hyundai Dealer to

obtain warranty service.

▶In order to maintain the validity of

this Basic Warranty, the vehicle

must be serviced by Hyundai Au-

thorized workshop in accordance

to the Owner’s Manual and Ser-

vice Booklet.

PARTS REPLACEMENT WARǢ

RANTY

Hyundai Motor India Limited herein-

after called “HMIL”, warrants that

each new Hyundai Genuine replace-

ment part purchased from and in-

stalled by Hyundai Authorized Dealer

shall be free from any defects in ma-

terial or workmanship, unde normal

use and maintenance, subject to the

following terms and conditions

1. Warranty period

This warranty shall exist for a period

of 6 months or until the vehicle has

▶This warranty is the entire war-

ranty given by HMIL for Hyundai

vehicles and no dealer or its or his

agent or employee is authorized

to extend or enlarge this warranty

and no dealer or its or his agent

or employee is authorized to

make any oral warranty on HMIL’s

behalf.

▶HMIL reserves the right to make

any change in design or make

any improvement on the vehicle

at any time without any obliga-

tion to make the same change on

vehicles previously sold.

▶HMIL reserves the right for the fi-

nal decision in all warranty mat-

ters.

Owner’s Responsibilities

▶Proper use, maintenance and care

of vehicle in accordance with the

instructions contained in this

Owner’s Manual and Service

Booklet. If the vehicle is subject

to severe usage conditions, su-

$XGLR9LGHR1DYLJDWLRQ6\VWHP

:LUHOHVV &KDUJHU $LU 3XULILHU

Batteries, Tyres & Tubes

$XGLR6\VWHPV RUDQ\ H[WHUQDO

DFFHVRU\ originally equipped on

Hyundai vehicles are warranted

directly by the respective

manufacturers and not by HMIL.

-4

Hyundai Warranty Policy

been driven for a distance of 10,000

Kilometers from the date of installa-

tion of replacement part by Hyundai

Authorized Dealer, whichever occurs

first.

2. What is covered

Our Authorized Dealers shall either

repair or replace, any Hyundai genu-

ine par listed in paragraph 3 hereof,

that is acknowledged by HMIL to be

defective in material or workmanship

within the warranty period stipulated

above, after examinations carried

out to confirm that none of the origi

al settings have been tampered with,

at no cost to the owner of the Hyund-

ai vehicle for parts or labour. Such

defective parts which have been re-

placed will become the property of

HMIL

3. What is not covered

This warranty shall not apply to:

Normal maintenance services of

parts such as cleaning, adjust-

ment or replacement (i.e. spark

plugs that are oil fouled, lead

fouled, or which fail due to the

use of low grade fuel).

Parts that fail due to abuse, mis-

use, neglect, alteration or acci-

dent or which have been improp-

erly lubricated or repaired

Parts used in applications for-

which they were not designed or

approved by HMIL.

Failure due to normal wear of-

parts.

Direct or indirect failures caused

by misuse and improper mainte-

nance of vehicle.

Any vehicle on which the odome-

ter reading has been altered so

that mileage cannot be accurate-

ly determined.

Incidental or consequential dam-

ages, including without limita-

tion, loss of time, inconvenience,

loss of use of vehicle or commer-

cial loss.

This warranty is the entire warranty

given by HMIL for Hyundai replace-

ment parts and no de aler or its or his

agent or employee is authorized to

extend or enlarge this warranty and

no dealer or its or his agent or em-

ployee is authorized to make any oral

warranty on HMIL’s behalf. HMIL re-

serves the right for the final decision

in all warranty matters.

Owner’s Responsibility :

Proper use, maintenance and re

of the vehicle in accordancewith

the instructions contained in the

Owner’s Manual and Service

Booklet.

Retention of maintenance ser-

vice records. It may be necessary

for the customer to show that the

required maintenance has been

performed, as specified in this

Owner’s Manual and Service

Booklet.

Retention of the customer’s copy

of the original repair order and

its invoice/bill against which the

part was replaced.

Delivery of the vehicle during

regular service business hours to

the same Hyundai Authorized

Dealer who had sold and installed

the replacement part

In order to maintain the validity

-5

of this Parts replacement War-

ranty, the vehicle must be ser-

viced by Hyundai Authorized

workshop in accordance to the

Owner’s Manual and Service

Booklet.

Labour Free Service of Vehicle

Your vehicle is entitled for first three

labour free services ofPeriodic

Maintenance Schedule (PMS). Please

refer page - for Oabour free service

coupons and page - for PMS

services.

NOTICE :

All Consumables, WheelAlignment

and / or Part Replacement (if not

covered in warranty), if required

are chargeable to the customer(s).

HYUNDAI EXTENDED WARRANTY*

HMIL offers optional paid extended

warranty on selected models, in

addition to the basic new vehicle

warranty. For more details on

Hyundai Extended Warranty please

call the nearest dealer or our toll

free number 1-800-11-4645.

2U9LVLWRXU+\XQGDL:HEVLWH

ZZZK\XQGDLFRLQ

*Conditions apply

0

We are pleased to introduce you to our 24 X 7 Hyundai Road Side Assistance Programme

Our Road Side Assistance number is : 1800 102 4645 (toll free),

(0124)2564645 (call charges apply)

Hyundai Roadside assistance is a 24 X 7 emergency support provided in the event of any mechanical/electrical

breakdown and/or road traffic accident of a vehicle.

Covered Events & Benefits *

Break Down/Accident Roadside repair or vehicle recovery in case of

breakdown/road traffic accident

Tire Related Tire Puncture – Replacement of Punctured tire with the

spare tire

Battery Related Dead Battery –Jump Start

Key Related Locked keys, lost keys or broken vehicle keys

Terms and Conditions

1) The Service is applicable for 3 years from the date of sale

2) The 24 X 7 Road Side Assistance is available up to a nearest Hyundai Authorised

dealer workshop

3) The Service is applicable for a condition in which the vehicle has been immobile

4) Cost of parts replacement is not included, unless covered under Hyundai Warranty

5) Cost of repairs made to your vehicle is not included, unless it is covered under

Hyundai Warranty.

6) For Online retail RSA & Complete TnC’s, kindly visit:

https://hyundai.awpassistance.in/

* Terms and Conditions apply.

-

Hyundai Warranty Policy

-7

RO Number

Dealer/HASC code

RO Number

Dealer/HASC code

RO Number

Dealer/HASC code



/DERXU)UHH6HUYLFH

&RXSRQ

UG/DERXU)UHH6HUYLFH

&&RXSRQ 

 /DERXU)UHH6HUYLFH

&&RXSRQ 

/DERXU)UHH6HUYLFHVDUHYDOLGDWDOO+\XQGDLGHDOHUVKLSVGHDOHUEUDQFKHVDQGDXWKRUL]HGVHUYLFH&HQWUHV

0

  

     



BW~hPW vUBWhPW ~UBWiPW BWhPW

 9Ws/WP~hzhxv @W|U /xvW @W|U /xvW AW|U /xvW  9Yt0YRj{jyw AY}V 0ywY

 

9 @ @  J0CfMaVk_YYwjMqDMw]YRMYyjq

 CYYkwddYMMRmrkwnMdYMwVOyy 9

+ + " 2fMYt 9

@ $ 5Yo]hpY~?Yyoywp

9 9 9 % 5Yo]hpYRMjVdY0jYWpywp

 -fMRyMq-MwjY?W~xoxvp

+ +



5YoMwmMi]hpY?Wxoxvo

o9@ o9@ o9@  5ywYM{YwkywqkwmMdYOMqrlyjw 9

9 9  5YopiwYfyYMwVRywwYRjyw 9

9 9 9



0jYfMaOyy 9

o9@ o9@ o9@  5rkVrYMmMdY 9

  5ywMwVYKfYYrOYM~kwdOfY q9A

9 9 9 " 5ywMwVYMViTVtOMmY{MV 9

9 9 9 $ ?MmjwdOMmYVjRfyYy{YMiyw 9

%

JfYYp(pidwtYw*MoMwRiwd

 GY{YYRywVkkywyMjyw

 

9 : 9  *yoMwVwywRfMiMwVOyV 9

9 : 9  <OjRMYqyRmfkwdY ;

: 9  (rrYrYRjRMqYtV~kYOYqMrYwMy 9

9 + @  JMwjwdqjdfy{YMkyw70C .gYSn 9

9 : 9  3jwojdffywdMdY 9

 

 1vbhvWxio^hoW'

 1vbhvWDhsivb+eKhvNWo

 (hPoWKvW~^hpW~>W~xpxvoZ

 (h~QoXLvX~ 5hoX~/hXXoxvo

 )KWPxvUhixvzWPi^hPbKh

! DexoWNxU>Wxoxvo

" BzK~mzob>Wxoxvo

# HKoWPpWK~KvPW

& 8xWIKPPs16@H6EJ6D

 +~KvmPKWWvhpKhxvexW

 FvhxvWhUpWUKszW~zooW

 >xWWW~hvb^oiUKvUoWKmKbW

 )KmW+oPe[phU

 1vbhvWPxxoKv

 =KvKpKvKoW[phU

! (xsKhP+HD/+DKvKoW[phU

 

" JhzW~izWNpKUWKeW~`hU

# )KmW+oPf\~XXzoLoXLmLcX

& 4Wo^hopW~PKz

 +ohsKWPxvxpKh[ioW~

 ,eXQm(,Xs~X\~hcXLvQxsz~Xx~

 +xxoivbWs pWKmKbW 9 9 9

" (ppYMOYpy{YMjyw 9



       o9@

 

$ AyMVY

  

)

 

 

 

vUBWhPW

@W|U /xvW

9

r9@

9

q;A

D@

9



9

q;A

~UBWhPW

@W|U /xvW

9

@

9

q;A

9

o9A

DA

9



9

o;@

-8

Hyundai Warranty Policy

Reqd. Done Reqd. Done Reqd. Done Reqd. Done Reqd. Done Reqd. Done

A C

1 Engine oil & filter* I R R 24 4WD Shaft differential Transfer case oil** - - -

2 Engine Timing Chain / belt - - - 25 Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I

3 Air cleaner filter (Petrol only)* - C C 26 Exhaust system I I I

4 Air cleaner filter (T-Gdi only)* - C R 27 Fuel filter (Petrol only) - - -

5 Air cleaner Filter (Diesel only)* - C R 28 Fuel filter cartridge (Diesel only)* - - R

6 Battery condition & specific gravity I I I 29 Charcoal Canister (Petrol only) - - -

7 Throttle body (Petrol only) - - - 30 Fuel tank air filter (if equipped) (Petrol only)** - - -

8 Spark plugs (Petrol only) - C C 31 Front & rear suspension (linkages & ball joints) I I I

9 Valve clearance I (IR) I (IR) I (IR) 32 Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I

10 Hoses (Vaccum/ EGR/ VGT/ WGT) - I I 33 Driveshafts & boots I I I

11 Crankcase ventilation hose I I I 34 Fluid leakages I I I

12 Tensioner/idler/damper pulley I (IR) I (IR) I (IR) 35 Front and rear wheel bearing & bushes I (IR) I (IR) I (IR)

13 Power steering fluid and leakages** - - - 36 Front and rear disc/drum brakes & pads I I I

14 Brake/Clutch fluid I I I 37 Parking brake (disc, shoe & operation) I I I

15 Engine coolant I I I 38 Wheel alignment & balancing* - I (IR) I (IR)

16 Manual transaxle fluid - - - 39 Tyre pressure, condition & rotation* - I, TR I, TR

17 Automatic/CVT/IVT/DCT/iMT transaxle fluid** - - - D

B40 Bolt and nuts on chasis and body I I I

18 Wiper (wiper blade, washer fluid) I I I 41 Lubricate locks & hinges I L L

19 Brake/Clutch (free play & leakages) I I I 42 All electrical systems (drive belts, alternator) I I I

20 Fuel filler cap - I I 43 Warning lights operation & GDS system check I I I

21 Climate control air filter* I C R 44 Ext & int. lights, horn & gauges I I I

22 Check AC system (refrigerant/compressor) I I I 45 Sunroof operation (if equipped) C C C

23 Cooling system & leakage I I I 46 All seat belt operation I I I

47 Road test I (IR) I (IR) I (IR)

**If Applicable

1st Service - 1,500 km/2 months

2nd Service - 10,000 km/12 months

3rd Service - 20,000 km/24 months

CHECK LIST FOR FREE SERVICE 1,500 KM - 20,000 KM

A - ADD I - INSPECT C - CLEAN R - REPLACE L - LUBRICATE I (IR) - INSPECT IF REQUIRED TR - TYRE ROTATION

(AFTER INSPECTION, ADD, REPAIR OR REPLACE IF NECESSARY)

No. Item Description 1st Service 2nd Service 3rd Service No. Item Description

VEHICLE ON FLOOR

*All consumables are chargeable to the customer(s)

1st Service 2nd Service 3rd Service

ENGINE BAY VEHICLE ON LIFT

FINAL CHECKS

Exterior overview (front view) ............................................................................2-2

Exterior overview (rear view) .............................................................................2-3

Interior overview .................................................................................................2-4

Center console overview....................................................................................2-5

Engine compartment overview .........................................................................2-7

Dimensions .........................................................................................................2-9

Engine specification ...........................................................................................2-9

Bulb wattage .....................................................................................................2-10

Tires and wheels ................................................................................................2-11

Gross vehicle weight .........................................................................................2-11

Recommended lubricants and capacities .......................................................2-12

Recommended sae viscosity number ..........................................................2-14

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................................................................2-15

Vehicle certification label ..................................................................................2-15

Tire specification and pressure label .............................................................. 2-16

Engine number ................................................................................................. 2-16

Air conditioner compressor label .................................................................... 2-16

2. Vehicle Information

2-2

Vehicle Information

1. Hood .....................................................................................................................5-38

2. Front windshield wiper blades ..............................................................................8-44

3. Outside rearview mirror ........................................................................................5-25

4. Front lights............................................................................................................8-71

5. Panorama sunroof ................................................................................................5-33

6. Windows ...............................................................................................................5-28

7. Tires and wheels ..................................................................................................8-50

8. Front fog light (if equipped) ..................................................................................8-71

9. Front sensor .........................................................................................................5-60

(;7(5,2529(59,(:ǣ)52179,(:Ǥ

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

OSU2I011026

2-3

1. Door ......................................................................................................................5-16

(WGNſNNGTFQQT ......................................................................................................5-42

3. Antenna ..............................................................................................................5-101

4. Rear window wiper blades ...................................................................................8-45

5. High mounted stop light .......................................................................................8-78

6. Tailgate .................................................................................................................5-40

7. Rear View Camera ...............................................................................................5-56

8. Rear Ultrasonic sensors .......................................................................................5-60

9. Rear lights ............................................................................................................8-75

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

OSU2I011002

(;7(5,2529(59,(:ǣ5($59,(:Ǥ

2-4

Vehicle Information

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

OSU2I012027

,17(5,2529(59,(:

1. Inside door handle ................................................................................................5-18

2. Outside rearview mirror folding* ...........................................................................5-27

3. Outside rearview mirror control*...........................................................................5-26

4. Power window switch* ..........................................................................................5-28

5. Power window lock button* ..................................................................................5-31

6. Central door lock/unlock button............................................................................5-19

7. Headlight leveling device .....................................................................................5-49

8. ESC OFF button* .................................................................................................6-53

9. Idle stop and go (ISG) OFF button ......................................................................6-60

10. Hood release lever .............................................................................................5-38

11. Steering wheel....................................................................................................5-22

12. Seat ......................................................................................................................3-4

13. Fuse box.............................................................................................................8-65

(WGNſNNGTFQQTQRGPGT ........................................................................................5-42

* : if equipped

2-5

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

OSU2I010004

&(17(5&2162/(29(59,(:

1. Instrument cluster ...................................................................................................4-2

2. Horn ......................................................................................................................5-23

3. Driver’s front air bag .............................................................................................3-52

4. Key ignition switch* ................................................................................................6-6

Engine Start/Stop button* ....................................................................................6-10

5. Light control/Turn signals .....................................................................................5-45

6. Wiper/Washer .......................................................................................................5-53

*C\CTFYCTPKPIƀCUJGTUYKVEJ ...............................................................................7-2

8. Manual climate control system* ...........................................................................5-69

Automatic climate control system* ........................................................................5-78

9. Passenger’s front air bag .....................................................................................3-52

10. Glove box ...........................................................................................................5-90

11. USB charger* .....................................................................................................5-95

12. Wireless cellular phone charging system* .........................................................5-96

13. Power outlet* ......................................................................................................5-94

* : if equipped

2-6

Vehicle Information

14. Manual Transmission* ........................................................................................6-18

Dual Clutch Transmission* .................................................................................6-21

Automatic Transmission*....................................................................................6-31

15. Drive mode button* ............................................................................................6-65

Drive/traction control mode button* ....................................................................6-68

16. EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)* ........................................................................6-41

17. Auto Hold* ..........................................................................................................6-47

18. Cruise button*.....................................................................................................6-71

19. Air ventilation seat ..............................................................................................3-18

20. Parking/View button ...........................................................................................5-61

* : if equipped

2-7

1. Engine oil dipstick ................................................................................................8-27

'PIKPGQKNſNNGTECR ............................................................................................... 8-27

3. Engine coolant reservoir ......................................................................................8-31

$TCMGENWVEJƀWKFTGUGTXQKT .................................................................................8-34

9KPFUJKGNFYCUJGTƀWKFTGUGTXQKT ....................................................................... 8-37

6. Air cleaner ............................................................................................................8-40

7. Battery ..................................................................................................................8-46

8. Fuse box...............................................................................................................8-63

* : if equipped

(1*,1(&203$570(1729(59,(:

The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OSU2I092001



Petrol Engine (Smartstream G1.5 T-GDi)

2-8

Vehicle Information

1. Engine oil dipstick ................................................................................................8-28

'PIKPGQKNſNNGTECR ............................................................................................... 8-29

3. Engine coolant reservoir ......................................................................................8-31

4. Radiator cap .........................................................................................................8-32

$TCMGENWVEJƀWKFTGUGTXQKT .................................................................................8-34

9KPFUJKGNFYCUJGTƀWKFTGUGTXQKT ........................................................................8-37

7. Air cleaner ............................................................................................................8-40

8. Battery ..................................................................................................................8-46

9. Engine room fuse block........................................................................................8-63

* : if equipped

The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.



Diesel Engine (1.5 VGT)

OSU2I089003

2-9

',0(16,216

Items mm

Overall length 4,500

Overall width 1,790

Overall height Without roof rack 1,670

With roof rack 1,635

Front tread 215/60 R17 1,559.5

215/55 R18

Rear tread 215/60 R17 1,564.3

215/55 R18

Wheelbase 2,760

(1*,1(63(&,),&$7,21

Item Petrol Engine Diesel Engine

Smartstream G1.5 T-GDi 1.5 VGT

Displacement

cc (cu. in)

1,482

(90.43) 1,493

(91.1)

Bore x Stroke

mm (in.)

71.6 x 92

(2.81 x 3.62) 75 X 84.5

(2.95 X 3.33)

Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2

No. of cylinders 4, In-line 4, In-line

2-10

Vehicle Information

%8/%:$77$*(

Light bulb Bulb type Wattage

Front

Headlight

High/Low

(Type A) HB3 60

High/Low

(Type B) LED LED

Daytime running

light (DRL)/

Position light Type A/B LED LED

Turn signal light Type A/B PY21W 21

Front fog light Bulb H881 (27W)

Rear

Stop light Type A Bulb P21/5W (21W)

Type B LED LED

Tail light LED LED

Turn signal light Type A/B Bulb P21W (21W)

Back up light Bulb P21W (21W)

High mounted stop light LED LED

License plate light W5W 5

Interior

Map lamp Type A WEDGE 8

Type B LED LED

Personal lamp (if equipped) LED LED

Room lamp (if equipped) FESTOON 10

Tailgate room lamp FESTOON 10

Cargo area lamp FESTOON 10

2-11

7,5(6$1':+((/6

Type Tire size Wheel

size

Inflation pressure kPa (psi) Wheel lug nut

torque kgf·m

(lbf·ft, N·m)

Normal load *1Maximum load

Front Rear Front Rear

Full size

tire

215/60 R17 6.5J X 17 230

(33) 230

(33) 240

(35) 240

(35) 11~13

(79~94,

107~127)

215/55 R18 6.5J X 18 230

(33) 230

(33) 240

(35) 240

(35)

Spare tire 215/60 R17 6.5J X 17 230

(33) 230

(33) 240

(35) 240

(35)

*1 : Normal load : Up to 3 persons

NOTICE

• It is permissible to add 20 kPa (3 psi) to the standard tire pressure

specification if colder temperatures are expected soon. Tires typically

lose 7 kPa (1 psi) for every 7°C (12°F) temperature drop. If extreme tem-

perature variations are expected, recheck your tire pressure as neces-

sary to keep them properly inflated.

• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude

area above sea level. Thus, if you plan to drive a high-altitude area,

check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a

proper level (Air inflation per altitude: +10 kPa/1 km (+2.4 psi/1 mile).

• Spare tire are intended for emergency purpose only.

• Only steel wheel is provided as a spare wheel. Spare tire can be from

any manufacturer.

CAUTION

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work ir-

regularly.

*52669(+,&/(:(,*+7

Gross vehicle weight [kg (Ibs.)]

Items 6-seater 7-seater

Smartstream

G1.5 T-GDi DCT 1,925 (4,243) 2,000 (4,409)

M/T 1,900 (4,188) 1,975 (4,354)

Diesel 1.5 VGT A/T 1,985 (4,376) 2,060 (4,541)

M/T 1,955 (4,310) 2,030 (4,475)

M/T: Manual transmission

DCT: Dual clutch transmission

A/T: Automatic transmission

2-12

Vehicle Information

5(&200(1'('/8%5,&$176$1'&$3$&,7,(6

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *1 *2

(drain and refill) Petrol Engine Smartstream

G1.5 T-GDi 4.2 l Full synthetic SAE 0W-20,

API SN PLUS/SP or ILSAC GF-6

Diesel 1.5 VGT With DPF *3

4.8 l ACEA C5 or C3 or C2

Without DPF *3ACEA C5 or C3 or C2 or A3/B4 *4

Manual transmission fluid

Smartstream

G1.5 T-GDi 1.5 ~ 1.6 lAPI Serviced GL-4, SAE 70W, TGO-9

(HYUNDAI genuine transmission fluid)

1.5 VGT

Dual clutch transmission fluid

(If Equipped) Smartstream

G1.5 T-GDi 1.9 ~2.0 lAPI Serviced GL-4, SAE 70W

Automatic transmission fluid 1.5 VGT 7.1 l ATF SP-IV,

HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper qual-

ity. The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

2-13

Lubricant Volume Classification

Coolant

Smartstream

G1.5 T-GDi M/T 6.3 lMIXTURE, Antifreeze with water

(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radi-

ator)

DCT

1.5 VGT M/T 7.2 l

A/T 7.0 l

Brake/Clutch fluid 0.7~0.8 lSAE J1704 DOT-4LV, FMVSS 116 DOT-4,

ISO4925 CLASS-6

Fuel *550 l

Urea (Diesel only, if equipped) 12 lISO22241, DIN70070

*1 : Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2 : Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel

economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to

measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

*3 : Diesel Particulate Filter

*4 : If the recommended engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use engine oil above API CH-4 or above.

*5 : The fuel filling capacity mentioned is less than the actual fuel tank capacity. The extra capacity in the tank is provided to

cater the vapour creation of fuel, to prevent leakage of volatile organic compounds and fuel into the atmosphere. Further,

it is recommended that do not fill the tank after auto cut-off at the fuel station during filling fuel.

M/T: Manual Transmission

DCT: Dual Clutch Transmission

A/T: Automatic Transmission

2-14

Vehicle Information

Recommended SAE viscosity number

CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or

dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially im-

portant in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved

roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from

entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather

operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils

can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, high-

er viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather.

Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in en-

gine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be

operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil

viscosity from the chart.

*1 : If mineral oil or semi-synthetic oil is used, it is a severe maintenance condition in

terms of engine oil change.

An engine oil displaying this API Certification Mark conforms

to the international Lubricant Specification Advisory Commit-

tee (ILSAC). It is recommended to only use engine oils that

uphold this API Certification Mark.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

°C

(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

(Diesel) 1.5 VGT 5W-30

OW-20/30

OW-20

(Petrol) Smartstream

G1.5 T-GDi *1

2-15

9(+,&/(,'(17,),&$7,21

180%(5ǣ9,1Ǥ

9(+,&/(&(57,),&$7,21

/$%(/ǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

OSU2I019020

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the number used in register-

ing your car and in all legal matters

pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor

under the front right seat. To check

the number, pull out the slit part of

carpet.

OSU2019025

The vehicle certification label at-

tached on the driver’s (or front pas-

senger’s) side center pillar gives the

vehicle identification number (VIN).

2-16

Vehicle Information

7,5(63(&,),&$7,21$1'

35(6685(/$%(/

OSU2I019021

The tires supplied on your new vehi-

cle are chosen to provide the best

performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver’s

side center pillar gives the tire pres-

sures recommended for your car.

(1*,1(180%(5

OPDE080004

The engine number is stamped on

the engine block as shown in the

drawing.

$,5&21',7,21(5

&2035(6625/$%(/

OHC081001

A compressor label informs you the

type of compressor your vehicle is

equipped with such as model, suppli-

er part number, production number,

refrigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).

Important safety precautions ............................................................................3-2

Always wear your seat belt .............................................................................3-2

Restrain all children .........................................................................................3-2

Air bag hazards ................................................................................................3-2

Driver distraction .............................................................................................3-2

Control your speed ..........................................................................................3-3

Keep your vehicle in safe condition ...............................................................3-3

Seats ....................................................................................................................3-4

Front seats .......................................................................................................3-7

Rear seats ........................................................................................................3-12

Air ventilation seats .......................................................................................3-18

Seat belts ...........................................................................................................3-19

Seat belt warning light ..................................................................................3-20

Seat belt restraint system .............................................................................3-23

Pre-tensioner seat belt ..................................................................................3-26

Additional seat belt safety precautions .......................................................3-28

Care of seat belts ...........................................................................................3-30

Child restraint system ........................................................................................3-31

Using a child restraint system ......................................................................3-33

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS) ....................................................3-34

Air bag - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .............................................3-45

How does the air bag system operate ........................................................3-46

Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger’s seat .....................3-47

Air bag warning and indicator ..................................................................... 3-48

SRS components and functions .................................................................. 3-48

Driver’s and passenger’s front air bag ......................................................... 3-51

Side impact air bag .......................................................................................3-53

Curtain air bag ...............................................................................................3-54

SRS Care ........................................................................................................3-60

Air bag warning label ....................................................................................3-62

3. Safety System

This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect

yourself and your passengers. It explains how to properly use your seats and

seat belts, and how your air bags work.

Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and chil-

dren in your vehicle.

3-2

Safety System

You will find many safety precautions

and recommendations throughout

this section, and throughout this man-

ual.The safety precautions in this

section are among the most import-

ant.

Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in

all types of accidents. Air bags are

designed to supplement seat belts,

not replace them. So even though

your vehicle is equipped with air

bags, ALWAYS make sure you and

your passengers wear your seat

belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain all children

All children under age 13 should ride

in your vehicle properly restrained in

a rear seat, not the front seat.Infants

and small children should be re-

strained in an appropriate child re-

straint. Larger children should use a

booster seat with the lap/shoulder

belt until they can use the seat belt

properly without a booster seat.

Air bag hazards

While air bags can save lives, they

can also cause serious or fatal inju-

ries to occupants who sit too close to

them, or who are not properly re-

strained.

Infants, young children, and short

adults are at the greatest risk of being

injured by an inflating air bag. Follow

all instructions and warnings in this

manual.

Driver distraction

Driver distraction presents a serious

and potentially deadly danger, espe-

cially for inexperienced drivers.Safety

should be the first concern when be-

hind the wheel and drivers need to be

aware of the wide array of potential

distractions, such as drowsiness,

reaching for objects, eating, personal

grooming, other passengers, and us-

ing cellular phones. Drivers can be-

come distracted when they take their

eyes and attention off the road or

their hands off the wheel to focus on

activities other than driving.To reduce

your risk of distraction and an acci-

dent:

• ALWAYS set up your mobile devic-

es (for example, MP3 players,

phones, navigation units, etc.)

when your vehicle is parked or

safely stopped.

• ONLY use your mobile device

when allowed by laws and condi-

tions permit safe use.

NEVER text or email while driving.

Most countries have laws prohibit-

ing drivers from texting. Some

countries and cities also prohibit

drivers from using handheld

phones.

• NEVER let the use of a mobile de-

vice distract you from driving.You

have a responsibility to your pas-

sengers and others on the road to

always drive safely, with your

hands on the wheel as well as your

eyes and attention on the road.

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

3-3

Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in

crash injuries and deaths. Generally,

the higher the speed, the greater the

risk, but serious injuries can also oc-

cur at lower speeds. Never drive fast-

er than is safe for current conditions,

regardless of the maximum speed

posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe con-

dition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical

failure can be extremely hazardous.

To reduce the possibility of such

problems, check your tire pressures

and condition frequently, and perform

all regularly scheduled maintenance.

3-4

Safety System

Front seats

1. Seat adjustment, forward/backward

2. Seatback recliner

3. Seat cushion adjustment, height

(for driver’s seat)

4. Headrest adjustment

2nd row seat

5. Seatback folding, Double folding &

Recliner

6. Forward & Backward Adjustment

(Sliding)

7. Headrest

8. Armrest

3rd row seat

9. Seatback folding & Recliner

10. Headrest

The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OSU2I031025

SEATS

3-5

WARNING

Loose objects

Loose objects in the driver’s foot

area could interfere with the opera-

tion of the foot pedals, possibly

causing an accident. Do not place

anything under the front seats.

WARNING

Uprighting seat

When you return the seatback to

its upright position, hold the seat-

back and return it slowly and be

sure there are no other occupants

around the seat. If the seatback is

returned without being held and

controlled, the back of the seat

could move forward or backward

resulting in accidental injury to a

person struck by the seatback.

WARNING

Driver responsibility for passen-

gers

Riding in a vehicle with seatback

reclined could lead to serious or

fatal injury in an accident. If a seat

is reclined during an accident, the

occupant’s hips may slide under

the lap portion of the seat belt ap-

plying great force to the unprotect-

ed abdomen. The protection of

your restraint system (seat belt

and air bags) is greatly reduced by

reclining your seat. Serious or fa-

tal internal injuries could result.

The driver must advise the pas-

senger to keep the seatback in an

upright position whenever the ve-

hicle is in motion.

WARNING

Do not use a sitting cushion that

reduces friction between the seat

and passenger. The passenger’s

hips may slide under the lap por-

tion of the seat belt during an acci-

dent or a sudden stop. Serious or

fatal internal injuries could result

because the seat belt can’t operate

normally.

WARNING

Driver’s seat

• Never attempt to adjust seat

while the vehicle is moving. This

could result in loss of control,

and an accident causing death,

serious injury, or property dam-

age.

• Do not allow anything to inter-

fere with the normal position of

the seatback. Storing items

against a seatback or in any oth-

er way interfering with proper

locking of a seatback could re-

sult in serious or fatal injury in a

sudden stop or collision.

• Always drive and ride with your

seatback upright and the lap

portion of the seat belt snug and

low across the hips. This is the

best position to protect you in

case of an accident.

• In order to avoid unnecessary

and perhaps severe air bag inju-

ries, always sit as far back as

possible from the steering wheel

while maintaining comfortable

control of the vehicle.

3-6

Safety System

WARNING

Rear seatbacks

• The rear seatback must be se-

curely latched. If not, passen-

gers and objects could be

thrown forward resulting in seri-

ous injury or death in the event

of a sudden stop or collision.

• Luggage and other cargo should

be laid flat in the cargo area. If

objects are large, heavy, or must

be piled, they must be secured.

Under no circumstances should

cargo be piled higher than the

seatbacks. Failure to follow

these warnings cou ld result in

serious injury or death in the

event of a sudden stop, collision

or rollover.

• No passenger should ride in the

cargo area or sit or lie on folded

seatbacks while the vehicle is

moving. All passengers must be

properly seated in seats and re-

strained properly while riding.

• When resetting the seatback to

the upright position, make sure

it is securely latched by pushing

it forward and backwards.

• To avoid the possibility of burns,

do not remove the carpet in the

cargo area. Emission control de-

vices beneath this floor gener-

ate high temperatures.

WARNING

After adjusting the seat, always

check that it is securely locked

into place by attempting to move

the seat forward or backward with-

out using the lock release lever.

Sudden or unexpected movement

of the driver’s seat could cause

you to lose control of the vehicle

resulting in an accident.

WARNING

• Do not adjust the seat while

wearing seat belts. Moving the

seat cushion forward may cause

strong pressure on the abdo-

men.

• Use extreme caution so that

hands or other objects are not

caught in the seat mechanisms

while the seat is moving.

• Do not put a cigarette lighter on

the floor or seat. When you op-

erate the seat, gas may gush out

of the lighter and cause fire.

• If there are occupants in the rear

seats, be careful while adjusting

the front seat position.

3-7

Front seats

Manual adjustment

OSU2I039002

Forward and rearward

To move the seat forward or rear-

ward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever

up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure

the seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and

make sure the seat is locked securely

by trying to move forward and rear-

ward without using the lever. If the

seat moves, it is not locked properly.

OSU2039003

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on

the seatback recline lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat

and adjust the seatback of the seat

to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure

the seatback is locked in place. (The

lever MUST return to its original po-

sition for the seatback to lock.)

OSU2I039003

Seat cushion height

(for driver’s seat)

To change the height of the seat

cushion, move the lever upwards or

downwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push

the lever down several times.

• To raise the seat cushion, pull the

lever up several times.

3-8

Safety System

Power adjustment (if equipped)

WARNING

NEVER allow children in the vehi-

cle unattended. Children might

push the adjustment switch acci-

dently and get caught in the seat

mechanisms while the seat is mov-

ing.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the seats:

• Always stop adjusting the seats

when the seat has been adjust-

ed as far forward or rearward as

possible.

• Do not adjust the seats longer

than necessary when the engine

is turned off.This may result in

unnecessary battery drain.

• Do not operate two or more

seats at the same time. This may

result in an electrical malfunc-

tion.

OSU2I039005

Forward and rearward

To move the seat forward or rear-

ward: 1. Push the control switch for-

ward or rearward. 2. Release the

switch once the seat reaches the de-

sired position.

OSU2I039006

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback: 1. Push the

control switch forward or rearward. 2.

Release the switch once the seat-

back reaches the desired position.

3-9

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when the

vehicle is in motion can be danger-

ous. Even when buckled up, the pro-

tections of your restraint system (seat

belts and air bags) is greatly reduced

by reclining your seatback.

WARNING

NEVER ride with a reclined seat-

back when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback in-

creases your chance of serious or

fatal injuries in the event of a colli-

sion or sudden stop.

Driver and passengers should al-

ways sit well back in their seats

with the upright seatbacks and

should be belted properly.

Seat belts must be snug against your

hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the

shoulder belt cannot do its job be-

cause it will not be snug against your

chest. Instead, it will be in front of

you.During an accident, you could be

thrown into the seat belt, causing

neck or other injuries. The more the

seatback is reclined, the greater

chance the passenger’s hips will slide

under the lap belt or the passenger’s

neck will strike the shoulder belt.

Headrest

OSU2I031035

The driver’s and front passenger’s

seats are equipped with a headrest

for the occupant’s safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides com-

fort for the driver and front passen-

ger, but also helps to protect the head

and neck in the event of a collision.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury

or death in an accident, take the

following precautions when ad-

justing your headrests:

• Always properly adjust the

headrests for all passengers

BEFORE starting the vehicle.

• NEVER let anyone ride in a seat

with the headrests removed or

reversed.

3-10

Safety System

•

OLF034072N

Adjust the headrests so the mid-

dle of the headrests is at the

same height as the height of the

top of the eyes.

• NEVER adjust the headrest po-

sition of the driver’s seat when

the vehicle is in motion.

• Adjust the headrest as close to

the passenger’s head as possi-

ble. Do not use a seat cushion

that holds the body away from

the seatback.

• Make sure the headrest locks

into position after adjusting it.

NOTICE

To prevent damage, NEVER hit or

pull on the headrests.

OLF034015

NOTICE

If you recline the seatback towards

the front with the head restraint

and seat cushion raised, the head

restraint may come in contact with

the sunvisor or other parts of the

vehicle.

OAI3039005

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the

desired position (1). To lower the

headrest, push and hold the release

button (2) on the headrest support

and lower the headrest to the desired

position (3).

3-11

OQXI039006

Removal/Reinstall (if equipped)

To remove the headrest:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with the

recline lever (1).

2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.

3. Press the headrest release button

(3) while pulling the headrest up

(4).

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a

seat with the headrest removed.

OAI3039032

To reinstall the headrest :

1. Recline the seatback.

2. Put the headrest poles (2) into the

holes while pressing the release

button (1).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-

priate height.

4. Recline the seatback (4) with the

seatback angle lever or switch (3).

WARNING

Always make sure the headrest

locks into position after reinstall-

ing and adjusting it properly.

3-12

Safety System

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

OAI3039033

The seatback pocket is provided on

the back of the driver’s and/or front

passenger’s seatback.

WARNING

Seatback pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects

in the seatback pockets. In an acci-

dent they could come loose from

the pocket and injure vehicle occu-

pants.

Rear seats

Headrest (2nd,3rd row rear seat)

OSU2I031036

The rear seats are equipped with

headrests in the outboard seating po-

sitions (and/or center seating posi-

tion) for the occupant’s safety and

comfort.

The headrest not only provides com-

fort for passengers, but also helps to

protect the head and neck in the

event of a collision.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury

or death in an accident, take the

following precautions when ad-

justing your headrests:

• Always properly adjust the

headrests for all passengers

BEFORE starting the vehicle.

• NEVER let anyone ride in a seat

with the headrests removed.

3-13

•

OLF034072N

Adjust the headrests so the mid-

dle of the headrests is at the

same height as the height of the

top of the eyes.

• NEVER adjust the headrest po-

sition of the driver’s seat when

the vehicle is in motion.

• Adjust the headrest as close to

the passenger’s head as possi-

ble. Do not use a seat cushion

that holds the body away from

the seatback.

• Make sure the headrest locks

into position after adjusting it.

NOTICE

To prevent damage, NEVER hit or

pull on the headrests.

OSU2I039007

Adjusting the height up and down

(if equipped)

To raise the headrest, pull it up (1).

To lower the headrest, push and hold

the release button (2) on the headrest

support and lower the headrest (3).

3-14

Safety System

OSU2I039014

Removal and installation

To remove the headrest, raise it as

far as it can go then press the release

button (1) while pulling upward (2).

To reinstall the headrest, put the

headrest poles (3) into the holes while

pressing the release button (1). Then

adjust it to the appropriate height.

WARNING

Make sure the headrest locks in

position after adjusting it to prop-

erly protect the occupants.

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks (or cushions)

may be folded to facilitate carrying

long items or to increase the luggage

capacity of the vehicle.

WARNING

• Never allow passengers to sit on

top of the folded down seatback

while the vehicle is moving as

this is not a proper seating posi-

tion and no seat belts are avail-

able for use. This could result in

serious injury or death in case

of an accident or sudden stop.

• Objects carried on the folded

down seatback should not ex-

tend higher than the top of the

front seats. This could allow car-

go to slide forward and cause

injury or damage during sudden

stops.

• Make sure 2nd row seat is recov-

ered from folding position be-

fore 2nd row passenger fasten

their seatbelt.

3-15

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Set the front seatback to the up-

right position and if necessary

- Slide the front seat forward

- Fold the Seatback table

2. Lower the rear headrests to the

lowest position (if equipped with

adjustable headrests).

OSU2I031054L



row



row

OSU2I031055L

3. Routing the seat belt webbing

through the rear seat belt guides

will help keep the belts from being

trapped behind or under the seats.

After inserting the seatbelt, tighten

the belt webbing by pulling it up.

OSU2I031008L

OSU2I031039L

4. For 2nd row seats, Pull the seat-

back folding lever, then seatback

folds automatically. If you keep pull

the lever, the 2nd row seatback will

slightly go up, then set 2nd row

seat to upright position (vertical po-

sition). For 3rd row seats, push the

seatback folding strap, then fold

seatback towards the front of the

vehicle.

i Information

If you are not able to pull out the seat

belt from the retractor, firmly pull the

belt out and release it. Then you will be

able to pull the belt out smoothly.

3-16

Safety System

OSU2I031009L



row seat



row seat

OSU2I031041L

5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull

the seatback backward by pulling

the folding lever or the strap.

Pull the seatback firmly until it

clicks into place.

Make sure the seatback is locked

in place.

6. Return the rear seat belt to the

proper position.

OSU2I031056L

WARNING

When the second row seat is fold-

ed vertically, the second row seat

may cause injuries to the people

seating on the third row seat.

Please check the surroundings

when folding the second row

seats.

OHSS038100

WARNING

If the tailgate is pushed down to

close it when a passenger’s head

is not against a properly adjusted

headrest or a tall person is seated,

the tailgate may hit the occupant’s

head, which could cause injury.

3-17

WARNING

When you return the rear seatback

to its upright position after being

folded down:

Prevent injury of 3rd row passen-

ger foot during 2nd row folding &

un-folding while entering or exit-

ing the 3rd row seat.

Be careful not to damage the seat

belt webbing or buckle. Do not al-

low the seat belt webbing or buck-

le to get caught or pinched in the

rear seat. Ensure that the seatback

is completely locked into its up-

right position by pushing on the

top of the seatback. Otherwise, in

an accident or sudden stop, the

seat could fold down and allow

cargo to enter the passenger com-

partment, which could result in se-

rious injury or death.

NOTICE

• When returning the rear seat-

backs to the upright position,

remember to return the rear

shoulder belts to their proper

position.

• Routing the seat belt webbing

through the rear seat belt guides

will help keep the seat belts from

being trapped behind or under

the seats.

WARNING

Cargo

Cargo should always be secured

to prevent it from being thrown

about the vehicle in a collision and

causing injury to the vehicle occu-

pants. Do not place objects in the

rear seats, since they cannot be

properly secured and may hit the

front seat occupants in a collision.

WARNING

Cargo loading

Make sure the engine is off, the

automatic transmission is in P

(Park) or the Manual transmission

is in R (Reverse) or 1st, and the

parking brake is securely applied

whenever loading or unloading

cargo. Failure to take these steps

may allow the vehicle to move if

the shift lever is inadvertently

moved to another position.

CAUTION

• Be careful when loading cargo

through the rear passenger

seats to prevent damage to the

vehicle interior.

• When cargo is loaded through

the rear passenger seats, en-

sure the cargo is properly se-

cured to prevent it from moving

while driving.

3-18

Safety System

Air ventilation seats

(if equipped)

Front air ventilation seat

(if equipped)

OSU2I039027



Type A



Type B

OSU2I039026

The air ventilation seats are provided

to cool the front seats by blowing air

through small vent holes on the sur-

face of the seat cushions and seat-

backs.

When the operation of the air ventila-

tion seat is not needed, keep the

switches in the OFF position.

While the engine is running, push the

switch to cool the driver’s seat or the

front passenger’s seat (if equipped).

• Each time you push the switch, the

airflow changes as follows:

OFF HIGH ( )

LOW ( ) MEDIUM ( )

• When pressing the switch for more

than 1.5 seconds with the air venti-

lation seat operating, the operation

will turn OFF.

• The air ventilation seats defaults to

the OFF position whenever the ig-

nition switch is placed to the ON

position.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the air venti-

lation seat:

• Use the air ventilation seat

ONLY when the climate control

system is on. Using the air ven-

tilation seat for prolonged peri-

ods of time with the climate con-

trol system off could cause the

air ventilation seat to malfunc-

tion.

• Never use a solvent such as

paint thinner, benzene, alcohol

or gasoline to clean the seats.

• Avoid spilling liquids on the sur-

face of the front seats and seat-

backs; this may cause the air

vent holes to become blocked

and not work properly.

• Do not place materials such as

plastic bags or newspapers un-

der the seats. They may block

the air intake causing the air

vents to not work properly.

• Do not change the seat covers.

It may damage the air ventilation

seat.

• If the air vents do not operate,

restart the vehicle. If there is no

change, we recommend that you

have your vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-19

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

• For maximum restraint system

protection, the seat belts must

always be used whenever the

car is moving.

• Seat belts are most effective

when seatbacks are in the up-

right position.

• Children age 12 and under must

always be properly restrained in

the rear seat.

• Never allow children to ride in

the front passenger seat. If a

child over 12 must be seated in

the front seat, he/she must be

properly belted and the seat

should be moved as far back as

possible.

• Never wear the shoulder belt un-

der your arm or behind your

back. An improperly positioned

shoulder belt can cause serious

injuries in a crash. The shoulder

belt should be positioned mid-

way over your shoulder across

your collarbone.

• Never wear a seat belt over frag-

ile objects. If there is a sudden

stop or impact, the seat belt can

damage it.

• Avoid wearing twisted seat

belts. A twisted belt can’t do its

job as well. In a collision, it could

even cut into you. Be sure the

belt webbing is straight and not

twisted.

• Be careful not to damage the

belt webbing or hardware. If the

belt webbing or hardware is

damaged, replace it.

WARNING

Seat belts are designed to bear

upon the bony structure of the

body, and should be worn low

across the front of the pelvis or the

pelvis, chest and shoulders, as ap-

plicable; wearing the lap section of

the belt across the abdominal area

must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as

firmly as possible, consistent with

comfort, to provide the protection

for which they have been de-

signed.

A slack belt will greatly reduce the

protection afforded to the wearer.

Care should be taken to avoid con-

tamination of the webbing with

polishes, oils and chemicals, and

particularly battery acid. Cleaning

may safely be carried out using

mild soap and water. The belt

should be replaced if webbing be-

comes frayed, contaminated or

damaged.

It is essential to replace the entire

assembly after it has been worn in

a severe impact even if damage to

the assembly is not obvious. Belts

should not be worn with straps

twisted. Each belt assembly must

only be used by one occupant; it is

dangerous to put a belt around a

child being carried on the occu-

pant’s lap.

3-20

Safety System

WARNING

• No modifications or additions

should be made by the user

which will either prevent the

seat belt adjusting devices from

operating to remove slack, or

prevent the seat belt assembly

from being adjusted to remove

slack.

• When you fasten the seat belt,

be careful not to latch the seat

belt in buckles of other seat. It’s

very dangerous and you may

not be protected by the seat belt

properly.

• Do not unfasten the seat belt

and do not fasten and unfasten

the seat belt repeatedly while

driving. This could result in loss

of control, and an accident caus-

ing death, serious injury, or

property damage.

• When fastening the seat belt,

make sure that the seat belt

does not pass over objects that

are hard or can break easily.

• Make sure there is nothing in the

buckle interfering with the seat

belt latch mechanism, because

any materials in the buckle can

cause the seat belt not to be fas-

tened securely.

Seat belt warning light

Driver’s seat belt



Instrument cluster

1GQA2083

As a reminder to the driver, the driv-

er’s seat belt warning light will illumi-

nate for approximately 6 seconds

each time you turn the ignition switch

or Engine Start/Stop button ON re-

gardless of seat belt fastening.

If you start to drive without the seat

belt fastened or you unfasten the seat

belt when you drive under 20 km/h

(12 mph) or stop, the corresponding

warning light will illuminate.

If you start to drive without the seat

belt fastened or you unfasten the seat

belt when you drive 20 km/h (12 mph)

and faster, the warning light will blink

and warning chime will sound for ap-

proximately 100 seconds.

When the seat belt is unfastened

during driving, the warning light will

illuminate when the speed is under

20 km/h (12 mph).

When the speed is 20 km/h (12 mph)

and faster, the warning light will blink

and warning chime will sound for ap-

proximately 100 seconds.

3-21

Front passenger’s seat belt

warning



Instrument cluster

1GQA2083

As a reminder to the front passenger,

the front passenger’s seat belt warn-

ing lights will illuminate for approxi-

mately 6 seconds each time you turn

the ignition switch or Engine Start/

Stop button ON regardless of belt

fastening.

If you start to drive without the seat

belt fastened or you unfasten the seat

belt when you drive under 20 km/h

(12 mph) or stop, the corresponding

warning light will illuminate.

If you start to drive without the seat

belt fastened or you unfasten the seat

belt when you drive 20 km/h (12 mph)

and faster, the warning light will blink

and warning chime will sound for ap-

proximately 100 seconds.

When the seat belt is fastened during

driving, the warning light will illumi-

nate when the speed is under 20

km/h (12 mph). When the speed is 20

km/h (12 mph) and faster, the warn-

ing light will blink and warning chime

will sound for approximately 100 sec-

onds.

WARNING

Riding in an improper position ad-

versely affects the front passen-

ger’s seat belt warning system. It

is important for the driver to in-

struct the passenger to be seated

properly as instructed in this man-

ual.

i Information

• Although the front passenger seat is

not occupied, the seat belt warning

light will blink or illuminate for 6

seconds.

• The front passenger’s seat belt

warning may operate when luggage

is placed on the front passenger seat.

3-22

Safety System

Rear passenger’s seat belt warn-

ing

OSU2I033058L



Type A

OSU2I033059L



Type B

Ã2nd row seat: 1, 2 (6-seater)

1, 2, 3 (7-seater)

Ã3rd row seat: 3, 4 (6-seater)

4, 5 (7-seater)

For rear left and right side seat

As a reminder to the rear passenger,

the rear passenger’s seat belt warn-

ing lights will illuminate for approxi-

mately 6 seconds each time you turn

the ignition switch or Engine Start/

Stop button ON regardless of belt

fastening.

If you start to drive without the seat

belt fastened or you unfasten the seat

belt when you drive under 20 km/h

(12 mph), the corresponding warning

light will continue to illuminate until

you fasten the seat belt.

If you continue to drive without the

seat belt fastened or you unfasten the

seat belt when you drive 20 km/h (12

mph) and faster, the seat belt warn-

ing chime will sound for approximate-

ly 35 seconds and the corresponding

warning light will blink.

When the seat belt is unfastened

during driving, the warning light will

illuminate when the speed is under

20 km/h (12 mph).

When the speed is 20 km/h (12 mph)

and faster, the warning light will blink

and warning chime will sound for ap-

proximately 35 seconds.

WARNING

Riding in an improper position ad-

versely affects the rear passen-

ger’s seat belt warning system.

It is important for the driver to in-

struct the passenger to properly

be seated as instructed in this

manual.

i Information

• Although the rear side passenger

seat is not occupied, the seat belt

warning light will blink or illumi-

nate for 6 seconds.

• The rear side passenger’s seat belt

warning may operate when luggage,

laptop or other electronic device is

placed on the rear side passenger

seat.

3-23

For rear center seat

As a reminder to the rear passenger,

the rear passenger’s seat belt warn-

ing light will illuminate for approxi-

mately 6 seconds each time you turn

the ignition switch or Engine Start/

Stop button ON regardless of belt

fastening.

If the seat belt is not fastened when

the ignition switch or Engine Start/

Stop button is turned ON, the seat

belt warning light will illuminate for

approximately 70 seconds.

If you start to drive without the seat

belt fastened or you unfasten the seat

belt when you drive under 20 km/h

(12 mph), the corresponding warning

light will continue to illuminate for ap-

proximately 70 seconds.

If you continue to drive without the

seat belt fastened or you unfasten the

seat belt when you drive over 20 km/h

(12 mph), the seat belt warning chime

will sound for approximately 35 sec-

onds and the corresponding warning

light will blink.

If the rear door is opened or closed

under 10 km/h (6 mph), warning light

and warning sound does not work

even if driving over 20 km/h (12 mph).

Seat belt restraint system

Lap/shoulder belt

OHSS038101

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of

the retractor and insert the metal tab

(1) into the buckle (2). There will be

an audible “click” when the tab locks

into the buckle.

OHSS038100

You should place the lap belt (1) por-

tion across your hips and the shoul-

der belt (2) portion across your chest.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to

the proper length only after the lap

belt portion is adjusted manually so

that it fits snugly around your hips. If

you lean forward in a slow, easy mo-

tion, the belt will extend and let you

move around. If there is a sudden

stop or impact, however, the belt will

lock into position. It will also lock if

you try to lean forward too quickly.

3-24

Safety System

i Information

If you are not able to pull out the safety

belt from the retractor, firmly pull the

belt out and release it. After release,

you will be able to pull the belt out

smoothly.

WARNING

Improperly positioned seat belts

may increase the risk of serious in-

jury in an accident.Take the follow-

ing precautions when adjusting

the seat belt:

• Position the lap portion of the

seat belt as low as possible

across your hips, not on your

waist, so that it fits snugly.This

allows your strong pelvic bones

to absorb the force of the crash,

reducing the chance of internal

injuries.

• Position one arm under the

shoulder belt and the other over

the belt, as shown in the illustra-

tion.

• Always position the shoulder

belt anchor into the locked posi-

tion at the appropriate height.

• Never position the shoulder belt

across your neck or face.

OHSS038102

WARNING

You should place the lap belt por-

tion as low as possible and snugly

across your hips, not on your

waist. If the lap belt is located too

high on your waist, it may increase

the chance of injury in the event of

a collision.

Both arms should not be under or

over the belt. Rather, one should

be over and the other under, as

shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under the

arm nearest the door.

3-25

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the

shoulder belt anchor to one of the

four different positions for maximum

comfort and safety.

The shoulder portion should be ad-

justed so it lies across your chest and

midway over your shoulder nearest

the door, not over your neck.





Front seat

OOS037060

To adjust the height of the seat belt

anchor, lower or raise the height ad-

juster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while

pressing the height adjuster button

(2).

Release the button to lock the anchor

into position. Try sliding the height

adjuster to make sure that it has

locked into position.

OHSS038103

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing

the release button (1) in the locking

buckle. When it is released, the belt

should automatically draw back into

the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the

belt to be sure it is not twisted, then

try again.

3-26

Safety System

3-point rear center seat belt

OAI3039041

Insert the tongue plate (1) into the

buckle (2) until an audible “click” is

heard, indicating the latch is locked

make sure the belt is not twisted.

When using the rear center seat belt,

the buckle with the “CENTER” mark

must be used.

i Information

If you are not able to pull out the safety

belt from the retractor, firmly pull the

belt out and release it. After release,

you will be able to pull the belt out

smoothly.

Pre-tensioner seat belt

OIB034039

Your vehicle is equipped with driver’s

and front passenger’s pre-tensioner

seat belts (retractor pre-tensioner).

The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to

make sure the seat belts fit tightly

against the occupant’s body in cer-

tain frontal or side collision(s). The

pre-tensioner seat belts may be acti-

vated in crashes where the frontal or

side collision(s) is severe enough, to-

gether with the air bags.When the ve-

hicle stops suddenly, or if the occu-

pant tries to lean forward too quickly,

the seat belt retractor will lock into

position. In certain frontal collisions,

the pre-tensioner will activate and

pull the seat belt into tighter contact

against the occupant’s body.

3-27

WARNING

• Always wear your seat belt and

sit properly in your seat.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is

loose or twisted. A loose or

twisted seat belt will not protect

you properly in an accident.

• Do not place anything near the

buckle. This may adversely af-

fect the buckle and cause it to

function improperly.

• Always replace your pre-ten-

sioners after activation or an ac-

cident.

• NEVER inspect, service, repair

or replace the pre-tensioners by

yourself.This must be done by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not hit the seat belt assem-

blies.

WARNING

Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat

belt assemblies for several minutes

after they have been activated.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt

mechanism deploys during a colli-

sion, the pre-tensioner can become

hot and can burn you.

CAUTION

Body work on the front area of the

vehicle may damage the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt system. Therefore,

we recommend the system to be

serviced by an authorized HYUND-

AI dealer.

OQX033061AU

The seat belt pre-tensioner system

consists mainly of the following com-

ponents. Their locations are shown in

the illustration:

(1) SRS air bag warning light

(2) Retractor pre-tensioner assembly

(3) SRS control module

NOTICE

The sensor that activates the SRS

control module is connected with

the pre–tensioner seat belts. The

SRS air bag warning light on the

instrument cluster will illuminate

for approximately 6 seconds after

the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, and then it should

turn off. If the pre-tensioner is not

working properly, the warning light

will illuminate even if the SRS air

bag is not malfunctioning. If the

warning light does not illumi-

nate,stays illuminated or illumi-

nates when the vehicle is being

driven, we recommend the pre-ten-

sioner seat belts and/or SRS con-

trol module be inspected by an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon

as possible.

3-28

Safety System

i Information

• Both the driver’s and front passen-

ger’s pre-tensioner seat belts may be

activated in certain frontal or side

collisions.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts

are activated, a loud noise may be

heard and fine dust, which may ap-

pear to be smoke, may be visible in

the passenger compartment. These

are normal operating conditions

and are not hazardous.

• Although it is non-toxic, the fine

dust may cause skin irritation and

should not be inhaled for prolonged

periods. Wash all exposed skin areas

thoroughly after an accident in

which the pre-tensioner seat belts

were activated.

Additional seat belt safety pre-

cautions

Seat belt use during pregnancy

The seat belt should always be used

during pregnancy. The best way to

protect your unborn child is to protect

yourself by always wearing the seat

belt. Pregnant women should always

wear a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place

the shoulder belt across your chest,

routed between your breasts and

away from your neck. Place the lap

belt below your belly so that it fits

SNUGLY across your hips and pelvic

bone, under the rounded part of the

belly.

WARNING

• Pregnant women and patients

are more vulnerable to any im-

pacts on the abdomen during an

abrupt stop or accident. If you

are in an accident while preg-

nant, consult your doctor.

• To reduce the risk of serious inju-

ry or death to an unborn child

during an accident, pregnant

women should NEVER place the

lap portion of the seat belt above

or over the area of the abdomen

where the unborn child is located.

Seat belt use and children

Infant and small children

Most countries have Child Restraint

System laws which require children

to travel in approved Child Restraint

System devices, including booster

seats.The age at which seat belts can

be used instead of Child Restraint

System differs among countries, so

you should be aware of the specific

requirements in your country, and

where you are travelling. Infant and

Child Restraint System must be prop-

erly placed and installed in a rear

seat. For more details refer to the

“Child Restraint Systems”in this

chapter.

3-29

WARNING

ALWAYS properly restrain infants

and small children in a Child Re-

straint System appropriate for the

child’s height and weight. To reduce

the risk of serious injury or death to

a child and other passengers,NEV-

ER hold a child in your lap or arms

when the vehicle is moving.The vio-

lent forces created during an acci-

dent will tear the child from your

arms and throw the child against the

interior of the vehicle.

Small children are best protected

from injury in an accident when prop-

erly restrained in the rear seat by a

Child Restraint System that meets

the requirements of the Safety Stan-

dards of your country. Before buying

any Child Restraint System, make

sure that it has a label certifying that it

meets Safety Standard of your coun-

try. The Child Restraint System must

be appropriate for your child’s height

and weight. Check the label on the

Child Restraint System for this infor-

mation. Refer to “Child Restraint Sys-

tems” in this chapter.

Larger children

Children under age 13 and who are

too large for a booster seat should al-

ways occupy the rear seat and use

the available lap/shoulder belts. A

seat belt should lie across the upper

thighs and be snug across the shoul-

der and chest to restrain the child

safely. Check belt fit periodically. A

child’s squirming could put the belt

out of position.In the event of an acci-

dent, children are afforded the best

safety restrained by a proper Child

Restraint System in the rear seats.

If a larger child over age 13 must be

seated in the front seat, the child

must be securely restrained by the

available lap/shoulder belt and the

seat should be placed in the rearmost

position. If the shoulder belt portion

slightly touches the child’s neck or

face, try placing the child closer to the

center of the vehicle.If the shoulder

belt still touches their face or neck,

they need to be returned to an appro-

priate booster seat in the rear seat.

WARNING

• Always make sure larger chil-

dren’s seat belts are worn and

properly adjusted.

• NEVER allow the shoulder belt

to contact the child’s neck or

face.

• Do not allow more than one

child to use a single seat belt.

Seat belt use and injured people

A seat belt should be used when an

injured person is being transported.

Consult a physician for specific rec-

ommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children)

should never attempt to use a single

seat belt. This could increase the se-

verity of injuries in case of an acci-

dent.

3-30

Safety System

Do not lie down

Sitting in a reclined position when the

vehicle is in motion can be danger-

ous. Even when buckled up, the pro-

tections of your restraint system (seat

belts and/or air bags) is greatly re-

duced by reclining your seatback.

Seat belts must be snug against your

hips and chest to work properly.

During an accident, you could be

thrown into the seat belt, causing

neck or other injuries.

The more the seat back is reclined,

the greater the chance for the pas-

senger’s hips to slide under the lap

belt or the passenger’s neck to strike

the shoulder belt.

WARNING

• NEVER ride with a reclined seat-

back when the vehicle is mov-

ing.

• Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of seri-

ous or fatal injuries in the event

of a collision or sudden stop.

• Driver and passengers should

always sit well back in their

seats with the upright seatbacks

and should be belted properly.

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be

disassembled or modified. In addi-

tion, care should be taken to assure

that seat belts and belt hardware are

not damaged by seat hinges, doors

or other abuse.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected pe-

riodically for wear or damage of any

kind. Any damaged parts should be

replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and

dry. If belts become dirty, they can be

cleaned by using a mild soap solution

and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong

detergents or abrasives should not

be used because they may damage

and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire seat belt assembly or as-

semblies should be replaced if the

vehicle has been involved in an acci-

dent. This should be done even if no

damage is visible.We recommend

that you consult an authorized HYUN-

DAI dealer.

3-31

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Children riding in the car should sit in

the rear seat and must always be

properly restrained to minimize the

risk of injury in an accident, sudden

stop or sudden maneuver. According

to accident statistics, children are saf-

er when properly restrained in the

rear seats than in the front seat. Larg-

er children not in a child restraint

should use one of the seat belts pro-

vided.

You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your country. Child

and/or infant safety seats must be

properly placed and installed in the

rear seat. You must use a commer-

cially available child restraint system

that meets the requirements of the

Safety Standards of your country.

Child restraint systems are designed

to be secured in vehicle seats by the

lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

Children could be injured or killed in a

crash if their restraints are not proper-

ly secured. For small children and ba-

bies, a child seat or infant seat must

be used.

Before buying a particular child re-

straint syst em, make sure it fits your

car seat and seat belts, and fits your

child. Follow all the instructions pro-

vided by the manufacturer when in-

stalling the child restraint system.

WARNING

• A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Never in-

stall a child or infant seat on the

front passenger’s seat. Should

an accident occur and cause the

passenger-side air bag to de-

ploy, it could severely injure or

kill an infant or child seated in

an infant or child seat. Thus only

use a child restraint in the rear

seat of your vehicle.

• A seat belt or child restraint sys-

tem can become very hot if it is

left in a closed vehicle on a sun-

ny day, even if the outside tem-

perature does not feel hot. Be

sure to check the seat cover and

buckles before placing a child

there.

• When the child restraint system

is not in use, store it in the lug-

gage area or fasten it with a seat

belt so that it will not be thrown

forward in the case of a sudden

stop or an accident.

• Children may be seriously in-

jured or killed by an inflating air

bag. All children, even those too

large for child restraints, must

ride in the rear seat.

3-32

Safety System

WARNING

To reduce the chance of serious

or fatal injuries:

• Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front pas-

senger seat can be forcefully

struck by an inflating air bag re-

sulting in serious or fatal inju-

ries.

• Always follow the instructions

for installation and use of the

child restraint maker.

• Always make sure the child seat

is secured properly in the car

and your child is securely re-

strained in the child seat.

• Never hold a child in your arms

or lap when riding in a vehicle.

The violent forces created

during a crash will tear the child

from your arms and throw the

child against the car’s interior.

• Never put a seat belt over your-

self and a child. During a crash,

the belt could press deep into

the child causing serious inter-

nal injuries.

• Never leave children unattended

in a vehicle - not even for a short

time. The car can heat up very

quickly, resulting in serious in-

juries to children inside. Even

very young children may inad-

vertently cause the vehicle to

move, entangle themselves in

the windows, or lock themselves

or others inside the vehicle.

• Never allow two children, or any

two persons, to use the same

seat belt.

• Children often squirm and repo-

sition themselves improperly.

Never let a child ride with the

shoulder belt under their arm or

behind their back. Always prop-

erly position and secure chil-

dren in rear seat.

• Never allow a child to stand-up

or kneel on the seat or floor-

board of a moving vehicle.

During a collision or sudden

stop, the child can be violently

thrown against the vehicles inte-

rior, resulting in serious injury.

• Never use an infant carrier or a

child safety seat that “hooks”

over a seatback, it may not pro-

vide adequate security in an ac-

cident.

• Seat belts can become very hot,

especially when the car is

parked in direct sunlight. Al-

ways check seat belt buckles

before fastening them over a

child.

• After an accident, we recom-

mend that the system be

checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• If there is not enough space to

place the child restraint system

because of the driver’s seat, in-

stall the child restraint system in

the rear right seat.

3-33

Using a child restraint system

CRS09



Rearward-facing child restraint system



Forward-facing child restraint system

OSU2I039010

For small children and babies, the

use of a child seat or infant seat is

required. This child seat or infant seat

should be of appropriate size for the

child and should be installed in accor-

dance with the manufacturer’s in-

structions.

For safety reasons, we recommend

that the child restraint system is used

in the rear seats.

WARNING

Never place a rear-facing child re-

straint in the front passenger seat,

because of the danger that an in-

flating passenger-side air bag

could impact the rear-facing child

restraint and kill the child.

WARNING

Child seat installation

• A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly an-

chored to the car and the child is

not properly restrained in the

child restraint. Before installing

the child restraint system, read

the instructions supplied by the

child restraint system manufac-

turer.

• If the seat belt does not operate

as described in this section, we

recommend that the system be

checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Failure to observe this manual’s

instructions regarding child re-

straint system and the instruc-

tions provided with the child re-

straint system could increase

the risk and/or severity of injury

in an accident.

3-34

Safety System

Installing a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

WARNING

Before installing your Child Re-

straint System always:

• Read and follow the instructions

provided by the manufacturer of

the Child Restraint System.

Failure to follow all warnings and

instructions could increase the

risk of the SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH if an accident occurs.

WARNING

If the vehicle headrest prevents

proper installation of a Child Re-

straint System (as described in the

Child Restraint System manual),

the headrest of the respective

seating position shall be readjust-

ed or entirely removed.

After selecting a proper Child Re-

straint System and checking that the

Child Restraint System fits properly in

the rear of this vehicle, you are ready

to install the Child Restraint System

according to the manufacturer’s in-

struction. There are three general

steps in installing the Child Restraint

System properly:

• Properly secure the Child Re-

straint System to the vehicle. All

Child Restraint Systems must be

secured to the vehicle with the lap

belt or lap part of a lap/shoulder

belt or with the top-tether and/or

ISOFIX anchorage.

• Make sure the Child Restraint

System is firmly secured. After

installing a Child Restraint System

to the vehicle, push and pull the

Child Restraint System forward

and from side-to-side to verify that

it is securely attached to the vehi-

cle seat. A Child Restraint System

secured with a seat belt should be

installed as firmly as possible.

However, some side-to-side move-

ment can be expected.

When installing a Child Restraint

System, adjust the vehicle seat (up

and down, forward and rearward)

so that your child fits in the Child

Restraint System in a comfortable

manner.

3-35

• Secure the child in the Child Re-

straint System. Make sure the

child is properly strapped in the

Child Restraint System according

to the Child Restraint System man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING

A Child Restraint System in a

closed vehicle can become very

hot. To prevent burns, check the

seating surface and buckles be-

fore placing your child in the Child

Restraint System.

ISOFIX anchorage and top-tether

anchorage (ISOFIX system) for

children (if equipped)

The ISOFIX system holds a Child Re-

straint System during driving and in

an accident. This system is designed

to make installation of the Child Re-

straint System easier and reduce the

possibility of improperly installing

your Child Restraint System. The

ISOFIX system uses anchors in the

vehicle and attachments on the Child

Restraint System. The ISOFIX sys-

tem eliminates the need to use seat

belts to secure the Child Restraint

System to the rear seats.

ISOFIX anchors are metal bars built

into the vehicle. There are two lower

anchors for each ISOFIX seating po-

sition that will accommodate a Child

Restraint System with lower attach-

ments.

To use the ISOFIX system in your ve-

hicle, you must have a Child Restraint

System with ISOFIX attachments.

(An ISOFIX-Child Restraint System

may only be installed if it has vehi-

cle-specific or universal approval in

accordance with the requirements of

ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129.)

The Child Restraint System manufac-

turer will provide you with instructions

on how to use the Child Restraint

System with its attachments for the

lower anchorages.

3-36

Safety System

OSU2I031037

ISOFIX anchorages have been pro-

vided in the left and right outboard

rear seating positions. Their locations

are shown in the illustration. There

are no ISOFIX anchorages provided

for the center rear seating position.

WARNING

Do not attempt to install a Child

Restraint System using ISOFIX an-

chorages in the rear center seating

position. There are no ISOFIX an-

chorages provided for this seat.

Using the outboard seat anchorag-

es, for the CRS installation on the

rear center seating position, can

damage the anchorages which

may break or fail in a collision re-

sulting in serious injury or death.

OSU2039011

[A] : ISOFIX Anchorage Position Indicator

[B] : ISOFIX Lower Anchorage

The ISOFIX anchorages symbols are

located on the left and right rear seat

cushions to identify the position of the

ISOFIX anchorages in your vehicle

(see arrows in illustration).

Both rear outboard seats are

equipped with a pair of ISOFIX an-

chorages as well as a corresponding

top-tether anchorage on the back

side of the rear seats.

(Child Restraint Systems with univer-

sal approval according to ECE-R44

or ECE-R129 need to be fixed addi-

tionally with a top-tether connected to

the corresponding top-tether anchor-

age point on the back side of the rear

seats.)

ISOFIX anchorages are located be-

tween the seatback and the seat

cushion of the rear seat left and right

outboard seating positions.

3-37

Securing a Child Restraint Sys-

tem with the “ISOFIX system”

To install a ISOFIX-compatible Child

Restraint System in either of the rear

outboard seating positions:

1. Move the seat belt buckle away

from the ISOFIX anchorages.

2. Move any other objects away from

the anchors that could prevent a

secure connection between the

Child Restraint System and the

ISOFIX anchorages.

3. Place the Child Restraint System

on the vehicle seat, then attach the

seat to the ISOFIX anchorages ac-

cording to the instructions provided

by the Child Restraint System

manufacturer.

4. Follow the instructions of the Child

Restraint System’s manufacturer

for proper installation and connec-

tion of the ISOFIX attachments on

the Child Restraint System to the

ISOFIX anchorages.

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when using the ISOFIX system:

• Read and follow all installation

instructions provided with your

Child Restraint System.

• To prevent the child from reach-

ing and taking hold of unretract-

ed seat belts, buckle all unused

rear seat belts and retract the

seat belt webbing behind the

child. Children can be strangled

if a shoulder belt becomes

wrapped around their neck and

the seat belt tightens.

• NEVER attach more than one

Child Restraint System to a sin-

gle anchorage. This could cause

the anchor or attachment to

come loose or break.

• Always have the ISOFIX system

inspected by your dealer after

an accident. An accident can

damage the ISOFIX system and

may not properly secure the

Child Restraint System.

3-38

Safety System

Securing a Child Restraint Sys-

tem with “Top-tether anchorage”

system (if equipped)

OSU2I039011

Top-tether anchorages for Child Re-

straint Systems are located on the

floor of the luggage room.

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when installing the top-tether:

• Read and follow all installation

instructions provided with your

Child Restraint System.

• NEVER attach more than one

Child Restraint System to a sin-

gle top-tether anchorage. This

could cause the anchorage or

attachment to come loose or

break.

• Do not attach the top-tether to

anything other than the correct

top-tether anchorage. It may not

work properly if attached to

something else.

• Child Restraint System anchor-

ages are designed to withstand

only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted Child Restraint

Systems. Do not use them for

adult seat belts, harnesses, or

for attaching other items or

equipment to the vehicle.

OAI3039018

To install the top-tether :

1. Route the Child Restraint System

top-tether over the Child Restraint

System seatback. Route the

top-tether under the headrest and

between the headrest posts, or

route the top-tether over the top of

the vehicle seatback. Make sure

the strap is not twisted.

2. Connect the top-tether to the

top-tether anchorage, then tighten

the top-tether according to the in-

structions of your Child Restraint

System’s manufacturer to firmly at-

tach the Child Restraint System to

the seat.

3. Check that the Child Restraint Sys-

tem is securely attached to the

seat by pushing and pulling the

seat forward and from side-to-side.

3-39

Suitability of each seating position for belted & ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems according to UN

regulations (Information for use by 6-seater vehicle users and CRS manufacturers)

• Yes : Suitable for fitment of the designated category of CRS

• No : Not suitable for fitment of the designated category of CRS

• ‘’-’’ : Not applicable

• The table is based on LHD vehicle. Except for the front passenger seat, the table is valid for RHD vehicle.

For RHD vehicle front passenger seat, please use information for the seating position number 3.

• If your car is for seven seater, seating position number 5 is not available

CRS categories Seating positions Remarks

12345678

Universal belted CRS - - Yes1)

(F, R) Yes

(F, R) -Yes

(F, R) Yes

(F, R) F : Forward facing

R : Rearward facing

i-size CRS ISOFIX CRF :

F2, F2X, R1, R2 ---No-No--

Carry-cot

(ISOFIX lateral facing CRS) ISOFIX CRF:

L1, L2 ---No-No--

ISOFIX infant* CRS

(* : ISOFIX baby CRS) ISOFIX CRF :

R1 ---

Yes

(R) -Yes

(R) --

ISOFIX toddler CRS - small ISOFIX CRF :

F2,F2X, R2,R2X ---

Yes

(F, R) -Yes

(F, R) --

ISOFIX toddler CRS – large*

(* : not booster seats) ISOFIX CRF :

F3, R3 ---

Yes2)

(F, R) -Yes2)

(F, R) --

Booster Seat – reduced Width ISO CRF : B2 - - - Yes2) -Yes

2) --

Booster Seat – full Width ISO CRF : B3 - - - Yes2) -Yes

2) --

3-40

Safety System

Note 1) : Should be adjusted seatback with most upright position.

1RWH)RU¿WPHQWRI,62),;WRGGOHU¶VUHDUZDUGIDFLQJODUJH&56

 'ULYHU¶VVHDW6HDWSXPSLQJVKRXOGEHDGMXVWHGWRDSSURSULDWHKHLJKW

- Front passenger seat : Seat sliding should be adjusted to appropriate

position.

❈ Never place a rearward facing Child Restraint System on the front passen-

ger seat, unless the air bag is deactivated.

❈ It is recommended to move the 2nd raw seat forward, when CRS is unstable

in the 3rd raw.

Seat Number Position in the vehicle Seating position

1 Front left

2 Front center

3 Front right

42nd row left

52nd row center

62nd row right

73rd row left

83rd row right

OSU2I031057

3-41

Suitability of each seating position for belted & ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems (CRS)according to

UN regulations (Information for use by 7-seater vehicle users and CRS manufacturers)

• Yes : Suitable for fitment of the designated category of CRS

• No : Not suitable for fitment of the designated category of CRS

• ‘’-’’ : Not applicable

• The table is based on LHD vehicle. Except for the front passenger seat, the table is valid for RHD vehicle.

For RHD vehicle front passenger seat, please use information for the seating position number 3.

• If your car is for seven seater, seating position number 5 is not available

CRS categories Seating positions Remarks

12345678

Universal belted CRS - - Yes1)

(F, R) No No No Yes

(F, R) Yes

(F, R) F : Forward facing

R : Rearward facing

i-size CRS ISOFIX CRF :

F2, F2X, R1, R2 ---No-No--

Carry-cot

(ISOFIX lateral facing CRS) ISOFIX CRF:

L1, L2 ---No-No--

ISOFIX infant* CRS

(* : ISOFIX baby CRS) ISOFIX CRF :

R1 ---

Yes

(R) -Yes

(R) --

ISOFIX toddler CRS - small ISOFIX CRF :

F2,F2X, R2,R2X ---

Yes

(F, R) -Yes

(F, R) --

ISOFIX toddler CRS – large*

(* : not booster seats) ISOFIX CRF :

F3, R3 ---

Yes2)

(F, R) -Yes2)

(F, R) --

Booster Seat – reduced Width ISO CRF : B2 - - - No - No - -

Booster Seat – full Width ISO CRF : B3 - - - No - No - -

3-42

Safety System

Note 1) : Should be adjusted seatback with most upright position.

1RWH)RU¿WPHQWRI,62),;WRGGOHU¶VUHDUZDUGIDFLQJODUJH&56

 'ULYHU¶VVHDW6HDWSXPSLQJVKRXOGEHDGMXVWHGWRDSSURSULDWHKHLJKW

- Front passenger seat : Seat sliding should be adjusted to appropriate

position.

❈ Never place a rearward facing Child Restraint System on the front passen-

ger seat, unless the air bag is deactivated.

❈ It is recommended to move the 2nd raw seat forward, when CRS is unstable

in the 3rd raw.

Seat Number Position in the vehicle Seating position

1 Front left

2 Front center

3 Front right

42nd row left

52nd row center

62nd row right

73rd row left

83rd row right

OSU2I031057

3-43

Child Seat Restraint for Vehicle ISOFIX Positions

Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate

for your children. When using the child safety seats, refer to following table:

U = Suitable for “Universal” category Child Restraints Systems approved

for use in mass group.

UF = Suitable for forward facing “universal” category restraints for use in

this mass group.

X = Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

N/A = Not Applicable

Remarks:- Co driver seat:

Up right, Rearmost position & Seat belt shoulder anchorage to lowest

position.

Mass Group

Seating Position (or other side)

Front

Passenger

2nd Row

Outboard

2nd Row

Centre

3rd Row

Outboard

3rd Row

Centre

6S 7S 6S 7S 6S 7S 6S 7S 6S 7S

Group 0 Up to 10 kg X X U U N/A X U U N/A N/A

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg X X U U N/A X U U N/A N/A

Group I 9 to 18 kg UF UF U U N/A X U U N/A N/A

Group II 15 to 25 kg UF UF U U N/A X U U N/A N/A

Group III 22 to 36 kg UF UF U U N/A X U U N/A N/A

3-44

Safety System

Installing a child restraint sys-

tem by lap/shoulder belt

E2MS103005

To install a child restraint system on

the outboard or center rear seats, do

the following:

1. Place the child restraint system in

the seat and route the lap/shoulder

belt around or through the restraint,

following the restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions. Be sure the seat

belt webbing is not twisted.

E2BLD310

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch

into the buckle. Listen for the dis-

tinct “Click” sound.

Position the release button so that it

is easy to access in case of an emer-

gency.

MMSA3030

3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the

seat belt to take up any slack. After

installation of the child restraint

system, try to move it in all direc-

tions to be sure the child restraint

system is securely installed.

If you need to tighten the belt, pull

more webbing toward the retractor.

When you unbuckle the seat belt and

allow it to retract, the retractor will au-

tomatically revert back to its normal

seated passenger emergency locking

usage condition.

3-45

$,5%$*ǘ6833/(0(17$/5(675$,176<67(0ǣ656Ǥ

1. Driver’s front air bag

2. Passenger’s front air bag

3. Side air bag

4. Curtain air bag

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OSU2I031012

3-46

Safety System

WARNING

• Even in vehicles with air bags,

you and your passengers must

always wear the safety belts

provided in order to minimize

the risk and severity of injury in

the event of a collision or roll-

over.

• SRS and pretensioners contain

explosive chemicals.

If scraping a vehicle without re-

moving SRS and pretensioners

from a vehicle, it may cause fire.

Before scraping a vehicle, we

recommend that you contact an

authorized Hyundai dealer.

• Keep the SRS parts and wirings

away from water or any liquid. If

the SRS components are inoper-

ative due to exposure to water

or liquids, it may cause fire or

severe injury.

How does the air bag system

operate

• Air bags are activated (able to in-

flate if necessary) only when the

ignition switch is placed to the ON

or START position.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the

event of serious frontal or side col-

lision in order to help protect the

occupants from serious physical

injury.

• There is no single speed at which

the air bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed to

inflate based upon the severity of a

collision and its direction. These

two factors determine whether the

sensors produce an electronic de-

ployment/ inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a

number of factors including vehicle

speed, angles of impact and the

density and stiffness of the vehi-

cles or objects which your vehicle

hits in the collision. The determin-

ing, factors are not limited to those

mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely

inflate and deflate in an instant.

It is virtually impossible for you to

see the air bags inflate during an

accident.

It is much more likely that you will

simply see the deflated air bags

hanging out of their storage com-

partments after the collision.

• In order to help provide protection

in a severe collision, the air bags

must inflate rapidly. The speed of

air bag inflation is a consequence

of extremely short time in which a

collision occurs and the need to

get the air bag between the occu-

pant and the vehicle structures be-

fore the occupant impacts those

structures. This speed of inflation

reduces the risk of serious or

life-threatening injuries in a severe

collision and is thus a necessary

part of air bag design.

However, air bag inflation can also

cause injuries which can include

facial abrasions, bruises and bro-

ken bones because the inflation

speed also causes the air bags to

expand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstances un-

der which contact with the steering

wheel air bag can cause fatal inju-

ries, especially if the occupant is

positioned excessively close to the

steering wheel.

3-47

WARNING

• To avoid severe personal injury

or death caused by deploying

air bags in a collision, the driver

should sit as far back from the

steering wheel air bag as possi-

ble. The front passenger should

always move their seat as far

back as possible and sit back in

their seat.

• Air bag inflates instantly in an

event of a collision, passengers

may be injured by the air bag ex-

pansion force if they are not in a

proper position.

• Air bag inflation may cause inju-

ries including facial or bodily

abrasions, injuries from broken

glasses or burns.

Noise and smoke

When the air bags inflate, they make

a loud noise and they leave smoke

and powder in the air inside of the ve-

hicle. This is normal and is a result of

the ignition of the air bag inflator. Af-

ter the air bag inflates, you may feel

substantial discomfort in breathing

due to the contact of your chest with

both the seat belt and the air bag, as

well as from breathing the smoke and

powder. Open your doors and/or

windows as soon as possible after

impact in order to reduce discom-

fort and prevent prolonged expo-

sure to the smoke and powder.

Though smoke and powder are

non-toxic, it may cause irritation to

the skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc.).

If this is the case, wash and rinse with

cold water immediately and consult

with the doctor if the symptom per-

sists.

WARNING

When the air bags deploy, the air

bag related parts in the steering

wheel are very hot. To prevent in-

jury, do not touch the air bag stor-

age areas internal components im-

mediately after an air bag has

inflated.

Do not install a child restraint

on the front passenger’s seat

(if equipped)

OYDESA2042

Never place a rear-facing child re-

straint in the front passenger’s seat. If

the air bag deploys, it would impact

the rear-facing child restraint, caus-

ing serious or fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing

child restraints in the front passen-

ger’s seat either. If the front passen-

ger air bag inflates, it would cause

serious or fatal injuries to the child.

3-48

Safety System

WARNING

• NEVER use a rearward facing

child restraint on a seat protect-

ed by an ACTIVE AIR BAG in

front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS

INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

• Never put a child restraint in the

front passenger seat. If the front

passenger air bag inflates, it

would cause serious or fatal in-

juries.

Air bag warning and indicator

Air bag warning light

W7-147

The purpose of the air bag warning

light in your instrument panel is to

alert you of a potential problem with

your air bag - Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turned

ON, the warning light should illumi-

nate for approximately 6 seconds,

then go off.

Have the system checked if:

• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating

for approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehi-

cle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the ignition

switch is in ON position.

SRS components and func-

tions

OSU2I031038

The SRS consists of the following

components:

'ULYHU¶VIURQWDLUEDJPRGXOH

3DVVHQJHU¶VIURQWDLUEDJPRGXOH

(3) Pre-tensioner seatbelt system

(4) Air bag warning light

656FRQWUROPRGXOH656&0

(6) Front impact Sensor

(7) Side air bag modules

&XUWDLQDLUEDJPRGXOHV

(9) Side impact sensors

The SRSCM continuously monitors

all SRS components while the igni-

tion switch is ON to determine if a

crash impact is severe enough to re-

quire air bag deployment or pre-ten-

sioner seat belt deployment.

The SRS air bag warning light on the

instrument panel will illuminate for

about 6 seconds after the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position,

after which the air bag warning light

should go out.

3-49

WARNING

If any of the following conditions

occurs, this indicates a malfunc-

tion of the SRS. We recommend

that the system be inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illumi-

nating for approximately 6 sec-

onds.

• The light comes on while the ve-

hicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the igni-

tion switch is in ON position.

B240B01L



Driver's front air bag (1)

The air bag modules are located both

in the center of the steering wheel

and in the front passenger’s panel

above the glove box. When the

SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe

impact to the front of the vehicle, it

will automatically deploy the front air

bags.

B240B02L



Driver's front air bag (2)

Upon deployment, tear seams mold-

ed directly into the pad covers will

separate under pressure from the ex-

pansion of the air bags. Further open-

ing of the covers then allows full infla-

tion of the air bags.

B240B03L



Driver's front air bag (3)

A fully inflated air bag, in combination

with a properly worn seat belt, slows

the driver’s or the passenger’s for-

ward motion, reducing the risk of

head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag

immediately starts deflating, enabling

the driver to maintain forward visibility

and the ability to steer or operate oth-

er controls.

3-50

Safety System

B240B05L



Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING

• Do not install or place any ac-

cessories (drink holder, cas-

sette holder, sticker, etc.) on the

front passenger’s panel above

the glove box in a vehicle with a

passenger’s air bag. Such ob-

jects may become dangerous

projectiles and cause injury if

the passenger’s air bag inflates.

• When installing a container of

liquid air freshener inside the

vehicle, do not place it near the

instrument cluster nor on the in-

strument panel surface.

It may become a dangerous pro-

jectile and cause injury if the

passenger’s air bag inflates.

WARNING

• If an air bag deploys, there may

be a loud noise followed by a

fine dust released in the vehicle.

These conditions are normal

and are not hazardous - the air

bags are packed in this fine

powder. The dust generated

during air bag deployment may

cause skin or eye irritation as

well as aggravate asthma for

some persons. Always wash all

exposed skin areas thoroughly

with cold water and a mild soap

after an accident in which the air

bags were deployed.

• The SRS can function only when

the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

• Before you replace a fuse or dis-

connect a battery terminal, turn

the ignition switch to the LOCK

position and remove the ignition

key. Never remove or replace

the air bag related fuse(s) when

the ignition switch is in the ON

position. Failure to heed this

warning will cause the SRS air

bag warning light to illuminate.

3-51

Driver’s and passenger’s front

air bag (if equipped)

OSU2I039013



Driver’s front air bag



Passenger’s front air bag

OSU2I039015

Your vehicle is equipped with a Sup-

plemental Restraint (Air Bag) System

and lap/shoulder belts at both the

driver and passenger seating posi-

tions.

The indications of the system’s pres-

ence are the letters “AIR BAG” en-

graved on the air bag pad cover in the

steering wheel and the passenger’s

side front panel pad above the glove

box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed

under the pad covers in the center of

the steering wheel and the passen-

ger’s side front panel above the glove

box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide

the vehicle’s driver and/or the front

passenger with additional protection

than that offered by the seat belt sys-

tem alone in case of a frontal impact

of sufficient severity.

WARNING

Always use seat belts and child re-

straints – every trip, every time, ev-

eryone! Air bags inflate with con-

siderable force and in the blink of

an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-

pants in proper position to obtain

maximum benefit from the air bag.

Even with air bags, improperly and

unbelted occupants can be se-

verely injured when the air bag in-

flates. Always follow the precau-

tions about seat belts, air bags and

occupant safety contained in this

manual.

To reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries and receive the maxi-

mum safety benefit from your re-

straint system:

• Never place a child in any child

or booster seat in the front seat.

• ABC – Always Buckle Children

in the back seat. It is the safest

place for children of any age to

ride.

• Air bags can injure occupants

improperly positioned in the

front seats.

• Move your seat as far back as

practical from the front air bags,

while still maintaining control of

the vehicle.

3-52

Safety System

• You and your passengers

should never sit or lean unnec-

essarily close to the air bags.

Improperly positioned drivers

and passengers can be severely

injured by inflating air bags.

• Never lean against the door or

center console – always sit in an

upright position.

• No objects (such as crash pad

cover, cellular phone holder,

cup holder, perfume or stickers)

should be placed over or near

the air bag modules on the steer-

ing wheel, instrument panel,

windshield glass, and the front

passenger’s panel above the

glove box. Such objects could

cause harm if the vehicle is in a

crash severe enough to cause

the air bags to deploy.

• Do not attach any objects on the

front windshield and inside mir-

ror.

• Do not tamper with or discon-

nect SRS wiring or other compo-

nents of the SRS system. Doing

so could result in injury, due to

accidental deployment of the air

bags or by rendering the SRS in-

operative.

• If the SRS air bag warning light

remains illuminated while the

vehicle is being driven, we rec-

ommend that the system be in-

spected by an authorized HYUN-

DAI dealer.

• Air bags can only be used once

– we recommend that the sys-

tem be replaced by an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer.

• The SRS is designed to deploy

the front air bags only when an

impact is sufficiently severe and

when the impact angle is less

than 30° from the forward longi-

tudinal axis of the vehicle. Addi-

tionally, the air bags will only

deploy once. Seat belts must be

worn at all times.

• Front air bags are not intended

to deploy in side-impact, rear-im-

pact or rollover crashes. In addi-

tion, front air bags will not de-

ploy in frontal crashes below the

deployment threshold.

• A child restraint system must

never be placed in the front seat.

The infant or child could be se-

verely injured or killed by an air

bag deployment in case of an

accident.

• Children age 12 and under must

always be properly restrained in

the rear seat. Never allow chil-

dren to ride in the front passen-

ger seat. If a child over 12 must

be seated in the front seat, he or

she must be properly belted and

the seat should be moved as far

back as possible.

• For maximum safety protection

in all types of crashes, all occu-

pants including the driver

should always wear their seat

belts whether or not an air bag is

also provided at their seating

position to minimize the risk of

severe injury or death in the

event of a crash. Do not sit or

lean unnecessarily close to the

air bag while the vehicle is in

motion.

3-53

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can result in serious or fatal

injury in a crash. All occupants

should sit upright with the seat

back in an upright position, cen-

tered on the seat cushion with

their seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and their feet on

the floor until the vehicle is

parked and the ignition key is re-

moved.

• The SRS air bag system must

deploy very rapidly to provide

protection in a crash. If an occu-

pant is out of position because

of not wearing a seat belt, the air

bag may forcefully contact the

occupant causing serious or fa-

tal injuries.

Side impact air bag

OIB034021

OJK032063

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the

illustration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a side

impact air bag in each front seat.

The purpose of the air bag is to pro-

vide the vehicle’s driver and/or the

front passenger with additional pro-

tection than that offered by the seat

belt alone.

The side impact air bags are de-

signed to deploy only during certain

side-impact collisions, depending on

the crash severity, angle, speed and

point of impact. The side impact air

bags are not designed to deploy in all

side impact situations.

WARNING

Do not allow the passengers to lean

their heads or bodies onto doors, put

their arms on the doors, stretch their

arms out of the window, or place ob-

jects between the doors and passen-

gers when they are seated on seats

equipped with side and/or curtain air

bags.

WARNING

• The side impact air bag is sup-

plemental to the driver’s and the

passenger’s seat belt systems

and is not a substitute for them.

Therefore your seat belts must

be worn at all times while the ve-

hicle is in motion. The air bags

deploy only in certain side im-

pact conditions severe enough

to cause significant injury to the

vehicle occupants.

• For best protection from the

side impact air bag system and

to avoid being injured by the de-

ploying side impact air bag, both

front seat occupants should sit

in an upright position with the

3-54

Safety System

seat belt properly fastened. The

driver’s hands should be placed

on the steering wheel at the 9:00

and 3:00 positions. The passen-

ger’s arms and hands should be

placed on their laps.

• Do not use any accessory seat

covers.

• Use of seat covers could reduce

or prevent the effectiveness of

the system.

• Do not install any accessories

on the side or near the side im-

pact air bag.

• Do not place any objects over

the air bag or between the air

bag and yourself. Also, do not

attach any objects around the

area the air bag inflates such as

the door, side door glass, front

and rear pillar.

• Do not place any objects be-

tween the door and the seat.

They may become dangerous

projectiles if the side air bag in-

flates.

• Do not put any objects between

the side air bag label and seat

cushion. It could cause harm if

the vehicle is in a crash severe

enough to cause the air bags to

deploy.

• To prevent unexpected deploy-

ment of the side impact air bag

that may result in personal inju-

ry, avoid impact to the side im-

pact sensor when the ignition

switch is on.

• If the seat or seat cover is dam-

aged, we recommend that the

system be serviced by an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Inform the dealer that your vehi-

cle is equipped with side impact

air bags.

Curtain air bag

OQXI039024

OQXI039025

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the

illustration.

Curtain air bags are located along

both sides of the roof rails above the

front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the

heads of the front seat occupants and

the rear outboard seat occupants in

certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to

deploy only during certain side im-

pact collisions, depending on the

crash severity, angle, speed and im-

pact. The curtain air bags are not de-

signed to deploy in all side impact

situations, collisions from the front or

rear of the vehicle or in most rollover

situations.

3-55

WARNING

• In order for side impact and cur-

tain air bags to provide the best

protection, both front seat occu-

pants and both outboard rear

occupants should sit in an up-

right position with the seat belts

properly fastened.

Importantly, children should sit

in a proper child restraint sys-

tem in the rear seat.

• When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats, they must

be seated in the proper child re-

straint system. Make sure to put

the child restraint system as far

away from the door side as pos-

sible, and secure the child re-

straint system in a locked posi-

tion.

• Do not place any objects over

the air bag. Also, do not attach

any objects around the area the

air bag inflates such as the door,

side door glass, front and rear

pillar, roof side rail.

• Do not hang other objects ex-

cept clothes, especially hard or

breakable objects. In an acci-

dent, it may cause vehicle dam-

age or personal injury.

• Do not allow the passengers to

lean their heads or bodies onto

doors, put their arms on the

doors, stretch their arms out of

the window, or place objects be-

tween the doors and passengers

when they are seated on seats

equipped with side and/or cur-

tain air bags.

• Do not open or repair the side

curtain air bags.

• Never try to open or repair any

components of the side curtain

air bag system. We recommend

that the system be serviced by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Failure to follow the above men-

tioned instructions can result in

injury or death to the vehicle occu-

pants in an accident.

Why didn’t my air bag go off in a

collision? (Inflation and non-infla-

tion conditions of the air bag)

There are many types of accidents

in which the air bag would not be

expected to provide additional

protection.

These include rear impacts, sec-

ond or third collisions in multiple

impact accidents, as well as low

speed impacts.

3-56

Safety System

Air bag collision sensors

1. SRS control module

2. Front impact sensor

3. Side impact sensor

OSU2I031016L/OGC034038/OSU2I039017/OGC034039

3-57

WARNING

• Do not hit or allow any objects

to impact the locations where air

bags or sensors are installed.

This may cause unexpected air

bag deployment, which could

result in serious personal injury

or death.

• If the installation location or an-

gle of the sensors is altered in

any way, the air bags may de-

ploy when they should not or

they may not deploy when they

should, causing severe injury or

death.

Therefore, do not try to perform

maintenance on or around the

air bag sensors. We recommend

that the system be serviced by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Problems may arise if the sen-

sor installation angles are

changed due to the deformation

of the front bumper and body.

We recommend that the system

be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Your vehicle has been designed

to absorb impact and deploy the

air bag(s) in certain collisions.

Installing aftermarket bumper

guards or replacing a bumper

with non-genuine parts may ad-

versely affect your vehicles col-

lision and air bag deployment

performance.

Air bag inflation conditions

OSU2I031018L

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate

in certain frontal collision depending

on the crash severity, speed or an-

gles of impact of the front collision.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unimproved

roads or sidewalks, air bags may de-

ploy. Drive carefully on unimproved

roads or on surfaces not designed for

vehicle traffic to prevent unintended

air bag deployment.

3-58

Safety System

OSU2I031021L

OTM038068

Side and curtain air bags

Side and curtain air bags are de-

signed to inflate when an impact is

detected by side collision sensors de-

pending on the severity from a side

impact collision.

Although the driver’s and front pas-

senger’s air bags are designed to in-

flate only in frontal collisions, they

also may inflate in other types of col-

lisions if the front impact sensors de-

tect a sufficient impact. Side and cur-

tain air bags are designed to inflate

only in side impact collisions, but they

may inflate in other collisions if the

side impact sensors detect a suffi-

cient impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unimproved

roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive

carefully on unimproved roads or on

surfaces not designed for vehicle traf-

fic to prevent unintended air bag de-

ployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

OSU2I031019L

• In certain low-speed collisions the

air bags may not deploy. The air

bags are designed not to deploy in

such cases because they may not

provide benefits beyond the pro-

tection of the seat belts in such col-

lisions.

OSU2I031020L

• Front air bags are not designed to

inflate in rear collisions, because

occupants are moved backward by

the force of the impact. In this case,

inflated air bags would not be able

to provide any additional benefit.

3-59

OSU2I031021L

• Front air bags may not inflate in

side impact collisions, because oc-

cupants move to the direction of

the collision, and thus in side im-

pacts, frontal air bag deployment

would not provide additional occu-

pant protection.

OSU2I031040L

• In a slant or angled collision, the

force of impact may direct the oc-

cupants in a direction where the air

bags would not be able to provide

any additional benefit, and thus the

sensors may not deploy any air

bags.

OSU2I031023L

• Just before impact, drivers often

brake heavily. Such heavy braking

lowers the front portion of the vehi-

cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-

cle with a higher ground clearance.

Air bags may not inflate in this “un-

der-ride” situation because decel-

eration forces that are detected by

sensor may be significantly re-

duced by such “under-ride” colli-

sions.

OED036104

• Front air bags may not inflate in all

rollover accidents when the SRS

Control Module (SRSCM) indi-

cates that the front air bag deploy-

ment would not provide additional

occupant protection.

3-60

Safety System

i Information

The side and/or curtain air bags may

inflate when the vehicle is rolled over

by a side impact collision, if the vehicle

is equipped with side and/or curtain

air bags.

OSU2I031022L

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-

cle collides with objects such as

utility poles or trees, where the

point of impact is concentrated and

the collision energy is absorbed by

the vehicle structure.

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free

and so there are no parts you can

safely service by yourself. If the SRS

air bag warning light does not illumi-

nate for 6 sec after IGN “ON” or con-

tinuously remains on, we recommend

that the system be inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

We recommend that the any work on

the SRS system, such as removing,

installing, repairing, or any work on

the steering wheel, the front passen-

ger’s panel, front seats and roof rails

be performed by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling

of the SRS system may result in seri-

ous personal injury.

WARNING

• Modification to SRS compo-

nents or wiring, including the

addition of any kind of badges

to the pad covers or modifica-

tions to the body structure, can

adversely affect SRS perfor-

mance and lead to possible inju-

ry.

• For cleaning the air bag pad

covers, use only a soft, dry cloth

or one which has been moist-

ened with plain water. Solvents

or cleaners could adversely af-

fect the air bag covers and prop-

er deployment of the system.

3-61

• No objects should be placed

over or near the air bag modules

on the steering wheel, instru-

ment panel, and the front pas-

senger’s panel above the glove

box, because any such object

could cause harm if the vehicle

is in a crash severe enough to

cause the air bags to inflate.

• If the air bags inflate, we recom-

mend that the system be re-

placed by an authorized HYUN-

DAI dealer.

• Do not tamper with or discon-

nect SRS wiring, or other com-

ponents of the SRS system. Do-

ing so could result in injury, due

to accidental inflation of the air

bags or by rendering the SRS in-

operative.

• If components of the air bag

system must be discarded, or if

the vehicle must be scrapped,

certain safety precautions must

be observed. An authorized

HYUNDAI dealer knows these

precautions and can give you

the necessary information. Fail-

ure to follow these precautions

and procedures could increase

the risk of personal injury.

• If your car was flooded and has

soaked carpeting or water on

the flooring, you shouldn’t try to

start the engine; we recommend

that you contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Additional safety precautions

• Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a fold-

ed-down back seat. All occupants

should sit upright, fully back in their

seats with their seat belts on and

their feet on the floor.

• Passengers should not move

out of or change seats while the

vehicle is moving. A passenger

who is not wearing a seat belt

during a crash or emergency stop

can be thrown against the inside of

the vehicle, against other occu-

pants, or out of the vehicle.

• Each seat belt is designed to re-

strain one occupant. If more than

one person uses the same seat

belt, they could be seriously in-

jured or killed in a collision.

• Do not use any accessories on

seat belts. Devices claiming to im-

prove occupant comfort or reposi-

tion the seat belt can reduce the

protection provided by the seat belt

and increase the chance of serious

injury in a crash.

• Passengers should not place

hard or sharp objects between

themselves and the air bags.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on

your lap or in your mouth can result

in injuries if an air bag inflates.

• Keep occupants away from the

air bag covers. All occupants

should sit upright, fully back in their

seats with their seat belts on and

their feet on the floor. If occupants

are too close to the air bag covers,

they could be injured if the air bags

inflate.

3-62

Safety System

• Do not attach or place objects

on or near the air bag covers.

Any object attached to or placed

on the front air bag covers could

interfere with the proper operation

of the air bags.

• Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats

could interfere with the operation

of the supplemental restraint sys-

tem sensing components air bags.

• Do not place items under the

front seats. Placing items under

the front seats could interfere with

the operation of the supplemental

restraint system sensing compo-

nents and wiring harnesses.

• Never hold an infant or child on

your lap. The infant or child could

be seriously injured or killed in the

event of a crash. All infants and

children should be properly re-

strained in appropriate child safety

seats or seat belts in the rear seat.

WARNING

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can cause occupants to be

shifted too close to a deploying

air bag, strike the interior struc-

ture or be thrown from the vehi-

cle resulting in serious injury or

death.

• Always sit upright with the seat-

back in an upright position, cen-

tered on the seat cushion with

your seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and your feet on

the floor.

Adding equipment to or modify-

ing your air bag-equipped vehi-

cle

If you modify your vehicle by chang-

ing your vehicle’s frame, bumper sys-

tem, front end or side sheet metal or

ride height, this may affect the opera-

tion of your vehicle’s air bag system.

Air bag warning label

OSU2I039024

Air bag warning labels are attached

to alert the driver and passengers of

potential risks of the air bag system.

Be sure to read all of the information

about the air bags that are installed

on your vehicle in this Owner’s Manu-

al.

Instrument cluster ..............................................................................................4-2

Instrument cluster control ............................................................................. 4-4

Gauges ............................................................................................................ 4-4

Icy road warning light .................................................................................... 4-9

Transmission shift indicator ..........................................................................4-10

Warning and indicator lights ........................................................................4-13

Cluster display messages .............................................................................4-25

Cluster display................................................................................................... 4-31

Cluster display control .................................................................................. 4-31

Cluster display modes ...................................................................................4-32

User settings mode .......................................................................................4-35

Trip computer ................................................................................................4-41

4. Instrument Cluster

4-2

Instrument Cluster



Type A



Type B

OSU2I049001/OSU2I049002

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Cluster display (including Trip computer)

❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more details, refer to the “Gauges” in this chapter.

4-3



Full Cluster(Type C)

ONX4040002

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Cluster display (including Trip comput-

er)

4-4

Instrument Cluster

Instrument cluster control

Instrument panel illumination

When the vehicle’s position lights or

headlights are on, the brightness of

the instrument panel illumination can

be adjusted by:

- User Settings mode in the Cluster :

You can adjust the instrument panel

illumination in the “Lights - Illumina-

tion” .

WARNING

Never adjust the instrument clus-

ter while driving. This could result

in loss of control and lead to an ac-

cident that may cause death, seri-

ous injury, or vehicle damage.

OHCR046110

• The brightness of the instrument

panel illumination is displayed.

• If the brightness reaches the maxi-

mum or minimum level, an alarm

will sound.

Gauges

Speedometer

OSU2I049003



Type A

OSU2I049014



Type B

OCN7040005



Type C

The speedometer indicates the speed

of the vehicle and is calibrated in kilo-

meters per hour (km/h).

OCN7040005

Type C

4-5

Tachometer

OSU2I049005



Type A

- Petrol

OSU2I049006

- Diesel

OSU2I049007



Type B

- Petrol

OSU2I049008

- Diesel

OCN7040007



Type C

- Petrol

ONX4040006

- Diesel

The tachometer indicates the approx-

imate number of engine revolutions

per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the cor-

rect shift points and to prevent lug-

ging and/or over-revving the engine.

NOTICE

Do not operate the engine within

the tachometer’s RED ZONE. This

may cause severe engine damage.

4-6

Instrument Cluster

Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge

OSU2I049009



Type A



Type B

OSU2I049010



Type C

OTM040010

This gauge indicates the temperature

of the engine coolant when the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

NOTICE

If the gauge pointer moves beyond

the normal range area toward the

“H (Hot)” position, it indicates

overheating that may damage the

engine.

Do not continue driving with an

overheated engine. If your vehicle

overheats, refer to “If the Engine

Overheats” in chapter 7.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap or

reservoir cap when the engine is

hot. The engine coolant is under

pressure and could cause severe

burns. Wait until the engine is cool

before adding coolant to the reser-

voir.

4-7

Fuel Gauge

OSU2I049011



Type A



Type B

OSU2I049012



Type C

OTM040012

This gauge indicates the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the fuel

tank.

i Information

• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a

low fuel warning light, which will

illuminate when the fuel tank is

nearly empty.

• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge

pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel

warning light may come on earlier

than usual due to the movement of

fuel in the tank.

WARNING

Fuel Gauge

Running out of fuel can expose ve-

hicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain addi-

tional fuel as soon as possible af-

ter the warning light comes on or

when the gauge indicator comes

close to the “E (Empty)” level.

NOTICE

Avoid driving with a very low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire dam-

aging the catalytic converter.

4-8

Instrument Cluster

Odometer

OIG046114



Type A

OSU2I049016



Type B

OTM040019



Type C

The odometer indicates the total dis-

tance that the vehicle has been driv-

en and should be used to determine

when periodic maintenance should

be performed.

i Information

It is forbidden to alter the odometer of

all vehicles with the intent to change

the mileage registered on the odome-

ter. The alteration may void your war-

ranty coverage.

4-9

Outside Temperature Gauge

(if equipped)

OAD048555L



Type A

OSU2I049017



Type B

OTM040013



Type C

This gauge indicates the current out-

side air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).

- Temperature range : - 40°C ~ 85°C

(-40°F ~ 211°F)

The outside temperature on the dis-

play may not change immediately like

a general thermometer to prevent the

driver from being inattentive.

The temperature unit (from °C to °F

or from °F to °C) can be changed as

below procedures (if equipped).

- User Settings Mode in the Cluster :

You can change the temperature

unit in the “Other Features - Tem-

perature unit”.

Icy road warning light

(if equipped)

OSU2I049019



Type A

This warning light is to warn the driver

the road may be icy.

When the temperature on the outside

temperature gauge is approximately

below 4°C (40°F), the Icy Road Warn-

ing Light and Outside Temperature

Gauge blinks 10 times, and then illu-

minates. Also, the warning chime

sounds 3 times.

i Information

If the icy road warning light appears

while driving, you should drive more

attentively and safely refraining from

over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud-

den braking or sharp turning, etc.

4-10

Instrument Cluster

Transmission shift indicator

Manual transmission shift indi-

cator (if equipped)

OAD048557N



Type A



Type B

OSU2I049020



Type C

OCN7040014

This indicator informs which gear is

desired while driving to save fuel.

• Shifting up : S2, S3, S4, S5, S6

• Shifting down : T1, T2, T3, T4,

For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the

3rd gear is desired (currently

the shift lever is in the 2nd or

1st gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to

the 3rd gear is desired (cur-

rently the shift lever is in the

4th, 5th, or 6th gear).

When the system is not working prop-

erly, the indicator is not displayed.

4-11

Dual Clutch Transmission shift

indicator

OSU2I049024



Type A

OSU2I049022



Type B

OCN7040013



Type C

This indicator displays which shift le-

ver is selected.

• Park : P

• Reverse : R

• Neutral : N

• Drive : D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6

OSU2I049021

Shift indicator pop-up (if equipped)

The pop-up displays the current gear

position selected for 2 seconds (P/R/

N/D).

The shift indicator pop-up function

can be activated or deactivated from

the User Settings mode in the cluster

display.

4-12

Instrument Cluster

Automatic Transmission shift in-

dicator

OSU2I049024



Type A

OSU2I049022



Type B

OCN7040013



Type C

This indicator displays which shift le-

ver is selected.

• Park : P

• Reverse : R

• Neutral : N

• Drive : D

• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

OSU2I049021

Shift indicator pop-up (if equipped)

The pop-up displays the current gear

position selected for 2 seconds (P/R/

N/D).

The shift indicator pop-up function

can be activated or deactivated from

the User Settings mode in the cluster

display.

4-13

Warning and indicator lights

i Information - Warnaning light

Make sure that all warning lights are

OFF after starting the engine. If any

light is still ON, this indicates a situa-

tion that needs attention.

Air bag Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 6

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the SRS.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Seat Belt Warning

Light

This warning light informs the driver

(or front passenger) that the seat belt

is not fastened.

For more details, refer to the “Seat

Belts” in chapter 3.

Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds

- It remains on if the parking brake

is applied.

• When the parking brake is applied.

• When the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.

- If the warning light illuminates

with the parking brake released, it

indicates the brake fluid level is

low.

4-14

Instrument Cluster

If the brake fluid level in the reser-

voir is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and

add fluid as required (For more de-

tails, refer to “Brake Fluid” in chap-

ter 8). Then check all brake com-

ponents for fluid leaks. If any leak

on brake system is still found, the

warning light remains on, or the

brakes do not operate properly, do

not drive the vehicle.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle towed to an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

inspected.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-di-

agonal braking systems. This means

you still have braking on two wheels

even if one of the dual systems should

fail.

With only one of the dual systems

working, more than normal pedal

travel and greater pedal pressure are

required to stop the vehicle.

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as

short a distance with only a portion of

the brake system working.

If the brakes fail while you are driving,

shift to a lower gear for additional en-

gine braking and stop the vehicle as

soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warn-

ing Light

Driving the vehicle with a warning

light ON is dangerous. If the Park-

ing Brake & Brake Fluid Warning

Light illuminates with the parking

brake released, it indicates that the

brake fluid level is low.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

4-15

Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem (ABS) Warning

Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the ABS (The normal braking sys-

tem will still be operational without

the assistance of the anti-lock

brake system).

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD)

System Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate

at the same time while driving:

• When the ABS and regular brake

system may not work normally.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Electronic Brake Force Distribu-

tion (EBD) System Warning

Light

When both ABS and Parking Brake

& Brake Fluid Warning Lights are

on, the brake system will not work

normally and you may experience

an unexpected and dangerous sit-

uation during sudden braking.

In this case, avoid high speed driv-

ing and abrupt braking.

We recommend you have the vehi-

cle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

i Information

- Electronic Brake Force Distri-

bution (EBD) System Warning

Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on or

both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Lights are on, the

speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter

may not work. Also, the EPS Warning

Light may illuminate and the steering

effort may increase or decrease.

In this case, we recommend you have

the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

4-16

Instrument Cluster

Electronic Parking

Brake (EPB) Warning

Light (if equipped) EPB

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the EPB.

In this case, we recommend that you

have the vehicle inspected by an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information

The Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)

Warning Light may illuminate when

the Electronic Stability control (ESC)

Indicator Light comes on to indicate

that the ESC is not working properly

(This does not indicate malfunction of

the EPB).

AUTO HOLD Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• [White] When you activate the auto

hold system by pressing the AUTO

HOLD button.

• [Green] When you stop the vehicle

completely by depressing the

brake pedal with the auto hold sys-

tem activated.

• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-

tion with the auto hold system.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to “Auto

Hold” in chapter 6.

AUTO STOP indicator

light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

When the engine enters the Idle Stop

mode of ISG (Idle Stop and Go) sys-

tem.

When the engine automatically starts,

the AUTO STOP indicator on the

cluster Illuminates to white.

For more details, refer to "ISG (Idle

Stop and Go) system" section in

chapter 6.

4-17

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) Indica-

tor Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch to

the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the ESC system.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

• While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to “Elec-

tronic Stability Control (ESC)” in

chapter 6.

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) OFF In-

dicator Light

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch to

the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately

3 seconds and then goes off.

• When you deactivate the ESC sys-

tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-

ton.

For more details, refer to

“Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)” in chapter 6.

Electric Power Steer-

ing (EPS) Warning

Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the EPS.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL)

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the emission control system.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

4-18

Instrument Cluster

NOTICE

• Driving with the Malfunction In-

dicator Lamp (MIL) on may

cause damage to the emission

control systems which could ef-

fect drivability and/or fuel econ-

omy.

• If the enhanced engine protec-

tion system becomes activated

due to lack of engine oil, engine

power will be limited. If such

condition continues repeatedly,

the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

will illuminate.

NOTICE

- Gasoline Engine

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) illuminates, potential catalyt-

ic converter damage is possible

which could result in loss of en-

gine power.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

NOTICE

- Diesel Engine

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) blinks, some error related to

the injection quantity adjustment

occurs which could result in loss

of engine power, combustion

noise and poor emission.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the engine control sys-

tem inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Charging System

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON

position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When there is a malfunction with

either the alternator or electrical

charging system.

If there is a malfunction with either

the alternator or electrical charging

system:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and check the

alternator drive belt for looseness

or breakage.

If the belt is adjusted properly,

there may be a problem in the

electrical charging system.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

Engine Oil Pressure

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON

position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When the engine oil pressure is

low.

4-19

If the engine oil pressure is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and check the

engine oil level (For more details,

refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 8). If

the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on after

adding oil or if oil is not available,

we recommend that you have the

vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

Continued driving with the warning

light on may cause engine failure.

i Information

When engine oil pressure decreases

due to insufficient engine oil, etc., the

Engine Oil Pressure warning light will

illuminate. In addition, the enhanced

engine protection system which re-

strains limits engine power will be acti-

vated operate. If the engine oil pres-

sure is restored, the Engine Oil

Pressure warning light and the en-

hanced engine protection system will

turn off. However, for gasoline 2.5 tur-

bo engine, when the engine oil pressure

is restored, the warning light and the

enhanced engine protection system

will turn off after the engine is restart-

ed.

NOTICE

If the engine does not stop imme-

diately after the Engine Oil Pres-

sure Warning light is illuminated,

severe damage could result.

Low Fuel Level Warn-

ing Light

This warning light illuminates:

When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

If the fuel tank is nearly empty, add

fuel as soon as possible.

NOTICE

- Low Fuel Level

Driving with the Low Fuel Level

warning light on or with the fuel

level below “E (Empty)” can cause

the engine to misfire and damage

the catalytic converter (if

equipped).

Master Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When there is a malfunction in op-

eration in any of the following sys-

tems:

- Lamp malfunction (if equipped)

- Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS) malfunction (if

equipped)

To identify the details of the warning,

look at the cluster display.

4-20

Instrument Cluster

Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light

(if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you turn the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When one or more of your tires are

significantly underinflated.

For more details, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in chapter 7.

This warning light remains on after

blinking for approximately 60 sec-

onds or repeatedly blinks on and off

at approximately 3 second intervals:

• When there is a malfunction with

the TPMS.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

For more details, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in chapter 7.

WARNING

Safe Stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damage

caused by external factors.

• If you notice any vehicle insta-

bility, immediately take your

foot off the accelerator pedal,

apply the brakes gradually with

light force, and slowly move to a

safe position off the road.

Fuel Filter Warning

Light

(for diesel engine)

This warning light illuminates:

• When water has accumulated in-

side the fuel filter.

In this case, remove the water from

the fuel filter.

For more details, refer to “Fuel Fil-

ter” in chapter 8.

NOTICE

• When the Fuel Filter Warning

Light illuminates, engine power

(vehicle speed & idle speed)

may decrease.

• If you keep driving with the

warning light on, engine parts

(injector, common rail, high

pressure fuel pump) may be

damaged. If this occurs, we rec-

ommend that you have the vehi-

cle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as

possible.

4-21

Exhaust system (GPF)

warning light (for gaso-

line engine, if

equipped)

• This warning light illuminates,

when accumulated soot reaches a

certain amount.

• When this warning light illumi-

nates, it may turn off after driving

the vehicle at more than 80 km/h

(50 mph) for about 30 minutes

(above 3rd gear with 1500 ~ 4000

engine rpm).

If this warning light blinks in spite of

the procedure (at this time Cluster

display warning message will be

displayed), we recommend that

you have the GPF system checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

If you continue to drive with the

GPF warning light blinking for a

long time, the GPF system can be

damaged and fuel consumption

can worsen.

Exhaust System (DPF

or LNT) Warning Light

(for diesel engine, if

equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When there is a malfunction with

the DPF or LNT system.

When this warning light illumi-

nates, it may turn off after driving

the vehicle:

- at more than 60 km/h (37 mph),

- above 2nd gear with 1500 ~ 2500

engine rpm for a certain time (for

about 25 minutes).

If this warning light illuminates in spite

of the procedure, we recommend that

you have the DPF system checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• When the exhaust gas captures

exhaust gases over certain amount

or the LNT performance is degrad-

ed.

- In this case, the warning light illu-

minates and the warning alarm

sounds while displaying the warn-

ing message “Self Regeneration”

on the cluster display.

For more details, refer to “Self

Regeneration Mode” in chapter 8.

NOTICE

If you continue to drive with the

DPF warning light blinking for a

long time, the DPF system can be

damaged and fuel consumption

can worsen.

SCR warning light

(for diesel engine, if

equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

When the urea solution tank is nearly

empty.If the urea solution tank is

nearly empty, refill urea solution as

soon as possible.

For more details, refer to "Selec-

tive Catalytic Reduction (SCR)”

section in chapter 9.

4-22

Instrument Cluster

Glow Indicator Light

(for diesel engine)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the engine is being preheat-

ed with the ignition switch or En-

gine Start/Stop button in the ON

position.

- The engine can be started after

the glow indicator light goes off.

- The illumination time varies de-

pending on the with the engine

coolant temperature, air tempera-

ture, and battery condition.

If the indicator light remains on or

blinks after the engine has warmed

up or while driving, there may be a

malfunction with the engine preheat-

ing system.

In this case, we recommend that you

have the vehicle inspected by an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information

If the engine does not start within 10

seconds after the preheating is com-

pleted, set the ignition switch or En-

gine Start/Stop Button to the LOCK or

OFF position for 10 seconds and then

to the ON position in order to preheat

the engine again.

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (without smart

key)

This indicator light illuminates:

When the vehicle detects the immobi-

lizer in your key properly while the ig-

nition switch is ON.

- At this time, you can start the en-

gine.

- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks:

When there is a malfunction with the

immobilizer system.

In this case, we recommend that you

have the vehicle inspected by an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (with smart key)

This indicator light illuminates for

up to 30 seconds:

When the vehicle detects the smart

key in the vehicle properly while the

Engine Start/Stop button is ACC or

ON.

- At this time, you can start the en-

gine.

- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a few

seconds:

When the smart key is not in the vehi-

cle.

- At this time, you can not start the

engine.

4-23

This indicator light illuminates for 2

seconds and goes off:

When the vehicle can not detect the

smart key which is in the vehicle while

the Engine Start/Stop button is ON.

In this case, we recommend that you

have the vehicle inspected by an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

• When the battery of the smart key

is weak.

- At this time, you can not start the

engine. However, you can start

the engine if you press the Engine

Start/Stop button with the smart

key. (For more details, refer to

“Starting the Engine” in chapter 6).

• When there is a malfunction with

the immobilizer system.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn Signal Indicator

Light

This indicator light blinks:

When you turn the turn signal light on.

If any of the following occurs, there

may a malfunction with the turn signal

system. In this case, we recommend

that you have the vehicle inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

- The indicator light does not blink

but illuminates.

- The indicator light blinks more rap-

idly.

- The indicator light does not illumi-

nate at all.

LED Headlight Warn-

ing Light

(if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

• When there is a malfunction with

the LED headlight.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This warning light blinks:

• When there is a malfunction with a

LED headlight related part.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

an an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er.

NOTICE

Continuous driving with the LED

Headlight Warning Light on or

blinking can reduce LED headlight

life.

Low Beam Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the headlights are on.

4-24

Instrument Cluster

High Beam Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the headlights are on and in

the high beam position

• When the turn signal lever is pulled

into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Light ON Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the tail lights or headlights

are on.

Front Fog Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

When the front fog lights are on.

Cruise Indicator Light

(if equipped) &58,6(

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the cruise control system is

enabled.

For more details, refer to “Cruise

Control System” in chapter 6.

COMFORT Mode Indi-

cator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you select “COMFORT”

mode as drive mode.

For more details, refer to “Drive

Mode Integrated Control System”

in chapter 6.

ECO Mode Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you select “ECO” mode as

drive mode.

For more details, refer to “Drive

Mode Integrated Control System”

in chapter 6.

SPORT Mode Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you select “SPORT” mode

as drive mode.

For more details, refer to “Drive

Mode Integrated Control System”

in chapter 6.

4-25

Cluster display messages

Key not in vehicle

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the smart key is not in the vehicle

when you open or close door in the

ACC position or ON position. The

warning sound is heard when you

close door without a smart key in ve-

hicle.

When attempting to start the vehicle

always have the smart key with you.

Key not detected

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the smart key is not detected when

you press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton.

Press START button with key

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

you press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton while the warning message “Key

not detected” is displayed.

At this time, the immobilizer indicator

light blinks.

Low Key Battery

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the battery of the smart key is dis-

charged while changing the Engine

Start/Stop button to the OFF position.

Press clutch pedal to start en-

gine (for smart key system and

Manual Transmission)

This warning message is displayed if

the Engine Start/Stop button is in the

ACC position twice by pressing the

button repeatedly without depressing

the clutch pedal.

Depress the clutch pedal to start the

engine.

Press brake pedal to start en-

gine (for smart key system and

Dual Clutch Transmission/Auto-

matic Transmission)

This warning message is displayed if

the Engine Start/Stop button changes

to the ACC position twice by pressing

the button repeatedly without de-

pressing the brake pedal.

You can start the vehicle by depress-

ing the brake pedal.

Press START button again

(for smart key system)

This message is displayed if you

were unable to start the vehicle when

the Engine Start/Stop button was

pressed.

If this occurs, attempt to start the en-

gine by pressing the Engine Start/

Stop button again.

If the warning message appears each

time you press the Engine Start/Stop

button, we recommend that you have

your vehicle inspected by an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer.

4-26

Instrument Cluster

Shift to P or N to start engine

(for smart key system and Dual

Clutch Transmission/Automatic

Transmission)

This warning message is displayed if

you try to start the engine with the

shift lever not in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position.

i Information

You can start the engine with the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) position. But,

for your safety, we recommend that

you start the engine with the shift lever

in the P (Park) position.

Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse (for

smart key system and Dual

Clutch Transmission/Automatic

Transmission)

This warning message is displayed if

the brake switch fuse is disconnect-

ed.

You need to replace the fuse with a

new one. If that is not possible, you

can start the engine by pressing the

Engine Start/Stop button for 10 sec-

onds in the ACC position.

Door, Tailgate open indicator

OSU2I049025

This warning is displayed indicating

which door or tailgate is open.

CAUTION

Before driving the vehicle, you

should confirm that the door/tail-

gate are fully closed. Also, check

there is no door/tailgate open

warning light or message dis-

played on the instrument cluster.

4-27

Sunroof open indicator

(if equipped)

OSU2I049028

This warning is displayed if you turn

off the engine when the sunroof is

open.

Close the sunroof securely when

leaving your vehicle.

Turn on FUSE SWITCH

This warning message is displayed if

the fuse switch located on the fuse

box under the steering wheel is OFF.

You should turn the fuse switch on.

For more details, refer to “Fuses”

in chapter 8.

Lights mode

OSU2I049029

This indicator displays which exterior

light is selected using the lighting

control.

4-28

Instrument Cluster

Wiper mode

OSU2I049031

This indicator displays which wiper

speed is selected using the wiper

control.

Low pressure (if equipped)

ONX4E040019

This warning message is displayed if

the tire pressure is low. The corre-

sponding tire on the vehicle will be il-

luminated.

For more details, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in chapter 7.

4-29

Low washer fluid

This warning message is displayed if

the washer fluid level in the reservoir

is nearly empty.

Have the washer fluid reservoir re-

filled.

Low fuel

This warning message is displayed if

the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.

When this message is displayed, the

low fuel level warning light in the clus-

ter will come on.

It is recommended to look for the

nearest fueling station and refuel as

soon as possible.

Engine has overheated

(if equipped)

This warning message is displayed

when the engine coolant temperature

is above 120°C (248°F). This means

that the engine is overheated and

may be damaged.

If your vehicle is overheated, refer

to “Overheating” in chapter 7.

Diesel filter regeneration re-

quired. See owner’s manual

(if equipped)

• The DPF warning light illuminates

if the exhaust gas captures ex-

haust gases over certain amount,

sulfur in fuel or the engine oil is ac-

cumulated over certain amount in

the LNT or the exhaust gas is ac-

cumulated over certain amount.

• In this case, the warning light illu-

minates and the warning alarm

sounds while showing a warning

message “Self Regeneration” on

the cluster display.

• After the warning message ap-

pears for 10 seconds, it is stored in

inspection message tap.

For more details, refer to “Self

Regeneration Mode” in chapter 8.

Check headlight (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

the headlights are not operating prop-

erly.

In addition, if a specific lamp(turn sig-

nal light etc.) is not operating proper-

ly, the warning message according to

a specific lamp (turn signal light etc.)

is displayed. A corresponding bulb

may need to be replaced.

Make sure to replace the burned out

bulb with a new one of the same watt-

age rating.

4-30

Instrument Cluster

Check turn indicator

(if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

the turn signal lights are not operating

properly. A lamp may need to be re-

placed.

Make sure to replace the burned out

bulb with a new one of the same watt-

age rating.

Check brake light (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

the stop lamps are not operating

properly. A lamp may need to be re-

placed.

Make sure to replace the burned out

bulb with a new one of the same watt-

age rating.

Check daytime running light

(if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

the daytime running lights are not op-

erating properly. A lamp may need to

be replaced.

Make sure to replace the burned out

bulb with a new one of the same watt-

age rating.

Check headlight LED

(if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

there is a problem with the LED head-

light. Have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Low urea (for diesel engine)

(if equipped)

This warning message illuminates if

the urea solution level in the urea

solution tank is nearly empty.

- When the SCR warning light is illu-

minates.

Refill urea solution as soon as possi-

ble.

For more details, refer to "Selec-

tive Catalytic Reduction (SCR) " in

the chapter 9.

Check urea system

(for diesel engine) (if equipped)

This warning message illuminates if

the urea system has a malfunction.

In this case, we recommend that you

have the urea system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "Selec-

tive Catalytic Reduction (SCR) " in

the chapter 9.

4-31

Cluster display control

CLUSTER DISPLAY

The cluster display modes can be changed by using the control buttons.

(1) : MODE button for changing modes

(2) , : MOVE switch for changing items

(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for setting or resetting the selected item

OSU2I049035



Type A



Type B

4-32

Instrument Cluster

Cluster display modes

Trip Computer TBT Driving Assist User Settings Master warning

Up/Down

Fuel Economy Route Guidance Cruise Control Lights

The Master Warn-

ing mode displays

warning messages

related to the vehi-

cle when one or

more systems is not

operating normally.

Door

Accumulated Info Destination Info TPMS Sound

Convenience

Drive Info Service interval

Other features

Digital

Speedometer Language

Reset

Transmission

Temperature

The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

4-33

Trip computer mode

OAC3069038TU

The trip computer mode displays in-

formation related to vehicle driving

parameters including fuel economy,

tripmeter information and vehicle

speed.

For more details, refer to “Trip

Computer” in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT) mode

OSU2I049037

This mode displays the state of the

navigation.

4-34

Instrument Cluster

Driving Assist mode

OAC3069053TU

This mode displays the state of

Cruise Control (CC).

For more details, refer to “Cruise

Control” in chapter 6.

ONX4E040019

Tire Pressure

This mode displays information relat-

ed to Tire Pressure.

For more details, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in chapter 7.

Master warning mode

OBI3040018

This warning light informs the driver

the following situations.

- Lamp malfunction (if equipped)

- Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped)

The Master Warning Light illuminates

if one or more of the above warning

situations occur.

4-35

At this time, a Master Warning icon ( )

will appear beside the User Settings

icon ( ), on the instrument cluster.

If the warning situation is solved, the

master warning light will be turned off

and the Master Warning icon will dis-

appear.

Urea level (Diesel engine)

OTM090070L

This mode displays the approximate

amount of remaining urea solution in-

side the urea solution tank.

Add the urea before the level indi-

cates “E” or “0”.

For more details, refer to “Selec-

tive Catalytic Reduction (SCR)” in

chapter 9.

User settings mode

In this mode, you can change the set-

tings of the instrument cluster, doors,

lamps, etc.

1. Lights

2. Door

3. Sound

4. Convenience

5. Service interval

6. Other features

7. Language

8. Reset

The information provided may dif-

fer depending on which functions

are applicable to your vehicle.

4-36

Instrument Cluster

Shift to P to edit settings

This warning message illuminates if

you try to select an item from the User

Settings mode while driving.

For your safety, change the User Set-

tings after parking the vehicle, apply-

ing the parking brake and pressing

the P (Park) button.

Quick guide (Help)

This mode provides quick guides for

the systems in the User Settings

mode.

Select an item, press and hold the

OK button.

For more details about each sys-

tem, refer to this Owner’s Manual.

i Information

When the infotainment system is ap-

plied, only the User’s Setting mode on

the infotainment system is supported

but the User’s Setting mode on the in-

strument cluster is not supported.

4-37

1. Lights

Items Explanation

Illumination To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination.

One Touch

Turn Signal

• Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.

• 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indicator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times

when the turn signal lever is moved slightly.

For more details, refer to “Lighting” in chapter 5.

Ambient light

brightness

• Off/Level 1/Level 2/Level 3/Level 4

To adjust the brightness of the Ambient Light (cabin mood light set-

ting).

Ambient light-

ing To activate or deactivate the Ambient Light (cabin mood light set-

ting) function.

Headlight Delay • To activate or deactivate the headlights delay function.

For more details, refer to “Lighting” in chapter 5.

2. Door

Items Explanation

Auto lock

• Off : The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.

• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the

vehicle speed exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).

• Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the Auto-

matic Transmission/Dual Clutch Transmission shift lever is

pressed from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral),

or D (Drive) position. (Only when the engine is running.)

Auto unlock

• Off : The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.

• On key out/Vehicle Off : All doors will be automatically unlocked

when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch or the

Engine Start/Stop button is set to the OFF position.

• On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the Auto-

matic Transmission/Dual Clutch Transmission shift lever is

pressed to P (Park) position. (Only when the engine is running.)

Lock/Unlock

sound To activate or deactivate the Lock/Unlock sound function.

4-38

Instrument Cluster

3. Sound

Items Explanation

Volume for

PDW (Parking

Distance Warn-

ing)

• Louder/Softer

To adjust the Parking Distance Warning system volume.

4. Convenience

Items Explanation

Welcome mir-

ror/light

• On door unlock: The outside rearview mirrors are unfolded and

the welcome light turns on automatically when the doors are un-

locked.

• On driver approach: The outside rearview mirrors are unfolded

and the welcome light turns on automatically when the vehicle is

approached with the smart key.

For more details, refer to ‘’Welcome System’’ in chapter 5.

Auto mirror

folding To activate or deactivate the Auto mirror folding mode.

Wireless

charging sys-

tem

To activate or deactivate the wireless charging system in the front

seat.

For more details, refer to “Wireless cellular phone charging

system” in chapter 5.

Wiper/Lights

display

To activate or deactivate the Wiper/ Light mode.

When activated, the cluster display shows the selected Wiper/Light

mode whenever you changed the mode.

Auto rear wiper

(reverse) To activate or deactivate the rear wiper while the vehicle is in re-

verse with the front wiper ON.

Gear position

pop-up

To activate or deactivate the gear position pop-up.

When activated, the gear position will be displayed on the cluster

display.

Icy road warn-

ing To activate or deactivate the Icy road warning.

4-39

5. Service interval

Items Explanation

Enable service

interval To activate or deactivate the service interval function.

Adjust interval If the service interval menu is activated, you may adjust the time

and distance.

i Information

To use the service interval menu, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the service interval is activated and the time and distance is adjusted, mes-

sages are displayed in the following situations each time the vehicle is turned

on.

- Service in

: Displayed to inform the driver the remaining mileage and days to service.

- Service required

: Displayed when the mileage and days to service has been reached or passed.

i Information

If any of the following conditions occur, the mileage and number of days to service

may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

4-40

Instrument Cluster

6. Other features

Items Explanation

Fuel economy

auto reset

• Off: The average fuel economy will not reset automatically when-

ever refueling.

• After vehicle On: When the engine has been OFF for 4 hours or

longer the average fuel economy will reset automatically.

• After refueling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically

after adding 6 liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel or more and after driving

speed exceeds 1 km/h (1 mph).

For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.

Fuel economy

unit To select the fuel economy unit. (km/L, L/100km Or US gallon, UK

gallon)

Temperature

unit To select the temperature unit. (°C,°F)

Tyre pressure

unit To select the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, bar)

7. Language (if equipped)

Items Explanation

Language Choose the language. You can choose the language in infotain-

ment system.

8. Reset

Items Explanation

Reset You can reset the menus in the User Settings Mode. All menus in

the User Settings Mode are reset to factory settings, except lan-

guage and service interval.

4-41

Trip computer

The trip computer is a microcomput-

er-controlled driver information sys-

tem that displays information related

to driving.

i Information

Some driving information stored in the

trip computer (for example Average

Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is

disconnected.

Trip modes

Fuel Economy

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy



Accumulated Info

• Tripmeter

• Average Fuel Economy

• Timer



Drive Info

• Tripmeter

• Average Fuel Economy

• Timer



Digital Speedometer



Auto Stop (if equipped)

4-42

Instrument Cluster



Type A

OSU2I049035



Type B

To change the trip mode, toggle the

“, ” switch on the steering wheel.

Fuel economy

OAC3069039TU

Average Fuel Economy (1)

• The average fuel economy is cal-

culated by the total driving distance

and fuel consumption since the

last average fuel economy reset.

• The average fuel economy can be

reset both manually and automati-

cally.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy

manually, press the [OK] button on

the steering wheel for more than 1

second when the average fuel econo-

my is displayed.

Automatic reset

To automatically reset the average

fuel economy after refueling, select

the “Fuel Econ. Reset” mode in the

User Settings menu on the cluster

display.

- After ignition: The average fuel

economy will reset automatically

whenever it has passed 4 hours af-

ter turning OFF the engine.

- After refueling: The average fuel

economy will reset automatically

when driving speed exceeds 1

km/h, after adding 6 liters (1.6 gal-

lons) of fuel or more.

i Information

The average fuel economy may be in-

accurate, when the vehicle drives

shorter than 300 meters (0.19 miles)

after turning ON the Engine Start/

Stop button.

Instant Fuel Economy (2)

• This mode displays the instant fuel

economy during the last few sec-

onds when the vehicle speed is

more than 10 km/h (6.2 mph).

4-43

Accumulated Info display

OAC3069041TU

This display shows the accumulated

trip distance (1), the average fuel

economy (2), and the total driving

time (3).

The information is accumulated start-

ing from the last reset.

To manually reset the information,

press and hold the OK button when

viewing the Accumulated driving info.

The trip distance, the average fuel

economy, and total driving time will

reset simultaneously.

The accumulated driving information

will continue to be counted while the

engine is still running (for example,

when the vehicle is in traffic or

stopped at a stop light).

i Information

The vehicle must be driven for a mini-

mum of 300 meters (0.19 miles) since

the last ignition key cycle before the

average fuel economy will be recalcu-

lated.

4-44

Instrument Cluster

Drive Info display

OAC3069040TU

This display shows the trip distance

(1), the average fuel economy (2),

and the total driving time (3).

The information is combined for each

ignition cycle. However, when the en-

gine has been OFF for 4 hours or lon-

ger the Drive Info screen will reset.

To manually reset the information,

press and hold the OK button when

viewing the Drive Info. The trip dis-

tance, the average fuel economy,

and total driving time will reset simul-

taneously.

The driving information will continue

to be counted while the engine is still

running (for example, when the vehi-

cle is in traffic or stopped at a stop

light.)

i Information

The vehicle must be driven for a mini-

mum of 300 meters (0.19 miles) since

the last ignition key cycle before the

average fuel economy will be recalcu-

lated.

Digital speedometer

OAC3069042TU

This message shows the speed of

the vehicle (km/h, MPH).

Auto stop (if equipped)

OJX1069044

AUTO STOP display shows the

elapsed time of engine stop by Idle

Stop and Go system.

For more details, refer to “Idle Stop

and Go (ISG)” section in chapter 6.

Accessing your vehicle .......................................................................................5-4

Remote key ......................................................................................................5-4

Remote key precautions .................................................................................5-6

Smart key ......................................................................................................... 5-7

Smart key precautions ................................................................................... 5-11

Immobilizer system .......................................................................................5-13

MT(Manual Transmission) Remote start function ....................................... 5-14

Door lock/unlock sound ................................................................................5-15

Door locks ......................................................................................................... 5-16

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle .......................................... 5-16

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle ............................................. 5-18

Auto door lock/unlock features ....................................................................5-20

Child-protector rear door locks ....................................................................5-20

Theft-alarm system ...........................................................................................5-21

Steering Wheel .................................................................................................. 5-22

Motor Driven Power Steering (MDPS) ......................................................... 5-22

Tilt steering / Telescopic steering ................................................................ 5-23

Horn ................................................................................................................5-23

Mirrors ...............................................................................................................5-24

Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................................5-24

Outside rearview mirror .............................................................................. 5-25

Windows ...........................................................................................................5-28

Power windows .............................................................................................5-28

Panorama sunroof ...........................................................................................5-33

Power sunshade ............................................................................................5-34

Tilt open/close ...............................................................................................5-34

Slide open/close ............................................................................................5-35

Resetting the sunroof ....................................................................................5-36

Sunroof open warning................................................................................... 5-37

Exterior features ...............................................................................................5-38

Hood ..............................................................................................................5-38

Tailgate .......................................................................................................... 5-40

Fuel filler door ................................................................................................5-42

5. Convenience Features

Light ...................................................................................................................5-45

Exterior lights .................................................................................................5-45

Interior lights ................................................................................................. 5-50

Wipers and washers .........................................................................................5-53

Front windshield wipers ..............................................................................5-53

Front windshield washers .............................................................................5-54

Rear window wiper and washer switch .......................................................5-55

Driver assistance system ..................................................................................5-56

Rear View Monitor (RVM) .............................................................................5-56

Rear view while driving ................................................................................. 5-57

Surround view monitor ................................................................................. 5-57

Blind-Spot View Monitor (BVM) ......................................................................5-59

Forward/Reverse Parking Distance Warning (PDW) ..................................... 5-60

Operation of Forward/Reverse Parking Distance Warning ........................ 5-61

Non-operational conditions of Forward/Reverse Parking

Distance Warning .........................................................................................5-63

Forward/Reverse Parking Distance Warning precautions ....................... 5-64

Reverse Parking Distance Warning (PDW) .....................................................5-65

Climate Control System .................................................................................. 5-68

Defroster ....................................................................................................... 5-68

Manual climate control system ................................................................... 5-69

Automatic climate control system ............................................................... 5-78

Windshield defrosting and defogging ........................................................ 5-88

Storage compartment .................................................................................... 5-90

Center console storage ................................................................................ 5-90

Glove box ...................................................................................................... 5-90

Cargo tray ....................................................................................................... 5-91

Cool box ......................................................................................................... 5-91

5. Convenience Features

Interior features ...............................................................................................5-92

Clock ..............................................................................................................5-92

Coat hook .......................................................................................................5-92

Ashtray ...........................................................................................................5-92

Cup holder .....................................................................................................5-93

Sunvisor ......................................................................................................... 5-94

Power outlet .................................................................................................. 5-94

USB charger ...................................................................................................5-95

Wireless cellular phone charging system ................................................... 5-96

Floor mat anchor(s) ..................................................................................... 5-98

Shopping hook ............................................................................................. 5-99

Side curtain .................................................................................................5-100

Exterior features .............................................................................................5-100

Roof rack .....................................................................................................5-100

Infotainment system .......................................................................................5-101

USB port .......................................................................................................5-101

Antenna .........................................................................................................5-101

Steering wheel audio control .................................................................... 5-102

Audio / Video (AV) ...................................................................................... 5-103

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology hands-free ............................................. 5-104

How vehicle radio works ............................................................................. 5-105

5-4

Convenience Features

ACCESSING YOUR VEHICLE

Remote key (if equipped)

OIB034040

Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,

which you can use to lock or unlock a

door (and tailgate) and even start the

engine.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3. Tailgate Unlock

Locking

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine hood and

tailgate.

2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on

the remote key.

3. The doors will lock. The hazard

warning lights will blink once.

4. Make sure the doors are locked by

checking the position of the door

lock button inside the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not leave the keys in your vehi-

cle with unsupervised children.

Unattended children could place

the key in the ignition switch and

may operate power windows or

other controls, or even make the

vehicle move, which could result

in serious injury or death.

Unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Door Unlock button (2)

on the remote key.

2. The doors will unlock. The hazard

warning lights will blink two times.

i Information

After unlocking the doors, the doors

will lock automatically after 30 sec-

onds unless a door is opened.

Tailgate unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Tailgate Unlock button

(3) on the remote key for more

than one second.

2. The hazard warning lights will blink

two times. Once the tailgate is

opened and then closed, the tail-

gate will lock automatically.

i Information

• After unlocking the tailgate, the tail-

gate will lock automatically.

• The word “HOLD” is written on the

button to inform you that you must

press and hold the button for more

than one second.

5-5

Start-up

For detailed information refer to “Key

Ignition Switch” in chapter 6.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the remote

key:

• Keep the remote key away from

water or any liquid and fire. If the

inside of the remote key gets

damp (due to drinks or mois-

ture), or is heated, internal cir-

cuit may malfunction, excluding

the car from the warranty.

• Avoid dropping or throwing the

remote key.

• Protect the remote key from ex-

treme temperatures.

Mechanical key

OIB044178

If the remote key does not operate

normally, you can lock or unlock the

door by using the mechanical key.

To unfold the key, press the release

button then the key will unfold auto-

matically.

To fold the key, fold the key manually

while pressing the release button.

NOTICE

Do not fold the key without press-

ing the release button. This may

damage the key.

5-6

Convenience Features

Remote key precautions

The remote key will not work if any of

the following occur:

• The key is in the ignition switch.

• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).

• The remote key battery is weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

• The remote key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station

or an airport which can interfere

with normal operation of the re-

mote key.

When the remote key does not work

correctly, open and close the door

with the mechanical key. If you have

a problem with the remote key, it is

recommended that you contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the remote key is in close proximity

to your mobile phone, the signal could

be blocked by your mobile phones

normal operational signals. This is

especially important when the phone

is active such as making and receiv-

ing calls, text messaging, and/or

sending/receiving emails. Avoid plac-

ing the remote key and your mobile

phone in the same pants or jacket

pocket and always try to maintain an

adequate distance between the two

devices.

i Information

Changes or modifications not express-

ly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment. If

the keyless entry system is inoperative

due to changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance, it will not be cov-

ered by your manufacturer’s vehicle

warranty.

NOTICE

Keep the remote key away from

electromagnetic materials that

blocks electromagnetic waves to

the key surface.

5-7

Battery replacement

If the remote key is not working prop-

erly, try replacing the battery with a

new one.

OIB044180

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and

gently pry open the cover.

2. Remove the old battery and insert

the new battery. Make sure the

battery position is correct.

3. Reinstall the rear cover of the re-

mote key.

If you suspect your remote key might

have sustained some damage, or you

feel your remote key is not working

correctly, it is recommended that you

contact an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

i Information

An inappropriately dis-

posed battery can be harm-

ful to the environment and

human health. Dispose the

battery according to your

local law(s) and regulation.

Smart key (if equipped)

OIB044179



Type A



Type B

OSU2I041055

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,

which you can use to lock or unlock a

door (and tailgate) and even start the

engine.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3. Tailgate Unlock

4. Remote start (if equipped)

5-8

Convenience Features

Locking

OSU2059001

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine hood and

tailgate.

2. Either press the door handle but-

ton or press the Door Lock button

(1) on the smart key.

3. The hazard warning lights will

blink. Also, the outside rearview

mirror will fold, if the outside rear-

view mirror folding switch is in the

AUTO position (if equipped).

4. Make sure the doors are locked by

checking the position of the door

lock button inside the vehicle.

i Information

The door handle button will only oper-

ate when the smart key is within 0.7~1

m (28~40 in.) from the outside door

handle.

Even though you press the outside

door handle button, the doors will not

lock and the chime will sound for

three seconds if any of the following

occur:

• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.

• The Engine Start/Stop button is in

ACC or ON position.

• Any door except the tailgate is

open.

WARNING

Do not leave the Smart Key in your

vehicle with unsupervised chil-

dren. Unattended children could

press the Engine Start/Stop button

and may operate power windows

or other controls, or even make the

vehicle move, which could result

in serious injury or death.

5-9

Unlocking

OSU2059001

To unlock:

1. Carry the Smart Key.

2. Either press the door handle but-

ton or press the Door Unlock but-

ton (2) on the smart key.

3. The doors will unlock. The hazard

warning lights will blink two times.

Also, the outside rearview mirror

will unfold, if the outside rearview

mirror folding switch is in the AUTO

position (if equipped).

i Information

• The door handle button will only

operate when the smart key is with-

in 1 m (40 in.) from the outside door

handle. Other people can also open

the doors without the smart key in

possession.

• After unlocking the doors, the doors

will lock automatically after 30 sec-

onds unless a door is opened.

Tailgate unlocking

To unlock:

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Press the Tailgate Unlock button

(3) on the smart key for more than

one second.

3. The hazard warning lights will blink

two times.

i Information

• The Tailgate Unlock button (3) will

only unlock the tailgate. It will not

release the latch and open the tail-

gate automatically. If the Tailgate

Unlock button is used, someone

must still press the tailgate handle

button to open the tailgate.

• After unlocking the tailgate, the tail-

gate will lock automatically after 30

seconds unless the tailgate is opened.

5-10

Convenience Features

Remote start (4) (if equipped)

You can start the engine and turn on

the climate system by pressing the

remote start button (4) outside the

vehicle.

To start and stop engine remotely:

1. Press the door lock button (1), and

then the hazard warning lights

blink once to alert you.

2. Press the remote start button (4)

for more than 2 seconds to start

engine within 4 seconds after

pressing the door lock button (1).

3. While remote starting, the hazard

warning lights blink. If you want to

stop the engine, press the remote

start button (4) again.

Start-up

You can start the engine without in-

serting the key. For detailed informa-

tion refer to the Engine Start/Stop

button in chapter 6.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the smart

key:

• Keep the smart key away from

water or any liquid and fire. If the

inside of the smart key gets

damp (due to drinks or mois-

ture), or is heated, internal cir-

cuit may malfunction, excluding

the car from the warranty.

• Avoid dropping or throwing the

smart key.

• Protect the smart key from ex-

treme temperatures.

NOTICE

Always have the smart key with

you when leaving the vehicle. If the

smart key is left near the vehicle,

the vehicle battery may be dis-

charged.

5-11

Mechanical key

If the Smart Key does not operate

normally, you can lock or unlock the

door by using the mechanical key.

OIB044175

Press and hold the release button (1)

and remove the mechanical key (2).

Insert the mechanical key into the key

hole on the door.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put

the key into the hole and push it until

a click sound is heard.

Loss of a smart key

A maximum of two smart keys can be

registered to a single vehicle. If you

happen to lose your smart key, it is

recommended that you should imme-

diately take the vehicle and remain-

ing key to your authorized HYUNDAI

dealer or tow the vehicle, if neces-

sary.

Smart key precautions

The smart key will not work if any of

the following occur:

The smart key may not work if any of

the following occur:

• The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station,

military area, police station, gov-

ernment offices, broadcasting sta-

tions, transmission towers, port or

an airport which can interfere with

normal operation of the transmit-

ter.• The smart key is near a mo-

bile two way radio system or a mo-

bile phone.

• The smart key is close to a metal

product or coins.• Another vehi-

cle’s smart key is being operated

close to your vehicle.

In the following situations, the fre-

quency band from the smart key may

be mixed with a different frequency,

which may cause smart key malfunc-

tion (engine operation, door lock

function, etc.) or the working distance

of smart key may change:

• The smart key is placed near the

electronic systems (woofer, mobile

phone, portable wired/wireless

charger, electric heating device,

electronic power bank, e-ciga-

rettes, etc.).

• When you connect an external de-

vice to the multi-purpose socket or

USB port and place it near the

smart key, the smart key may not

be recognized/work in some areas

of the vehicle. In this case, try mov-

ing the smart key to another loca-

tion to start the engine or press the

start button directly with the smart

key to start the engine.

5-12

Convenience Features

When the smart key does not work

correctly, open and close the door

with the mechanical key. If you have

a problem with the smart key, it is rec-

ommended that you contact an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the smart key is in close proximity

to your mobile phone, the signal could

be blocked by your mobile phones

normal operational signals. This is

especially important when the phone

is active such as making and receiv-

ing calls, text messaging, and/or

sending/receiving emails. Avoid plac-

ing the smart key and your mobile

phone in the same pants or jacket

pocket and always try to maintain an

adequate distance between the two

devices.

i Information

Changes or modifications not express-

ly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment. If

the keyless entry system is inoperative

due to changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance, it will not be cov-

ered by your manufacturer’s vehicle

warranty.

NOTICE

Keep the smart key away from

electromagnetic materials that

blocks electromagnetic waves to

the key surface.

Battery replacement

OLF044008

If the Smart Key is not working prop-

erly, try replacing the battery with a

new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Pry open the rear cover of the

smart key.

2. Remove the old battery and insert

the new battery. Make sure the

battery position is correct.

3. Reinstall the rear cover of the

smart key.

If you suspect your smart key might

have sustained some damage, or you

feel your smart key is not working

correctly, it is recommended that you

contact an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

i Information

An inappropriately dis-

posed battery can be harm-

ful to the environment and

human health. Dispose the

battery according to your

local law(s) and regulation.

5-13

If the system repeatedly does not rec-

ognize the coding of the key, it is rec-

ommended that you contact your

HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or

add other devices to it. Electrical

problems could result that may make

your vehicle inoperable.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your

vehicle, do not leave spare keys

anywhere in your vehicle. Your

immobilizer password is a custom-

er unique password and should be

kept confidential.

NOTICE

The transponder in your key is an

important part of the immobiliz-

er system. It is designed to give

years of trouble-free service, how-

ever you should avoid exposure

to moisture, static electricity and

rough handling. Immobilizer sys-

tem malfunction could occur.

Immobilizer system

The immobilizer system protects your

vehicle from theft. If an improperly

coded key (or other device) is used,

the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, the immobilizer sys-

tem indicator should come on briefly,

then go off. If the indicator starts to

blink, the system does not recognize

the coding of the key.

Place the ignition switch to the LOCK/

OFF position, then place the ignition

switch to the ON position again.

The system may not recognize your

key’s coding if another immobilizer

key or other metal object (for exam-

ple, key chain) is near the key. The

engine may not start because the

metal may interrupt the transponder

signal from transmitting normally.

Disclaimer:

The system is designed in such a way

that it makes vehicle theft difficult if

its circuit and battery connection is

uninterrupted.

5-14

Convenience Features

MT(Manual Transmission)

Remote start function

(if equipped)

Remote Engine Start allows you to

start your vehicle engine remotely

from your convenient place by Mobile

(Blue Link Application).

The following conditions must be met

for a vehicle to start remotely:

OSU2I069016

• All the vehicle doors including tail-

gate and hood must be closed and

Locked; EPB should be in applied

(ON) state.

OSU2I060061

• Gear shift lever must be in ‘N’ posi-

tion.

OSU2I050077

“Parking on flat surface”

• Vehicle should be parked on a flat

surface.

• Smart Key (FOB) should not be

placed inside the vehicle.

5-15

Remote Engine Start will not

operate:

1. If gear position is other than ‘N’

2. If EPB state is in release(OFF)

state

3. If vehicle is parked on a hill or an

inclination road(not on flat area)

4. If vehicle battery is low.

CAUTION

For remote start operation in

Manual Transmission, vehicle

must be parked on a flat surface.

Door lock/unlock sound

When a user steps out of the car,

all doors are closed and then the

user tries to lock or unlock the car

with the remote key or smart key,

sound occurs along with flashing.

• Door Lock beep sound : 1time

• Door Unlock beep sound : 2times

Lock/Unlock Sound Function

Disable / Enable:

The user can disable or enable the

lock/unlock sound using the remote

key or smart key.

• Default condition : Sound is

Enabled (ON)

- Sound Disable : User must press

both lock and unlock buttons in

the remote key or smart key to-

gether for at least 4seconds to de-

activate the sound (from “ON o

OFF”).

- Sound Enable : User must press

both lock and unlock buttons in

the remote key or smart key to-

gether for at least 4seconds to

activate Sound (from “ OFF o

ON”).

• For a successful Activation/De-

activation of Sound, Hazard warn-

ing lights will blink 4 times.

5-16

Convenience Features

DOOR LOCKS

Operating door locks from out-

side the vehicle

Mechanical key

OSU2059002

Turn the key toward the rear of the

vehicle to unlock and toward the front

of the vehicle to lock.

If you lock/unlock the driver’s door

with a key, all vehicle doors will lock/

unlock automatically. (If equipped

with the central door lock system)

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the door

by hand. Make sure that doors are

closed securely.

Remote key

OQXI049004

To lock the doors, press the Door

Lock button (1) on the remote key.

To unlock the doors, press the Door

Unlock button (2) on the remote key.

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the door

by hand. Make sure that doors are

closed securely.

i Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession with

either the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operat-

ing temporarily in order to protect

the circuit and prevent damage to

system components.

5-17

Smart key

OSU2I059001



Type A



Type B

OQXI049005

1. Door lock

2. Door unlock

To lock the doors, press the button on

the outside door handle while carry-

ing the smart key with you or press

the door lock button on the smart key.

To unlock the doors, press the button

on the outside door handle while car-

rying the smart key with you or press

the door unlock button on the smart

key.

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the door

by hand. Make sure that doors are

closed securely.

i Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession with

either the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operat-

ing temporarily in order to protect

the circuit and prevent damage to

system components.

5-18

Convenience Features

Operating door locks from

inside the vehicle

With the door lock button

OSU2I059002

• To unlock a door, push the door

lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-

tion.

• To lock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the “Lock” position.

•To open a door, pull the door han-

dle (2) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the driv-

er’s door is pulled when the door

lock button is in the lock position,

the button is unlocked and door

opens.

• Front doors cannot be locked if the

key is in the ignition switch and any

front door is open.

• Doors cannot be locked if the smart

key is in the vehicle and any door

is open.

i Information

If a power door lock ever fails to func-

tion while you are in the vehicle try one

or more of the following techniques to

exit:

Operate the door unlock feature re-

peatedly (both electronic and manual)

while simultaneously pulling on the

door handle.

Operate the other door locks and han-

dles, front and rear.

Lower a front window and use the me-

chanical key to unlock the door from

outside.

5-19

With the central door lock/un-

lock switch

OSU2I059003

When pressing the ( ) portion (1) of

the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch

and any door is opened, the doors

will not lock even though the lock

button (1) of the central door lock

switch is pressed.

• If the smart key is in the vehicle

and any door is opened, the doors

will not lock even though the lock

button (1) of the central door lock

switch is pressed.

When pressing the ( ) portion (2) of

the switch, all vehicle doors will un-

lock.

WARNING

• The doors should always be ful-

ly closed and locked while the

vehicle is in motion. If the doors

are unlocked, the risk of being

thrown from the vehicle in a

crash is increased.

• Do not pull the inner door han-

dle of the driver’s or passen-

ger’s door while the vehicle is

moving.

WARNING

Do not leave the elderly, children or

animals unattended in your vehicle.

An enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death or se-

rious injury to the elderly, unattend-

ed children or animals who cannot

escape from the vehicle. Children

might operate features of the vehi-

cle that could injure them, or they

could encounter other harm, possi-

bly from someone gaining entry to

the vehicle.

WARNING

Always secure your vehicle

Leaving your vehicle unlocked in-

creases the potential risk to you or

others from someone hiding in

your vehicle.

To secure your vehicle, while de-

pressing the brake, move the shift

lever to the P (Park, for Dual Clutch

Transmission/Automatic

Transmission vehicle) position or

first gear or R (Reverse, for manual

transmission), engage the parking

brake, and place the ignition switch

in the LOCK/OFF position, close

all windows, lock all doors, and al-

ways take the key with you.

5-20

Convenience Features

WARNING

Opening a door when something is

approaching may cause damage

or injury. Be careful when opening

doors and watch for vehicles, mo-

torcycles, bicycles or pedestrians

approaching the vehicle in the

path of the door.

WARNING

If you stay in the vehicle for a long

time while the weather is very hot

or cold, there are risks of injuries

or danger to life. Do not lock the

vehicle from the outside when

someone is in the vehicle.

Auto door lock/unlock features

(if equipped)

Impact sensing door unlock sys-

tem

All doors will be automatically un-

locked when an impact causes the air

bags to deploy.

Speed sensing door lock system

All doors will be automatically locked

when vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h

(9 mph).

Child-protector rear door locks

OSU2059005

The child safety lock is provided to

help prevent children seated in the

rear from accidentally opening the

rear doors. The rear door safety locks

should be used whenever children

are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock is located on the

edge of each rear door. When the

child safety lock is in the lock position

(), the rear door will not open if the

inner door handle is pulled.

To lock the child safety lock, insert a

key (or screwdriver) into the hole (1)

and turn it to the lock ( ) position.

To allow a rear door to be opened

from inside the vehicle, unlock the

child safety lock.

WARNING

If children accidently open the rear

doors while the vehicle is in mo-

tion, they could fall out of the vehi-

cle. The rear door safety locks

should always be used whenever

children are in the vehicle.

5-21

This system helps to protect your ve-

hicle and valuables. The horn will

sound and the hazard warning lights

will blink continuously if any of the fol-

lowing occurs:

- A door is opened without using the

remote key or smart key.

- The tailgate is opened without us-

ing the remote key or smart key.

- The engine hood is opened.

The alarm continues for 30 seconds,

then the system resets. To turn off

the alarm, unlock the doors with the

remote key or smart key.

The Theft Alarm System automatical-

ly sets 30 seconds after you lock the

doors and the tailgate. For the sys-

tem to activate, you must lock the

doors and the tailgate from outside

the vehicle with the remote key or

smart key or by pressing the button

on the outside of the door handles

with the smart key in your posses-

sion.

The hazard warning lights will blink

and the chime will sound once to indi-

cate the system is armed.

Once the security system is set,

opening any door, the tailgate, or the

hood without using the remote key or

smart key will cause the alarm to acti-

vate.

The Theft Alarm System will not set if

the hood, the tailgate, or any door is

not fully closed. If the system will not

set, check the hood, the tailgate, or

the doors are fully closed.

Do not attempt to alter this system or

add other devices to it.

If the vehicle is locked by using a me-

chanical key, the security system

doesn’t operate.

i Information

• Do not lock the doors until all pas-

sengers have left the vehicle. If the

remaining passenger leaves the ve-

hicle when the system is armed, the

alarm will be activated.

• If the vehicle is not disarmed with

the remote key or smart key, open

the doors by using the mechanical

key and place the ignition switch in

the ON position (for remote key) or

start the engine (for smart key) and

wait for 30 seconds.

• When the system is disarmed but a

door or tailgate is not opened within

30 seconds, the system will be re-

armed.

7+()7ǘ$/$506<67(0ǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

Disclaimer:

The system is designed in such a way

that it makes vehicle theft difficult if

its circuit and battery connection is

uninterrupted.

5-22

Convenience Features

Motor Driven Power Steering

(MDPS)

The system assists you with steering

the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the

power steering system becomes in-

operative, the vehicle may still be

steered, but it will require increased

steering effort.

Also, the steering effort becomes

lighter as the vehicle’s speed increas-

es and becomes heavier as the vehi-

cle’s speed decreases for better con-

trol of the steering wheel.

Should you notice any change in the

effort required to steer during normal

vehicle operation, we recommend

that the system be checked by an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

If the Motor Driven Power Steering

System does not operate normally,

the warning light ( ) will illumi-

nate on the instrument cluster. The

steering wheel may become diffi-

cult to control or operate. Take

your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-

tem checked as soon as possible.

i Information

The following symptoms may occur

during normal vehicle operation:

• The steering effort may be high im-

mediately after placing the ignition

switch in the ON position.

This happens as the system per-

forms the MDPS system diagnos-

tics. When the diagnostics is com-

pleted, the steering wheel will return

to its normal condition.

• When the battery voltage is low, you

might have to put more steering ef-

fort. However, it is a temporary con-

dition so that it will return to nor-

mal condition after charging the

battery.

• A click noise may be heard from the

MDPS relay after the ignition switch

is placed to the ON or LOCK/OFF

position.

• Motor noise may be heard when the

vehicle is at stop or at a low driving

speed.

• When you operate the steering

wheel in low temperature, abnor-

mal noise may occur. If temperature

rises, the noise will disappear. This

is a normal condition.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel

while driving. You may lose steer-

ing control and cause severe per-

sonal injury, death or accidents.

STEERING WHEEL

5-23

Tilt steering / Telescopic steer-

ing

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel

while driving. You may lose steer-

ing control and cause severe per-

sonal injury, death or accidents.

i Information

After adjustment, sometimes the

lock-release lever may not lock the

steering wheel.

It is not a malfunction. This occurs

when two gears are not engaged cor-

rectly. In this case, adjust the steering

wheel again and then lock the steering

wheel.

OSU2I059066

To change the steering wheel angle

and height:

1. Pull down the lock-release lever

(1).

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the

desired angle (2) and height (3, if

equipped). Move the steering

wheel, so it points toward your

chest, not toward your face. Make

sure you can see the instrument

panel warning lights and gauges.

3. Pull up the lock-release lever to

lock the steering wheel in place.

Push the steering wheel both up and

down to be certain it is locked in posi-

tion.

CAUTION

While adjusting the steering wheel

height, please do not push or pull

it hard since the fixture can be

damaged.

Horn

OSU2I059004

To sound the horn, press the area in-

dicated by the horn symbol on your

steering wheel (see illustration). The

horn will operate only when this area

is pressed.

NOTICE

Do not strike the horn severely to

operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do

not press on the horn with a

sharp-pointed object.

5-24

Convenience Features

Inside rearview mirror

Before you start driving, adjust the

rearview mirror to the center on the

view through the rear window.

WARNING

Make sure your line of sight is not

obstructed. Do not place objects in

the rear seat, cargo area, or behind

the rear headrests which could in-

terfere with your vision through

the rear window.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury during

an accident or deployment of the

air bag, do not modify the rearview

mirror and do not install a wide

mirror.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the mirror while

driving. This may cause loss of ve-

hicle control resulting in an acci-

dent.

NOTICE

When cleaning the mirror, use a

paper towel or similar material

dampened with glass cleaner. Do

not spray glass cleaner directly on

the mirror as that may cause the

liquid cleaner to enter the mirror

housing.

Day/night rearview mirror

(if equipped)

OSU2I059006

[A] : Day, [B] :Night

Make this adjustment before you start

driving and while the day/night lever

is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to

reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicles behind you during night

driving.

Remember that you lose some rear-

view clarity in the night position.

0,55256

5-25

Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM)

(if equipped)

OSU2I059008

OSU2I059009

The electric rearview mirror automat-

ically controls the glare from the

headlight of the vehicle behind you in

nighttime or low light driving condi-

tions.

When the engine is running, the glare

is automatically controlled by the sen-

sor mounted in the rearview mirror.

The sensor detects the light level

around the vehicle, and automatically

adjusts to control the headlight glare

from vehicles behind you.

Whenever the shift lever is placed in

R (Reverse), the mirror will automati-

cally go to the brightest setting in or-

der to improve the drivers view be-

hind the vehicle.

Outside rearview mirror

OSU2I059010

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before

driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both

left-hand and right-hand outside rear-

view mirrors. The mirrors can be ad-

justed remotely with the remote

switch. The mirror heads can be fold-

ed to prevent damage during an auto-

matic car wash or when passing

through a narrow street.

The left and right outside rearview

mirrors are convex. Objects seen in

the mirror are closer than they ap-

pear.

Use your interior rearview mirror or

direct observation to determine the

actual distance of following vehicles

when changing lanes.

WARNING

Rearview mirrors

• Both right and left outside rear

view mirror are convex.

Objects seen in the mirror are

closer than they appear.

• Use your interior rearview mir-

ror or turn your head and look to

determine the actual distance of

following vehicles when chang-

ing lanes.

5-26

Convenience Features

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside

rearview mirrors while the vehicle

is moving. This could result in loss

of control, and an accident which

could cause death, serious injury

or property damage.

NOTICE

• Do not scrape ice off the mirror

face; this may damage the sur-

face of the glass.

• If the mirror is jammed with ice,

do not adjust the mirror by force.

Use an approved de-icer (not ra-

diator antifreeze) spray, or a

sponge or soft cloth with very

warm water, or move the vehicle

to a warm place and allow the

ice to melt.

Adjusting the outside rearview

mirror

OIB034041

Manual type (if equipped)

To adjust an outside mirror, move the

control lever.

OSU2I059011

Electric type (if equipped)

1. Move the lever (1) either to the L

(left side) or R (right side) to select

the rearview mirror you would like

to adjust.

2. Use the mirror adjustment control

(2) to position the selected mirror

up, down, left or right.

3. After adjustment, move the lever

(1) to the middle to prevent inad-

vertent adjustment.

5-27

NOTICE

• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-

ing angles, but the motor contin-

ues to operate while the switch

is pressed. Do not press the

switch longer than necessary,

the motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the out-

side rearview mirror by hand or

the motor may be damaged.

Folding the outside rearview

mirror

OSU2I059070

Manual type (if equipped)

To fold the outside rearview mirror,

grasp the housing of the mirror and

then fold it toward the rear of the ve-

hicle.

OSU2I059012

Electric type (if equipped)

To fold the outside rearview mirror,

press the button.

To unfold outside rearview mirror,

press the button again.

If the button is pressed, the mirror will

fold or unfold automatically.

NOTICE

The electric type outside rearview

mirror operates even though the

ignition switch is in the ACC posi-

tion. However, to prevent unneces-

sary battery discharge, do not ad-

just the mirrors longer than

necessary while the engine is not

running.

NOTICE

Do not fold the electric type out-

side rearview mirror by hand. It

could cause motor failure.

5-28

Convenience Features

Power windows (if equipped)

OQXI049012

OSU2I059013

(1) Driver’s door power window switch*

(2) Front passenger’s door power window switch*

(3) Rear door power window switch (Right)*

(4) Rear door power window switch (Left)*

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window*

(7) Power window lock switch*

* : if equipped

WINDOWS

5-29

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to be able to raise or lower

the windows. Each door has a Power

Window switch to control that door’s

window. The driver has a Power

Window Lock switch which can block

the operation of rear windows. The

power windows will operate for ap-

proximately 10 minutes after the igni-

tion switch is placed in the ACC or

LOCK/OFF position. However, if the

front doors are opened, the Power

Windows cannot be operated even

within the 10 minutes period.

i Information

• In cold and wet climates, power

windows may not work properly

due to freezing conditions.

• While driving with the rear win-

dows down, your vehicle may

demonstrate a wind buffeting or

pulsation noise. This noise is normal

and can be reduced or eliminated by

taking the following actions. If the

noise occurs with one or both of the

rear windows down, partially lower

both front windows approximately

2.5 cm (1 inch).

Window opening and closing

OIK047016

To open:

Press the window switch down to the

first detent position (5). Release the

switch when you want the window to

stop.

To close:

Pull the window switch up to the first

detent position (5). Release the win-

dow switch when you want the win-

dow to stop.

Auto up/down window

(if equipped) (Driver’s window)

Pressing or pulling up the power win-

dow switch momentarily to the sec-

ond detent position (6) completely

lowers or lifts the window even when

the switch is released. To stop the

window at the desired position while

the window is in operation, pull up or

press down and release the switch.

5-30

Convenience Features

To reset the power windows

If the power windows do not operate

normally, the automatic power win-

dow system must be reset as follows:

1. Place the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Close the window and continue

pulling up on the power window

switch for at least 1 second.

If the power windows do not operate

properly after resetting, it is recom-

mended that the system be checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

The automatic reverse feature

doesn’t activate while resetting the

power window system. Make sure

body parts or other objects are

safely out of the way before clos-

ing the windows to avoid injuries

or vehicle damage.

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

OSU2059017

If a window senses any obstacle

while it is closing automatically, it will

stop and lower approximately 30 cm

(12 inches) to allow the object to be

cleared.

If the window detects the resistance

while the power window switch is

pulled up continuously, the window

will stop upward movement then low-

er approximately 2.5 cm (1 inch).

If the power window switch is pulled

up continuously again within 5 sec-

onds after the window is lowered by

the automatic window reverse fea-

ture, the automatic window reverse

will not operate.

i Information

The automatic reverse feature is only

active when the “Auto Up” feature is

used by fully pulling up the switch to

the second detent.

5-31

WARNING

Make sure body parts or other ob-

jects are safely out of the way be-

fore closing the windows to avoid

injuries or vehicle damage.

Objects less than 4 mm (0.16 inch)

in diameter caught between the

window glass and the upper win-

dow channel may not be detected

by the automatic reverse window

and the window will not stop and

reverse direction.

NOTICE

Do not install any accessories on

the windows. The automatic re-

verse feature may not operate.

Power window lock switch

(if equipped)

OSU2I059015

The driver can disable the power win-

dow switches on the rear passengers’

doors by pressing the power window

lock switch.

When the power window lock switch

is pressed:

• The driver’s master control can op-

erate all the power windows.

• The front passenger’s control can

operate the front passenger’s pow-

er window.

• The rear passenger’s control can-

not operate the rear passengers’

power window.

NOTICE

• To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do

not open or close two windows

or more at the same time. This

will also ensure the longevity of

the fuse.

• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver’s door and

the individual door window

switch in opposite directions at

the same time. If this is done,

the window will stop and cannot

be opened or closed.

5-32

Convenience Features

WARNING

Windows

• NEVER leave the keys in your

vehicle with unsupervised chil-

dren, when the engine is run-

ning.

• NEVER leave any child unat-

tended in the vehicle. Even very

young children may inadvertent-

ly cause the vehicle to move, en-

tangle themselves in the win-

dows, or otherwise injure

themselves or others.

• Always double check to make

sure all arms, hands, head and

other obstructions are safely

out of the way before closing a

window.

• Do not allow children to play

with the power windows. Keep

the driver’s door power window

lock switch in the LOCK posi-

tion (pressed). Serious injury

can result from unintentional

window operation by the child.

• Do not extend your head, arms

or body outside the win

5-33

If your vehicle is equipped with a sun-

roof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof

with the sunroof switch located on the

overhead console.

OSU2I052016

The sunroof can only be operated

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

The sunroof can be operated for

approximately 10 minutes after the

ignition switch is in the ACC or LOCK

position. However, if the front door is

open, the sunroof cannot be operated

even within the 10 minute period.

WARNING

• Adjust the sunroof or sunshade

when your vehicle stops. This

could result in loss of control

and an accident that may cause

injury, or property damage.

• Do not leave the engine running

and the key in your vehicle with

unsupervised children.

Unattended children could oper-

ate the sunroof, which could re-

sult in serious injury.

• Do not sit on the top of the vehi-

cle. It may cause injury or vehi-

cle damage.

NOTICE

Do not operate the sunroof when

roof bars are installed on the vehi-

cle or when there is luggage on the

roof.

3$125$0$681522)ǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

5-34

Convenience Features

Power sunshade

OSU2I052017

Use the power sunshade to block di-

rect sunlight coming through the sun-

roof glass.

- Push the sunroof switch rearward

to the first detent position, the pow-

er sunshade automatically slides

open.

- Push the sunroof switch forward to

the first detent position, the power

sunshade automatically closes.

However, if the sunroof glass is

open, the glass will close first.

To stop the power sunshade at any

point, push the sunroof switch in any

direction.

NOTICE

Do not pull or push the power sun-

shade by hand as such action may

damage the power sunshade or

cause it to malfunction.

i Information

Wrinkles formed on the power sun-

shade are normal due to material char-

acteristic.

Tilt open/close

OSU2I052019

• Push the sunroof switch upward,

the sunroof glass tilts open.

However, if the power sunshade is

closed, the sunshade will open

first.

• Push the sunroof switch upward or

forward when the sunroof glass is

tilt opened, the sunroof glass auto-

matically closes.

To stop the sunroof movement at any

point, push the sunroof switch in any

direction.

5-35

Slide open/close

OSU2I059018

• Push the sunroof switch rearward

to the first detent position, the sun-

roof glass opens. However, if the

power sunshade is closed, the

power sunshade will open first.

Push the sunroof switch forward to

the first detent position, the sun-

roof glass closes. However, if the

sunroof glass is closed, the power

sunshade will close.

• Push the sunroof switch forward or

rearward to the second detent po-

sition, the power sunshade and

sunroof glass operate automatical-

ly (auto slide feature).

To stop the sunroof movement at

any point, push the sunroof switch

in any direction.

Automatic reversal

ODH043039

If the sunroof glass senses any ob-

stacle while it is closing automatical-

ly, it will reverse direction then stop at

a certain position.

The auto reverse function may not

work if an object thin or soft is caught

between the sliding sunroof glass

and sunroof sash.

WARNING

• Make sure heads, hands, arms

or any other body parts or ob-

jects are out of the way before

operating the sunroof. Body

parts or objects may get caught

causing injuries or vehicle dam-

age.

• Never deliberately use your

body parts to test the automatic

reversal function. The sunroof

glass may reverse direction, but

there is a risk of injury.

5-36

Convenience Features

NOTICE

• Do not continue to push the

sunroof switch after the sunroof

is fully opened, closed, or tilted.

Damage to the sunroof motor

could occur.

• Continuous operations such as

slide open/close, tilt open/close,

etc. may cause the motor or

sunroof system to malfunction.

• Regularly remove any accumu-

lated dust on the sunroof rail.

• Dust accumulated between the

sunroof and roof panel can

make noise Open the sunroof

and remove dust regularly using

a clean cloth.

• Do not try to open the sunroof

when the temperature is below

freezing or when the sunroof is

covered with snow or ice. The

sunroof may not work properly

and may break if opened by

force.

• Do not open or drive with the

sunroof glass open immediately

after rain or washing the vehicle.

Water may wet the interior of the

vehicle.

• Do not extend any luggage out-

side the sunroof while driving.

Vehicle damage may occur if the

vehicle suddenly stops.

WARNING

Do not extend your head, arms,

body parts or objects outside the

sunroof while driving. Injuries may

occur if the vehicle suddenly

stops.

Resetting the sunroof

OSU2I052078

In some circumstances resetting the

sunroof operation may need to be

performed. Some instances where

resetting the sunroof may be required

include:

• When the 12-volt battery is either

disconnected or discharged

• When the sunroof fuse is replaced

• If the sunroof one-touch AUTO

OPEN/CLOSE operation is not

functioning properly

Sunroof resetting procedure:

1. It is recommended to perform the

reset procedure with the vehicle

engine running. Start the vehicle in

P (Park).

2. Make sure the power sunshade

and sunroof glass are in the fully

closed position. If the power sun-

shade and sunroof glass are open,

push the switch forward until the

power sunshade and sunroof glass

are fully closed.

3. Release the switch when the pow-

er sunshade and sunroof glass are

fully closed.

4. Push the switch forward until the

power sunshade and sunroof

glass move slightly. Then release

the switch.

5-37

5. Once again push and hold the sun-

roof switch forward until the power

sunshade and sunroof glass slide

open and close. Do not release the

switch until the operation is com-

pleted.

If you release the switch during op-

eration, start the procedure again

from step 2.

i Information

If the sunroof does not reset when the

vehicle battery is disconnected or dis-

charged, or the sunroof fuse is blown,

the sunroof may not operate normally.

Sunroof open warning

OSU2059041

If the driver turns off the engine when

the sunroof is not fully closed, the

warning chime will sound for several

seconds and the sunroof open warn-

ing will appear on the cluster display.

Close the sunroof securely when

leaving your vehicle.

CAUTION

Make sure the sunroof is closed

fully when leaving your vehicle. If

the sunroof is left open, rain or

snow may wet the interior of the

vehicle.

Also, leaving the sunroof open

when the vehicle is unattended

may invite theft.

5-38

Convenience Features

Hood

Opening the hood

OSU2I059021

1. Park the vehicle and set the park-

ing brake.

2. Pull the release lever to unlatch the

hood. The hood should pop open

slightly.

OSU2I059022

3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise

the hood slightly, push the second-

ary hood release lever up (1) in-

side of the hood center and lift the

hood (2).

OSU2I059023

4. Pull out the support rod.

5. Hold the hood opened with the

support rod.

WARNING

The support rod must be inserted

completely into the hole provided

whenever you inspect the engine

compartment. This will prevent the

hood from falling and possibly in-

juring you.

EXTERIOR FEATURES

5-39

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the

following:

• All filler caps in engine compart-

ment must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be re-

moved from the engine compart-

ment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip to

prevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the hood halfway (lifted ap-

proximately 30 cm from the closed

position)and push down to secure-

ly lock in place.

4. Then double check to be sure the

hood is secure.

- If the hood can be raised slightly,

it is not properly locked.

- Open it again and close it with a

little more force.

WARNING

Always double check to be sure

that the hood is firmly latched be-

fore driving away. Check there is

no hood open warning light or

message displayed on the instru-

ment cluster. Driving with the hood

opened may cause a total loss of

visibility, which might result in an

accident.

WARNING

• Before closing the hood, ensure

that all obstructions are removed

from the hood opening. Closing

the hood with an obstruction

present in the hood opening may

result in property damage or se-

vere personal injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or any

other combustible material in

the engine compartment. Doing

so may cause a heat-induced

fire.

• Do not move the vehicle with the

hood raised. The view will be

blocked and the hood could fall

or be damaged.

5-40

Convenience Features

Tailgate

Opening the tailgate

OSU2I051211L

Make sure the vehicle is in P (Park)

and set the parking brake.

Then do one of the following:

1. Unlock all doors with the Door

Unlock button on your remote key

or smart key. Press the tailgate

handle switch and open the tail-

gate.

2. Press and hold the Tailgate Unlock

switch on the remote key or smart

key. Press the tailgate handle

switch and open the tailgate.

Closing the tailgate

OSU2I051210L

Lower the tailgate lid and press down

until it locks. To be sure the tailgate

lid is securely fastened, always check

by trying to pull it up again without

pressing the tailgate handle button.

WARNING

Always keep the tailgate lid com-

pletely closed while the vehicle is

in motion. If it is left open or ajar,

poisonous exhaust gases contain-

ing carbon monoxide (CO) may en-

ter the vehicle and serious illness

or death may result.

i Information

To prevent damage to the tailgate lift

cylinders and the attached hardware,

always close the tailgate before driv-

ing.

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, tailgate

lock and tailgate mechanisms may

not work properly due to freezing

conditions.

5-41

WARNING

OSU2059027

Do not hold the part (gas lifter) that

supports the tailgate. Be aware

that the deformation of the part

may cause vehicle damage and a

risk of injury.

WARNING

• NEVER allow anyone to occupy

the cargo area of the vehicle at

any time. If the tailgate is partial-

ly or totally latched and the per-

son is unable to get out, serious

injury or death could occur due

to lack of ventilation, exhaust

fumes and rapid heat build-up,

or because of exposure to cold

weather conditions. The cargo

area is also a highly dangerous

location in the event of a crash

because it is not a protected oc-

cupant space but is a part of the

vehicle’s crush zone.

• Your vehicle should be kept

locked and keys should be kept

out of the reach of children.

Parents should teach their chil-

dren about the dangers of play-

ing in cargo areas.

Emergency tailgate safety

release

OSU2I051209L

Your vehicle is equipped with the

emergency tailgate safety release le-

ver located on the bottom of the tail-

gate. When someone is inadvertently

locked in the cargo area. The tailgate

can be opened by doing as follows:

1. Insert the key into the hole.

2. Push the release lever to the right

by a key.

3. Push up the tailgate.

WARNING

• For emergencies, be fully aware

of the location of the emergency

tailgate safety release lever in

the vehicle and how to open the

tailgate if you are accidentally

locked in the cargo area.

• No one should be allowed to oc-

cupy the luggage compartment

of the vehicle at any time. The

cargo area is a very dangerous

location in the event of a crash.

• Use the release lever for emer-

gencies only. Use with extreme

caution, especially while the ve-

hicle is in motion.

5-42

Convenience Features

Fuel filler door

Opening the fuel filler door

OSU2I059024

The fuel filler door must be opened

from inside the vehicle by pulling up

the fuel filler door opener.

1. Stop the engine.

2. Pull the fuel filler door opener up.

OSU2I082063



Petrol

OSU2I082062



Diesel

3. Pull the fuel filler door out (1) to ful-

ly open.

4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),

turn it counterclockwise. You may

hear a hissing noise as the pres-

sure inside the tank equalizes.

5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door

(3).

WARNING

• Your diesel vehicle is equipped

with the specially-designed

breakaway valve inside the filler

inlet to prevent accidental fuel

blending with petrol. The fuel in-

let of your diesel vehicle cannot

be fitted with a standard petrol

nozzle. Do not forcefully insert a

standard petrol nozzle into the

filler inlet of your diesel vehicle.

It may damage your vehicle.

• Some gas stations may still use

standard petrol nozzles for die-

sel refueling. If you find that a

diesel nozzle is narrower than

the fuel filler inlet diameter of

your diesel vehicle, we recom-

mend you to find/visit another

gas station, which is equipped

with standard diesel nozzles.

• Fully insert a standard diesel

nozzle into the filler inlet to open

the breakaway valve. If the noz-

zle is not fully inserted into the

filler inlet, it causes diesel fuels

to flow out of the fuel tank.

5-43

i Information

If the fuel filler door does not open be-

cause ice has formed around it, tap

lightly or push on the door to break the

ice and release the door. Do not pry on

the door. If necessary, spray around

the door with an approved de-icer fluid

(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or

move the vehicle to a warm place and

allow the ice to melt.

Closing the fuel filler door

1. To install the fuel tank cap (2), turn

it clockwise until it “clicks” once.

This indicates that the cap is se-

curely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler door (1) and

push it lightly and make sure that it

is securely closed.

WARNING

Petrol is highly flammable and ex-

plosive. Failure to follow these

guidelines may result in SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH:

• Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station.

• Before refueling, note the loca-

tion of the Emergency Petrol

Shut-Off,if available, at the gas

station.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,

you should eliminate the poten-

tial build-up of static electricity

by touching a metal part of the

vehicle, a safe distance away

from the fuel filler neck, nozzle,

or other gas source, with your

bare hand.

• Do not use cellular phones while

refueling. Electric current and/or

electronic interference from cel-

lular phones can potentially ig-

nite fuel vapors and cause a fire.

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refueling.

You can generate a buildup of

static electricity by touching,

rubbing or sliding against any

item or fabric capable of produc-

ing static electricity. Static elec-

tricity discharge can ignite fuel

vapors causing a fire. If you

must re-enter the vehicle, you

should once again eliminate po-

tentially dangerous static elec-

tricity discharge by touching a

metal part of the vehicle, away

from the fuel filler neck, nozzle

or other petrol source, with your

bare hand.

• When using an approved porta-

ble fuel container, be sure to

place the container on the

ground prior to refueling. Static

electricity discharge from the

container can ignite fuel vapors

causing a fire. Once refueling

has begun, contact between

your bare hand and the vehicle

should be maintained until the

filling is complete.

• Use only approved portable

plastic fuel containers designed

to carry and store petrol.

• When refueling, always move

the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition (for Automatic transmis-

sion) or first gear or R (Reverse,

for manual transmission), set

the parking brake, and place the

ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF

position. Sparks produced by

electrical components related to

the engine can ignite fuel vapors

causing a fire.

5-44

Convenience Features

• Do not use matches or a lighter

and do not smoke or leave a lit

cigarette in your vehicle while at

a gas station, especially during

refueling.

• Do not over-fill or top-off your

vehicle tank, which can cause

petrol spillage.

• If a fire breaks out during refuel-

ing, leave the vicinity of the ve-

hicle, and immediately contact

the manager of the gas station

and then contact the local fire

department. Follow any safety

instructions they provide.

• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it

can cover your clothes or skin

and thus subject you to the risk

of fire and burns. Always re-

move the fuel cap carefully and

slowly. If the cap is venting fuel

or if you hear a hissing sound,

wait until the condition stops

before completely removing the

cap.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent

fuel spillage in the event of an

accident.

i Information

• Make sure to refuel your vehicle ac-

cording to the “Fuel Requirements”

suggested in the 1 chapter.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior sur-

faces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel

spilled on painted surfaces may

damage the paint.

NOTICE

If the fuel filler cap requires re-

placement, use only a genuine

HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent

specified for your vehicle. An in-

correct fuel filler cap can result in

a serious malfunction of the fuel

system or emission control sys-

tem.

5-45

Exterior lights

Lighting control

OTL045251R

To operate the lights, turn the knob at

the end of the control lever to one of

the following positions:

(1) OFF

(2) AUTO light (if equipped)

(3) Position light

(4) Headlight

OSU2059049

AUTO light (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO

position, the position light and head-

lights will be turned ON or OFF auto-

matically depending on the amount of

light outside the vehicle.

Even with the AUTO light feature in

operation, it is recommended to man-

ually turn ON the lights when driving

at night or in fog, or when you enter

dark areas, such as tunnels and park-

ing facilities.

NOTICE

• Do not cover or spill anything on

the sensor (1) located on the in-

strument panel.

• Do not clean the sensor using a

window cleaner, the cleanser

may leave a light film which

could interfere with sensor op-

eration.

• If your vehicle has window tint

or other types of metallic coat-

ing on the front windshield, the

AUTO light system may not

work properly.

OTL045252R

Headlight ( )

The headlight, position light, license

plate light and instrument panel lamp

are turned ON.

i Information

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to turn on the headlights.

LIGHT

5-46

Convenience Features

OTL045253R

Position light ( )

The position light, license plate light

and instrument panel lamp are turned

ON.

High beam operation

OTL045255R

To turn on the high beam headlight,

push the lever away from you. The

lever will return to its original position.

The high beam indicator will light

when the headlight high beams are

switched on.

To turn off the high beam headlight,

pull the lever towards you. The low

beams will turn on.

WARNING

Do not use high beam when there

are other vehicles approaching

you. Using high beam could ob-

struct the other driver’s vision.

OTL045254R

To flash the high beam headlights,

pull the lever towards you, then re-

lease the lever. The high beams will

remain ON as long as you hold the

lever towards you.

5-47

Turn signals and lane change

signals

OTL045257R

To signal a turn, push down on the

lever for a right turn or up for a left

turn in position (A). To signal a lane

change, move the turn signal lever

slightly and hold it in position (B). The

lever will return to the OFF position

when released or when the turn is

completed.

If an indicator stays on and does not

flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of

the turn signal bulbs may be burned

out and will require replacement.

One-touch turn signal function

To activate the One Touch Turn

Signal function, push the turn signal

lever up or down to position (B) and

then release it. The lane change sig-

nals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times.

You can activate or deactivate the

One Touch Turn Signal function or

choose the number of blinks (3, 5, or

7) from the User Settings mode in the

cluster display.

For more details, refer to the

“Cluster Display” section in chap-

ter 4.

NOTICE

If the turn signal indicator stays on

and does not flash, or if it flashes

abnormally, a bulb may be burned

out or have a poor electrical con-

nection in the circuit. The bulb may

require replacement.

Front fog light (if equipped)

OTL047258R

Fog lights are used to provide im-

proved visibility when visibility is poor

due to fog, rain or snow, etc. Use the

switch next to the headlight switch to

turn the fog lights ON and OFF.

1. Turn on the position light.

2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front

fog light position.

3. To turn off the front fog light, turn

the light switch to the front fog light

position again or turn off the posi-

tion light.

NOTICE

When in operation, the fog lights

consume large amounts of vehicle

electrical power. Only use the fog

lights when visibility is poor.

5-48

Convenience Features

Battery saver function

(if equipped)

The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-

charged. The system automatically

turns off the Parking (Position) lights

when the driver removes the ignition

key or turns the engine off (for smart

key) and opens the driver-side door.

With this feature, the Parking

(Position) lights will turn off automati-

cally if the driver parks on the side of

road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on

when the ignition key is removed or

the engine is turned off (for smart

key), perform the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the Parking (Position) lights

OFF and ON again using the light

switch on the steering column.

Headlight delay function

(if equipped)

If you place the ignition switch to the

ACC or LOCK/OFF position with the

headlights ON, the headlights (and/or

position lights) remain on for about 5

minutes. However, with the engine off

if the driver’s door is opened and

closed, the headlights (and/or posi-

tion lights) are turned off after 15 sec-

onds.

The headlights (and/or position lights)

can be turned off by pressing the lock

button on the remote key (or smart

key) twice or turning the light switch

to the OFF or AUTO position.

However, if you turn the light switch

to the AUTO position when it is dark

outside, the headlights will not be

turned off.

The headlights can be turned off by

pressing the lock button on the trans-

mitter twice or turning the light switch

to the OFF position.

NOTICE

If the driver exits the vehicle

through another door besides the

driver door, the battery saver func-

tion does not operate and the

headlight delay function does not

turn OFF automatically. This may

cause the battery to discharge. To

avoid battery discharge, turn OFF

the headlights manually from the

headlight switch before exiting the

vehicle.

5-49

Headlight leveling device

(if equipped)

OSU2I059026

To adjust the headlight beam level

according to the number of the pas-

sengers and loading weight in the

luggage area, turn the beam leveling

switch.

The higher the number of the switch

position, the lower the headlight

beam level. Always keep the head-

light beam at the proper leveling posi-

tion, or headlights may dazzle other

road users.

Listed below are the examples of

proper switch settings. For loading

conditions other than those listed be-

low, adjust the switch position so that

the beam level may be the nearest as

the condition obtained according to

the list.

Loading condition Switch position

Driver only 0

Driver +

Front passenger 0

Full passengers

(including driver) 1

Full passengers

(including driver) +

Maximum permissible

Driver + Maximum

permissible loading 3

Daytime running light (DRL)

(if equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

can make it easier for others to see

the front of your vehicle during the

day, especially after dawn and before

sunset.

The DRL system will turn the dedicat-

ed lamp OFF when:

1. The headlights or front fog lights

are in the ON position.

2. The engine is turned off.

5-50

Convenience Features

Interior lights

WARNING

Do not use the interior lights when

driving in the dark. The interior

lights may obscure your view and

cause an accident.

NOTICE

Do not use the interior lights for

extended periods when the engine

is turned off or the battery will dis-

charge.

Front lamps

OSU2I059027



Type A



Type B

OSU2I059028

(1) Front Map Lamp

(2) Front Room Lamp

(3) Front Door Lamp

5-51

Front map lamp

Press the map lamp lens (1) to turn

ON the map lamp. Re-press the map

lamp cover to turn OFF the map lamp.

Front room lamp

• :

(Type A) Press the button to turn

ON the room lamp for the front/rear

seats.

(Type B) Press the button to turn

ON the room lamp for the front/rear

seats. Re-press the button to turn

OFF the room lamp.

• :

(Type A) Press the button to turn

OFF the room lamp for the front/

rear seats.

Front door lamp ( )

The room lamp for the front/rear seats

is automatically turned ON for ap-

proximately 30 seconds, when a door

is opened.

The room lamp for the front/rear seats

is automatically turned ON for ap-

proximately 15 seconds, when the

remote key (smart key) unlocks the

doors. The room lamp fades out,

when the ignition switch is pressed to

the ON position in 15 seconds. The

room lamp remains ON up to 20 min-

utes, when a door is opened with the

ignition switch in the either the ACC

or OFF position.

Rear lamps

OSU2I059030



Room lamp



Personal lamp

OSU2I059031

• :

Press this button to turn the rear

lamps on or off.

NOTICE

Do not leave the lamp switches on

for an extended period of time

when the engine is turned off.

5-52

Convenience Features

Luggage room lamp

(if equipped)

OSU2I051203L

The luggage room lamp comes on

when the tailgate is opened.

NOTICE

The luggage room lamp comes on

as long as the tailgate is open. To

prevent unnecessary charging

system drain, close the tailgate se-

curely after using the luggage roo

m .

Mood lamp (if equipped)

The lamp turns on when ‘Setup o

Vehicle Settings o Lights o Ambient

Light’ is selected from the infotain

ment system.

Puddle lamp (if equipped)

OLF044259

Escort light

When the ignition switch is in the OFF

position and the driver’s door is

opened, the puddle lamp will come

on for 30 seconds. If the driver’s door

is closed within the 30 seconds, the

puddle lamp will turn off after 15 sec-

onds. If the driver’s door is closed

and locked, the puddle lamp will turn

off immediately.

The Puddle Lamp Escort Light will

turn on only the first time the driver’s

door is opened after the engine is

turned off.

5-53

OGS045067



Front



Rear

OGS045070

A : Wiper speed control

• MIST – Single wipe

• OFF – Off

• INT – Intermittent wipe

• LO – Low wiper speed

• HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes

D : Rear wiper/washer control (if

equipped)

• HI – High wiper speed

• LO – Low wiper speed

• OFF – Off

E : Wash with brief wipes

Front windshield wipers

Operates as follows when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

MIST : For a single wiping cycle,

move the lever upward and

release. The wipers will oper-

ate continuously if the lever is

held in this position.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation.

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. To

vary the speed setting, move

the speed control knob (B). The

top most setting will run the wip-

ers most frequently (for more

rain). The bottom setting will run

the wipers the least frequently

(for less rain).

LO : The wiper runs at a lower speed.

HI : The wiper runs at a higher speed.

i Information

If there is heavy accumulation of snow

or ice on the windshield, defrost the

windshield for about 10 minutes, or

until the snow and/or ice is removed

before using the windshield wipers to

ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or

ice before using the wiper and washer,

it may damage the wiper and washer

system.

:,3(56$1':$6+(56

5-54

Convenience Features

Front windshield washers

OSU2I059032

In the OFF position, pull the lever

gently toward you to spray washer

fluid on the windshield and to run the

wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and wip-

er operation will continue until you re-

lease the lever.

If the washer does not work, you may

need to add washer fluid to the wash-

er reservoir.

WARNING

When the outside temperature is

below freezing, ALWAYS warm the

windshield using the defroster to

prevent the washer fluid from

freezing on the windshield and ob-

scuring your vision which could

result in an accident and serious

injury or death.

NOTICE

• To prevent possible damage to

the washer pump, do not oper-

ate the washer when the fluid

reservoir is empty.

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do not

operate the wipers when the

windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

arms and other components, do

not attempt to move the wipers

manually.

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers and washer system,

use anti-freezing washer fluids

in the winter season or cold

weather.

5-55

Rear window wiper and washer

switch (if equipped)

OSU2I059033

The rear window wiper and washer

switch is located at the end of the

wiper and washer switch lever. Turn

the switch to the desired position to

operate the rear wiper and washer.

HI - High wiper speed

LO - Low wiper speed

OFF - Wiper is not in operation

OSU2I059034

Push the lever away from you to spray

rear washer fluid and to run the rear

wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and

wiper operation will continue until you

release the lever.

Auto rear wiper

The rear wiper will operate while the

vehicle is in reverse with the front

wipers ON by selecting the function

on the cluster display.

Go to ‘User Settings o Convenience

o Auto rear wiper (reverse)

5-56

Convenience Features

Rear View Monitor (RVM)

(if equipped)

OSU2I051213L

Rear View Monitor system will acti-

vate when the ignition switch is in the

ON position and the shift lever is in

the R (Reverse) position.

This is a supplemental system that

shows behind the vehicle through the

audio or infotainment system screen

while backing-up.

WARNING

The Rear View Monitor is not a

safety device. It only serves to as-

sist the driver in identifying ob-

jects directly behind the middle of

the vehicle. The camera does NOT

cover the complete area behind

the vehicle.

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the rear

camera display when back-

ing-up.

• ALWAYS look around your

vehicle to make sure there are

no objects or obstacles before

moving the vehicle in any direc-

tion to prevent a collision.

• Always pay close attention when

the vehicle is driven close to ob-

jects, particularly pedestrians,

and especially children.

• During winter the camera image

may be foggy due to the exhaust

gas if the vehicle is stopped for

a long time or parked in an in-

door parking lot and when you

park or stop your vehicle on

hills.

• Due to the location of the cam-

era, the license plate may be

partially shown on the bottom of

the rear view screen.

NOTICE

• Do not spray the camera or its

surrounding area directly with a

high pressure washer. Shock

applied from high pressure wa-

ter may cause the device to not

operate normally.

• Do not use any cleanser con-

taining acid or alkaline deter-

gents when cleaning the lens.

Use only a mild soap or neutral

detergent, and rinse thoroughly

with water.

i Information

Always keep the camera lens clean.

The camera may not work normally if

the lens is covered with dirt, water or

snow.

'5,9(5$66,67$1&(6<67(0

5-57

Rear view while driving

(if equipped)

OSU2I040056

The driver is able to check the rear

view on the screen while driving, it is

to assist with safe driving.

Operating conditions

Press the Parking/View button while

the gear is in D (Drive) or N (Neutral),

the driving rear view will appear on

the screen.

Off conditions

• Press the Parking/View button

again, the driving rear view will turn

off.

• Press one of the infotainment sys-

tem button, the driving rear view

will turn off.

• Shift the gear to P (Park), the driv-

ing rear view will turn off.

Surround view monitor

(if equipped)

OSU2I040056

The Surround View Monitor system

can assist in parking by allowing the

driver to see around the vehicle.

Push the button to operate the sys-

tem. To cancel the system, push the

button again.

Operating conditions

• When the Engine Start/Stop button

is in the ON position

• When the transmission is in D, N or

• When vehicle speed is under

15km/h

5-58

Convenience Features

i Information

• When vehicle speed is over 15km/h,

the system will turn off. The system

will not automatically turn on again,

even though vehicle speed gets be-

low 15 km/h. Push the button again,

to turn on the system.

• When the vehicle is backing up, the

system will turn ON regardless of

vehicle speed or button status.

However, if vehicle speed is over 15

km/h when driving forward, the

SVM system will turn off.

• A warning appears on the system

when:

- The tailgate is opened

- The driver’s door is opened

- The passenger’s door is opened

- The outside rearview mirror is

folded

• If the system is not operating nor-

mally, we recommend that you take

your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-

tem checked.

For more details, refer to the sep-

arately supplied manual with your

vehicle.

CAUTION

ODH047432

(1) Front camera

(2) Left/Right camera

(3) Rear camera

Surround View Monitor system

only serves to assist the driver in

parking. ALWAYS look around your

vehicle to make sure there are no

objects or obstacles before mov-

ing the vehicle.

NOTICE

Always keep the camera lens

clean. The camera may not work

normally if the lens is covered with

foreign material.

5-59

OSU2I059037

OSU2I059038

Blind-Spot View Monitor system dis-

plays the left or right side of the rear

blind spot area of your vehicle in the

infotainment system when the left or

right turn signal is on. This function

helps you drive safely when changing

lanes.

• The system is activated when the

following steps are performed.

- The ignition switch is turned to

the ON position

- The gear is in D (Drive), N

(Neutral) position

- The turn signal is turned on

• The system is deactivated when

the following steps are performed.

- The turn signal is turned off

WARNING

• Blind-Spot View Monitor system

is a supplemental system only.

It is the responsibility of the

driver to always check the area

around the vehicle before and

while making turns or changing

lanes.

• Always look around your vehi-

cle to make sure there are no ob-

jects or obstacles before mov-

ing the vehicle in any direction

to prevent a collision

• Objects are closer than they ap-

pear. Failure to visually confirm

that is safe to change the lane

before doing so may result in

crash and serious injury or

death.

• Always keep the camera lens

clean. The camera may not work

normally if the lens is covered

with foreign substance.

%/,1'ǘ63279,(:021,725ǣ%90Ǥ

5-60

Convenience Features

OSU2I051201L

OSU2I051204L

Forward/Reverse Parking Distance

Warning assists the driver during

movement of the vehicle by chiming if

any object is sensed within the dis-

tance of 100 cm (39 in.) in front and

120 cm (47 in.) behind the vehicle.

This system is a supplemental sys-

tem that senses objects within the

range and location of the sensors, it

cannot detect objects in other areas

where sensors are not installed.

WARNING

• ALWAYS look around your vehi-

cle to make sure there are no ob-

jects or obstacles before mov-

ing the vehicle in any direction

to prevent a collision.

• Always pay close attention when

the vehicle is driven close to ob-

jects, particularly pedestrians,

and especially children.

• Be aware that some objects may

not be visible on the screen or

be detected by the sensors, due

to the objects distance, size or

material, all of which can limit

the effectiveness of the sensor.

• Do not tamper with the location

or size of the license plate dis-

cretionally.

)25:$5'5(9(56(3$5.,1*',67$1&(:$51,1*ǣ3':Ǥ

ǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

5-61

Operation of Forward/Reverse

Parking Distance Warning

Operating condition

OSU2I059041

• This system will activate when the

Parking Safety button is pressed

with the engine running.

• The Parking Safety button turns on

automatically and activates Forward/

Reverse Parking Distance Warning

when you press the R(Reverse) but-

ton. However, if vehicle speed ex-

ceeds 10 km/h (6 mph), the system

will not warn you even though ob-

jects are detected, and if vehicle

speed exceeds 20 km/h (12 mph),

the system will turn off automatically.

To turn on the system, press the

Parking Safety button.

• When more than two objects are

sensed at the same time, the clos-

est one will be recognized first.

5-62

Convenience Features

Types of warning sound and indicator

Distance from object

cm (in.)

Warning indicator

Warning sound

When driving

forward

When driving

rearward

60 ~ 100

(24 ~39) Front -Buzzer beeps

intermittently

60 ~ 120

(24 ~47) Rear -Buzzer beeps

intermittently

30 ~ 60

(12 ~24)

Front Buzzer beeps

frequently

Rear -Buzzer beeps

frequently

(12)

Front Buzzer sounds

continuously

Rear -Buzzer sounds

continuously

NOTICE

• The indicator may differ from the illustration depending on objects or

sensors status. If the indicator blinks, we recommend that the system

be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the audible warning does not sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-

tently when shifting into R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a mal-

function with Forward/ Reverse Parking Distance Warning. If this oc-

curs, we recommend that you have your vehicle checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

5-63

Non-operational conditions of

Forward/Reverse Parking

Distance Warning

Forward/Reverse Parking

Distance Warning may not oper-

ate normally when:

• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.

• Sensor is covered with foreign

matter, such as snow or water, or

the sensor cover is blocked.

There is a possibility of Forward/

Reverse Parking Distance

Warning malfunction when:

• Driving on uneven road surfaces

such as unpaved roads, gravel,

bumps, or gradient.

• Objects generating excessive

noise such as vehicle horns, loud

motorcycle engines, or truck air

brakes can interfere with the sen-

sor.

• Heavy rain or water spray is pres-

ent.

• Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones are present near the sen-

sor.

• The sensor is covered with snow.

• Any non-factory equipment or ac-

cessories have been installed, or if

the vehicle bumper height or sen-

sor installation has been modified.

Detecting range may decrease

when:

• Outside air temperature is ex-

tremely hot or cold.

• Undetectable objects smaller than

1 m and narrower than 14 cm in di-

ameter.

The following objects may not

be recognized by the sensor:

• Sharp or slim objects such as

ropes, chains or small poles.

• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-

sor frequency such as clothes,

spongy material or snow.

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does

not cover any accidents or damage

to the vehicle or injuries to its oc-

cupants related to Forward/

Reverse Parking Distance Warning.

Always drive safely and cautiously.

5-64

Convenience Features

Forward/Reverse Parking

Distance Warning precautions

• Forward/Reverse Parking Distance

Warning may not sound consistent-

ly depending on the speed and

shapes of the objects detected.

• Forward/Reverse Parking Distance

Warning may malfunction if the ve-

hicle bumper height or sensor in-

stallation has been modified or

damaged. Any non-factory in-

stalled equipment or accessories

may also interfere with the sensor

performance.

• The sensor may not recognize ob-

jects less than 30 cm (12 in.) from

the sensor, or it may sense an in-

correct distance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is frozen or

stained with snow, dirt, or water,

the sensor may be inoperative until

the stains are removed using a soft

cloth.

• Do not push, scratch or strike the

sensor. Sensor damage could oc-

cur.

• Do not spray the sensors or its sur-

rounding area directly with a high

pressure washer. Shock applied

from high pressure water may

cause the device to not operate

normally.

5-65

OSU2I051204L

[A] : Sensor

Reverse Parking Distance Warning

system assists the driver during re-

verse movement of the vehicle by

chiming if any object is sensed within

the distance of 100 cm (39 inches) be-

hind the vehicle.

This system is a supplemental sys-

tem that senses objects within the

range and location of the sensors, it

cannot detect objects in other areas

where sensors are not installed.

WARNING

• ALWAYS look around your vehi-

cle to make sure there are not

any objects or obstacles before

moving the vehicle in any direc-

tion to prevent a collision.

• Always pay close attention when

the vehicle is driven close to ob-

jects, particularly pedestrians,

and especially children.

• Be aware that some objects may

not be visible on the screen or

be detected by the sensors, due

to the objects distance, size or

material, all of which can limit

the effectiveness of the sensor.

Operation of Reverse Parking

Distance Warning system

Operating condition

• This system will activate when

backing up with the ignition switch

in the ON position. However, if ve-

hicle speed exceeds 5 km/h (3

mph), the system may not detect

objects.

• If vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h

(6 mph), the system will not warn

you even though objects are de-

tected.

• When more than two objects are

sensed at the same time, the clos-

est one will be recognized first.

5(9(56(3$5.,1*',67$1&(:$51,1*ǣ3':Ǥ

ǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

5-66

Convenience Features

Types of warning indicator and

sound

Distance

from object

Warning

indicator

Warning

sound

100 cm ~

61 cm

(39 in. ~

24 in.)

Buzzer

beeps

intermittently.

60 cm ~

31 cm

(24 in. ~

12 in.)

Buzzer

beeps more

frequently.

Less than

30 cm

(12 in.)

Buzzer

beeps

continuously.

NOTICE

• The indicator may differ from

the illustration depending on

objects or sensors status. If the

indicator blinks, we recommend

that you have your vehicle

checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the audible warning does not

sound or if the buzzer sounds

intermittently when shifting into

R (Reverse) position, this may

indicate a malfunction with

Reverse Parking Distance

Warning system. If this occurs,

we recommend that you have

your vehicle checked by an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

Non-operational conditions of

Reverse Parking Distance

Warning system

Reverse Parking Distance Warning

system may not operate normally

when:

• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.

• The sensor is covered or stained

with foreign material, such as snow

or water, or the sensor cover is

blocked.

There is a possibility of a Reverse

Parking Distance Warning system

malfunction when:

• Driving on uneven road surfaces

such as unpaved roads, gravel,

bumps, or gradient.

• Objects generating excessive

noise such as vehicle horns, loud

motorcycle engines, or truck air

brakes can interfere with the sen-

sor.

• Heavy rain or water spray is pres-

ent.

• Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones are present near the sen-

sor.

• The sensor is covered with snow.

• Any non-factory equipment or ac-

cessories have been installed, or if

the vehicle bumper height or sen-

sor installation has been modified.

5-67

Detecting range may decrease when:

• Outside air temperature is ex-

tremely hot or cold.

The following objects may not be

recognized by the sensor:

• Sharp or slim objects such as

ropes, chains or small poles.

• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-

sor frequency such as clothes,

spongy material or snow.

• Undetectable objects smaller than

about 1 m (40 in.) and narrower

than about 14 cm (6 in.) in diame-

ter.

i Information

The system may not recognize objects

less than 30 cm (12 in.) from the sensor,

or it may sense an incorrect distance.

NOTICE

Do not push, scratch or strike the

sensor with any hard objects that

could damage the surface of the

sensor. Sensor damage could oc-

cur.

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does

not cover any accidents or dam-

age to the vehicle or injuries to its

occupants due to a Reverse

Parking Distance Warning system

malfunction. Always drive safely

and cautiously.

Reverse Parking Distance

Warning system precautions

• Reverse Parking Distance Warning

system may not sound consistently

depending on the speed and

shapes of the objects detected.

• Reverse Parking Distance Warning

system may malfunction if the vehi-

cle bumper height or sensor instal-

lation has been modified or dam-

aged. Any non-factory installed

equipment or accessories may

also interfere with the sensor per-

formance.

• The sensor may not recognize ob-

jects less than 30 cm (12 in.) from

the sensor, or it may sense an in-

correct distance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is frozen or

stained with snow, dirt, or water,

the sensor may be inoperative until

the stains are removed using a soft

cloth.

• Do not push, scratch or strike the

sensor with any hard objects that

could damage the surface of the

sensor. Sensor damage could oc-

cur.

• Do not spray the sensors or its sur-

rounding area directly with a high

pressure washer. Shock applied

from high pressure water may

cause the device to not operate

normally.

5-68

Convenience Features

Defroster

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the conduc-

tors bonded to the inside surface

of the rear window, never use

sharp instruments or window

cleaners containing abrasives to

clean the window.

If you want to defrost and defog

the front windshield, refer to

“Windshield defrosting and defog-

ging” in this section.

Rear window defroster

(if equipped)



Manual climate control system

OSU2I059102



Automatic climate control system

OSU2I059103

The defroster heats the window to re-

move frost, fog and thin ice from the

interior and exterior of the rear win-

dow, while engine is running.

To activate the rear window defrost-

er, press the rear window defroster

button located in the climate control

system. The indicator on the rear win-

dow defroster button illuminates

when the defroster is ON.

To turn off the defroster, press the

rear window defroster button again.

i Information

• If there is heavy accumulation of

snow on the rear window, brush it

off before operating the rear de-

froster.

• The rear window defroster auto-

matically turns off after approxi-

mately 20 minutes or when the igni-

tion switch is turned off.

&/,0$7(&21752/6<67(0

5-69

Manual climate control system (if equipped)

OSU2I051100

1. Temperature control knob

2. Fan speed control knob

3. Mode selection knob

4. Air intake control button

(recirculated air position or outside (fresh) air position)

5. A/C (Air conditioning) button

6. Rear window defroster button (if equipped)

5-70

Convenience Features

Heating and air conditioning

OSU2I051104

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling :

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air or recirculated air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

5-71

Mode selection

OSU2I059105

The mode selection knob controls the

direction of the air flow through the

ventilation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dash-

board outlets, or windshield. Five

symbols are used to represent Face,

Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and

Defrost air position.

Face-Level (B, D, E, H)

Air flow is directed toward the upper

body and face. Additionally, each out-

let can be controlled to direct the air

discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face

and the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air

being directed to the windshield, side

window defrosters and side vents.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor and the windshield with a small

amount directed to the side window

defrosters and side vents.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side vents.

5-72

Convenience Features

OSU2I059109



Front



Rear

OSU2I059108

Instrument panel vents

You can adjust the direction of air de-

livered from these vents using the

vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

OSU2I059106

The temperature will increase by

turning the knob to the right.

The temperature will decrease by

turning the knob to the left.

Air intake control

OSU2I059107

This button is used to select the out-

side (fresh) air position or recirculat-

ed air position.

5-73

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the

button illuminates when

the recirculated air posi-

tion is selected.

With the recirculated air

position selected, air

from the passenger

compartment will be

drawn through the cli-

mate control system and

heated or cooled ac-

cording to the function

selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the

button will turn off when

the outside (fresh) air

position is selected.

With the outside (fresh)

air position selected, air

enters the vehicle from

outside and is heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

i Information

Prolonged use of the air conditioning

with the recirculated air position se-

lected will result in excessively dry air

in the passenger compartment.

WARNING

• Continued use of the climate

control system operation in the

recirculated air position can

cause drowsiness or sleepi-

ness, that may cause loss of ve-

hicle control resulting in an ac-

cident. Set the air intake control

to the outside (fresh) air position

as much as possible while driv-

ing.

• Continued use of the climate

control system operation in the

recirculated air position (with-

out the air conditioning select-

ed) may allow humidity to in-

crease inside the vehicle which

may fog the glass and obscure

visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air

conditioning or heating system

on. It may cause serious harm or

death due to a drop in the oxy-

gen level and/or body tempera-

ture.

5-74

Convenience Features

Fan speed control

OSU2I059110

Turn the knob to the right to increase

the fan speed and airflow. Turn the

knob to the left to decrease fan speed

and airflow.

Air conditioning (A/C)

(if equipped)

OSU2I059111

Press the A/C button to turn the air

conditioning system on (indicator light

will illuminate). Press the button again

to turn the air conditioning system off.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Select the Face Level mode.

2. Set the air intake control to the out-

side (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the de-

sired speed.

Heating

1. Select the Floor Level mode.

2. Set the air intake control to the out-

side (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the de-

sired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system on.

If the windshield fogs up, select the

Floor & Defrost mode or select

the Front Defroster mode.

5-75

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes

from entering the car through the

ventilation system, temporarily set

the air intake control to the recircu-

lated air position. Return the con-

trol to the fresh air position when

the irritation has passed. This will

help keep the driver alert and com-

fortable.

• To prevent inside of the windshield

from fogging, set the air intake

control to the fresh air position and

fan speed to the desired position,

turn on the air conditioning system,

and adjust the temperature control

to desired temperature.

Air conditioning (if equipped)

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems

are filled with a R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the air conditioning button.

3. Set the mode to the Face Level

mode.

4. Set the air intake control to the re-

circulated air position. However,

prolonged operation of the recircu-

lated air position will excessively

dry the air. In this case, change the

air position.

5. Adjust the fan speed control and

temperature control to maintain

maximum comfort.

When maximum cooling is desired,

set the temperature control to the ex-

treme left position then set the fan

speed control to the highest speed.

NOTICE

• The refrigerant system should

only be serviced by trained and

certified technicians to insure

proper and safe operation.

• The refrigerant system should

be serviced in a well-ventilated

place.

• The air conditioning evaporator

(cooling coil) shall never be re-

paired or replaced with one re-

moved from a used or salvaged

vehicle and new replacement

MAC evaporators shall be certi-

fied (and labeled) as meeting

SAE Standard J2842.

NOTICE

• When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the tempera-

ture gauge closely while driving

up hills or in heavy traffic when

outside temperatures are high.

Air conditioning system opera-

tion may cause engine overheat-

ing. Continue to use the fan but

turn the air conditioning system

off if the temperature gauge in-

dicates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in

humid weather air conditioning

may create water droplets inside

the vehicle. Since excessive wa-

ter droplets may cause damage

to electrical equipment, air con-

ditioning should only be used

with the windows closed.

5-76

Convenience Features

Air conditioning system operation

tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,

open the windows for a short time

to let the hot air inside the vehicle

escape.

• After sufficient cooling has been

achieved, switch back from the re-

circulated air to the fresh outside

air position.

• To help reduce moisture inside of

the windows on rainy or humid

days, decrease the humidity inside

the vehicle by operating the air

conditioning system with the win-

dows closed.

• Use the air conditioning system ev-

ery month only for a few minutes to

ensure maximum system perfor-

mance.

• If you operate air conditioner ex-

cessively, the difference between

the temperature of the outside air

and that of the windshield could

cause the outer surface of the

windshield to fog up, causing loss

of visibility. In this case, set the

mode selection knob or button to

the position and fan speed

control to the lower speed.

System maintenance

1LDA5047

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control air filter

This filter is installed behind the glove

box. It filters the dust or other pollut-

ants that enter the vehicle through

the heating and air conditioning sys-

tem.

We recommend the climate control

air filter be replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer according to the

maintenance schedule. If the car is

being driven in severe conditions

such as dusty or rough roads, more

frequent air conditioner filter inspec-

tions and changes are required.

If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-

es, we recommend the system be

checked at an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

5-77

Checking the amount of air con-

ditioner refrigerant and com-

pressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is

low, the performance of the air condi-

tioning is reduced. Overfilling also

has a bad influence on the air condi-

tioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, we recommend that the sys-

tem be inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the car is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty, rough

roads, more frequent climate con-

trol air filter inspections and chang-

es are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly de-

creases, we recommend that the sys-

tem be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

It is important that the correct type

and amount of oil and refrigerant

is used. Otherwise, damage to the

compressor and abnormal system

operation may occur. To prevent

damage, the air conditioning sys-

tem in your vehicle should only be

serviced by trained and certified

technicians.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-134a

Since the refrigerant is

operated at very high

pressure, the air condi-

tioning system should

only be serviced by

trained and certified technicians.

All refrigerants should be reclaimed

with proper equipment.

Venting refrigerants directly to the

atmosphere is harmful to individu-

als and environment. Failure to

heed these warnings can lead to

serious injuries.

5-78

Convenience Features

Automatic climate control system (if equipped)

OSU2I051215

1. Fan speed control knob

2. A/C (Air conditioning) button

3. Recirculation mode/Fresh mode

4. Mode selection button

5. Rear window defroster button

6. Front windshield defroster button

7. OFF button

8. Temperature control knob

9. AUTO (automatic control) button

10. Climate control screen

11. Rear Air Conditioning ON/OFF button

5-79

Automatic heating and air condi-

tioning

The Automatic Climate Control

System is controlled by setting the

desired temperature.

OSU2I059112

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake

and air-conditioning will be controlled

automatically by the temperature set-

ting you select.

OSU2I059113

2. Turn the temperature control knob

to the desired temperature. If the

temperature is set to the lowest

setting (LO), the air conditioning

system will operate continuously.

To turn the automatic operation off,

select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Front windshield defrost button

(Press the button one more time to

deselect the front windshield de-

froster function.

- Fan speed control button

The selected function will be con-

trolled manually while other functions

operate automatically.

For your convenience and to improve

the effectiveness of the climate con-

trol, use the AUTO button and set the

temperature to 23°C (73°F).

i Information

OSU2I059042

Never place anything near the sensor

located to ensure better control of the

heating and cooling system.

5-80

Convenience Features

Heating and air conditioning

OSU2I051104

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pressing but-

tons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially

according to the order of buttons selected.

When pressing any button (or turning any knob) except the AUTO button while

using automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled auto-

matically.

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling:

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Press the fresh button.

5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

7. Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the

system.

5-81

Mode selection

OSU2I059114

The mode selection button controls

the direction of the air flow through

the ventilation system.

The air flow outlet port is converted

as follows:

Face-Level (B, D, E, H)

Air flow is directed toward the upper

body and face. Additionally, each out-

let can be controlled to direct the air

discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face

and the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air

being directed to the windshield, side

window defrosters and side vents.

Floor/Defrost-Level

(A, C, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor and the windshield with a small

amount directed to the side window

defrosters and side vents.

OSU2I059115

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrost-

ers.

5-82

Convenience Features

OSU2I059109



Front



Rear

OSU2I059108

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents located in the rear

can be opened or closed separately

using the thumbwheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of

air delivered from these vents using

the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

OSU2I059113

The temperature will increase to the

maximum (HI) by turning the knob to

the right.

The temperature will decrease to the

minimum (LO) by turning the knob to

the left.

The temperature will increase or de-

crease by 0.5°C/1°F each time you

turn the knob. When set to the lowest

temperature setting, the air condition-

ing will operate continuously.

5-83

Air intake control

OSU2I059116

The air intake control button is used

to select either Fresh mode (outside

air) or Recirculation mode (cabin air).

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the

button illuminates when

the recirculated air posi-

tion is selected.

With the recirculated air

position selected, air

from the passenger

compartment will be

drawn through the cli-

mate control system and

heated or cooled ac-

cording to the function

selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the

button will turn off when

the outside (fresh) air

position is selected.

With the outside (fresh)

air position selected, air

enters the vehicle from

outside and is heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

i Information

Prolonged use of the air conditioning

with the recirculated air position se-

lected will result in excessively dry air

in the passenger compartment.

WARNING

• Continued use of the climate

control system operation in the

recirculated air position can

cause drowsiness or sleepi-

ness, that may cause loss of ve-

hicle control resulting in an ac-

cident. Set the air intake control

to the outside (fresh) mode as

much as possible while driving.

• Continued use of the climate

control system operation in the

recirculated air position (with-

out the air conditioning select-

ed) may allow humidity to in-

crease inside the vehicle which

may fog the glass and obscure

visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air

conditioning or heating system

on. It may cause serious harm or

death due to a drop in the oxy-

gen level and/or body tempera-

ture.

5-84

Convenience Features

Fan speed control

OSU2I059119

Turn the knob to the right increase

the fan speed and air flow. Turn the

knob to the left to decrease fan speed

and air flow.

Air conditioning

OSU2I059118

Push the A/C button to manually turn

the system on (indicator light will illu-

minate) and off.

OFF mode

OSU2I059117

Push the OFF button to turn off the

climate control system. You can still

operate the mode and air intake but-

tons with the ignition switch in the ON

position.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Select the Face Level mode.

2. Set the air intake control to the out-

side (fresh) mode.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the de-

sired speed.

5-85

Heating

1. Select the Floor Level mode.

2. Set the air intake control to the out-

side (fresh) mode.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the de-

sired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system on.

If the windshield fogs up, select the

Front Defroster mode.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes

from entering the car through the

ventilation system, temporarily set

the air intake control to the recircu-

lated mode. Return the control to

the fresh mode when the irritation

has passed. This will help keep the

driver alert and comfortable.

• To prevent inside of the windshield

from fogging, set the air intake

control to the fresh air position and

fan speed to the desired position,

turn on the air conditioning system,

and adjust the temperature control

to desired temperature.

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems

are filled with a R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the air conditioning button.

3. Set the mode to the Face Level

mode.

4. Set the air intake control to the re-

circulated mode. However, pro-

longed operation of the recirculat-

ed mode. will excessively dry the

air. In this case, change the mode.

5. Adjust the fan speed control and

temperature control to maintain

maximum comfort.

When maximum cooling is desired,

set the temperature control to the

lowest setting (LO) then set the fan

speed control to the highest speed.

NOTICE

• The refrigerant system should

only be serviced by trained and

certified technicians to insure

proper and safe operation.

• The refrigerant system should

be serviced in a well-ventilated

place.

• The air conditioning evaporator

(cooling coil) shall never be re-

paired or replaced with one re-

moved from a used or salvaged

vehicle and new replacement

MAC evaporators shall be certi-

fied (and labeled) as meeting

SAE Standard J2842.

5-86

Convenience Features

NOTICE

• When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the tempera-

ture gauge closely while driving

up hills or in heavy traffic when

outside temperatures are high.

Air conditioning system opera-

tion may cause engine overheat-

ing. Continue to use the fan but

turn the air conditioning system

off if the temperature gauge in-

dicates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in

humid weather air conditioning

may create water droplets inside

the vehicle. Since excessive wa-

ter droplets may cause damage

to electrical equipment, air con-

ditioning should only be used

with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation

tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,

open the windows for a short time

to let the hot air inside the vehicle

escape.

• After sufficient cooling has been

achieved, switch back from the re-

circulated mode to the fresh mode.

• To help reduce moisture inside of

the windows on rainy or humid

days, decrease the humidity inside

the vehicle by operating the air

conditioning system with the win-

dows closed.

• Use the air conditioning system ev-

ery month only for a few minutes to

ensure maximum system perfor-

mance.

• If you operate air conditioner ex-

cessively, the difference between

the temperature of the outside air

and that of the windshield could

cause the outer surface of the

windshield to fog up, causing loss

of visibility. In this case, set the

mode selection knob or button to

the position and fan speed

control to the lower speed.

5-87

System maintenance

1LDA5047

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control air filter

This filter is installed behind the glove

box. It filters the dust or other pollut-

ants that enter the vehicle through

the heating and air conditioning sys-

tem.

We recommend the climate control

air filter be cleaned according to the

maintenance schedule. If the car is

being driven in severe conditions

such as dusty or rough roads, more

frequent air conditioner filter inspec-

tions and cleaning are required.

If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-

es, we recommend the system be

checked at an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Checking the amount of

air conditioner refrigerant and

compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is

low, the performance of the air condi-

tioning is reduced. Overfilling also

has a bad influence on the air condi-

tioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, we recommend that the sys-

tem be inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

It is important that the correct type

and amount of oil and refrigerant

is used. Otherwise, damage to the

compressor and abnormal system

operation may occur. To prevent

damage, the air conditioning sys-

tem in your vehicle should only be

serviced by trained and certified

technicians.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped

with R-134a

Since the refrigerant is operated at

very high pressure, the air condi-

tioning system should only be ser-

viced by trained and certified tech-

nicians.

All refrigerants should be re-

claimed with proper equipment.

Venting refrigerants directly to the

atmosphere is harmful to individu-

als and environment. Failure to

heed these warnings can lead to

serious injuries.

5-88

Convenience Features

Windshield defrosting and

defogging

WARNING

Do not use the or position

during cooling operation in ex-

tremely humid weather. The differ-

ence between the temperature of

the outside air and that of the

windshield could cause the outer

surface of the windshield to fog

up, causing loss of visibility. Set

the mode selection to the posi-

tion and fan speed control to a

lower speed.

• For maximum defrosting, set the

temperature control to the extreme

right/hot position and the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired

while defrosting or defogging, set

the mode to the floor-defrost posi-

tion.

• Before driving, clear all snow and

ice from the windshield, rear win-

dow, outside rear view mirrors, and

all side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the

hood and air inlet at the buttom of

the windshield.

• If the engine temperature is still

cold after starting, then a brief en-

gine warm up period may be re-

quired for the vented air flow to

become warm or hot.

Manual climate control system

OSU2I059120

To defog inside windshield

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Select the or position.

4. The outside (fresh) air will be se-

lected automatically. Additionally,

the air conditioning will automati-

cally operate if the mode is select-

ed to the or position.

If the air conditioning and outside

(fresh) mode are not selected auto-

matically, press the corresponding

button manually.

OSU2I059121

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme

hot position.

3. Select the position.

5-89

4. The outside (fresh) mode and air

conditioning will be selected auto-

matically.

Automatic climate control sys-

tem

OSU2I059122

To defog inside windshield

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The air-conditioning will turn on ac-

cording to the detected ambient

temperature, outside (fresh) and

higher fan speed will be selected

automatically.

If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh)

air position and higher fan speed are

not selected automatically, adjust the

corresponding button or knob manu-

ally.

If the position is selected, lower

fan speed is adjusted to higher fan

speed.

OSU2I059123

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme

hot (HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The air-conditioning will turn on ac-

cording to the detected ambient

temperature and outside (fresh)

mode will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan

speed is adjusted to higher fan speed

5-90

Convenience Features

WARNING

Flammable materials

Do not store cigarette lighters,

propane cylinders, or other flam-

mable/explosive materials in the

vehicle. These items may catch

fire and/or explode if the vehicle is

exposed to hot temperatures for

extended periods.

WARNING

ALWAYS keep the storage com-

partment covers closed securely

while driving. Items inside your ve-

hicle are moving as fast as the ve-

hicle. If you have to stop or turn

quickly, or if there is a crash, the

items may fly out of the compart-

ment and may cause an injury if

they strike the driver or a passen-

ger.

NOTICE

To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartment.

Center console storage

OSU2I059043

To open :

Pull up the storage cover.

Glove box

OSU2I059044

To open:

Pull the lever (1).

WARNING

ALWAYS close the glove box door

after use.

An open glove box door can cause

serious injury to the passenger in

an accident, even if the passenger

is wearing a seat belt.

6725$*(&203$570(17

5-91

Cargo tray

OSU2069073

You can place a first aid kit, a reflec-

tor triangle (front tray), tools, etc. in

the box for easy access.

• Grasp the strap on the top of the

cover and lift it.

Cool box (if equipped)

OSU2I059068

You can keep beverage cans or other

items cool in the glove box.

1. Turn on the air conditioning.

2. Turn the open/close switch (1) of

the vent installed in the glove box

to the open position.

3. When the cool box is not used, turn

the switch (1) to the closed posi-

tion.

WARNING

Do not put perishable food in the

cool box because it may not main-

tain the necessary consistent tem-

perature to keep the food fresh.

i Information

• If the vent is blocked by items in the

coolbox, cooling will be reduced.

• If the climate control system tem-

perature control is in the warm or

hot position, Cold air only will flow

into the glove box.

5-92

Convenience Features

Clock

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock while driv-

ing. You may lose your steering

control and cause severe personal

injury or accidents.

Coat hook

These hooks are not designed to hold

large or heavy items.

WARNING

Do not hang other objects such as

hangers or hard objects except

clothes. Also, do not put heavy,

sharpor breakable objects in the

clothes pockets. In an accident or

when the curtain air bag is inflated,

it may cause vehicle damage or

personal injury.

Ashtray (if equipped)

OSU2I059045

To use the ashtray, open the cover.

To clean or empty the ashtray, pull

the ashtray out.

Do not use the vehicle’s ashtray as

waste receptacles.

WARNING

Putting lit cigarettes or matches in

an ashtray with other combustible

materials may cause fire.

INTERIOR FEATURES

5-93

Cup holder

OSU2I059046



Front



Rear (2nd row)

OSU2I051206L



Rear (3rd row)

OSU2I051207L

Cups or small beverage cans may be

placed in the cup holders.

WARNING

• Avoid abrupt starting and brak-

ing when the cup holder is in

use to prevent spilling your

drink. If hot liquid spills, you

could be burned. Such a burn to

the driver could cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident.

• Do not place uncovered or unse-

cured cups, bottles, cans, etc.,

in the cup holder containing hot

liquid while the vehicle is in mo-

tion. Injuries may result in the

event of sudden stop or colli-

sion.

• Only use soft cups in the cup

holders. Hard objects can injure

you in an accident.

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of direct

sun light and do not put them in a

hot vehicle. It may explode.

NOTICE

• Keep your drinks sealed while

driving to prevent spilling your

drink. If liquid spills, it may get

into the vehicle’s electrical/elec-

tronic system and damage elec-

trical/electronic parts.

• When cleaning spilled liquids,

do not dry the cup holder at high

temperature. This may damage

the cup holder.

5-94

Convenience Features

Sunvisor

OTM048089R



Driver's side



Passenger's side

OIB044028

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window,

pull it downward, unsnap it from the

bracket (1) and swing it to the side

(2). To use the vanity mirror, pull

down the sunvisor and slide the mir-

ror cover (3). Adjust the sunvisor for-

ward or backward(4) as needed.

Use the ticket holder (5) to hold tick-

ets.

WARNING

For your safety, do not block your

view when using the sunvisor.

NOTICE

Do not put several tickets in the

ticket holder at one time. This

could cause damage to the tick-

et holder.

Power outlet (if equipped)



Front

OSU2I059048

The power outlet is designed to pro-

vide power for mobile telephones or

other devices designed to operate

with vehicle electrical systems. The

devices should draw less than 180W

(Watt) with the engine running.

WARNING

Avoid electrical shocks. Do not

place your fingers or foreign ob-

jects (pin, etc.) into a power outlet

or touch the power outlet with a

wet hand.

5-95

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the Power

outlet:

• Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and re-

move the accessory plug after

use. Using the accessory plug

for prolonged periods of time

with the engine off could cause

the battery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accesso-

ries which are less than 180W

(Watt) in electric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or

heater to the lowest operating

level when using the power out-

let.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interference

when plugged into a vehicle’s

power outlet. These devices

may cause excessive audio stat-

ic and malfunctions in other

electronic systems or devices

used in your vehicle.

• Push the plug in as far as it will

go. If good contact is not made,

the plug may overheat or the in-

ternal temperature fuse may

open.

• Plug in battery equipped electri-

cal/electronic devices with re-

verse current protection. The

current from the battery may

flow into the vehicle’s electrical/

electronic system and cause

system malfunction.

USB charger (if equipped)



Front

OSU2I059050



Rear (2nd row)

OSU2I059051



Rear (3rd row)

OSU2I051208L

The USB charger is designed to re-

charge batteries of small size electri-

cal devices using a USB cable.

The electrical devices can be re-

charged when the Engine Start/ Stop

button is in the ACC, ON or START

position.

The battery charging state may be

monitored on the electrical device.

5-96

Convenience Features

Disconnect the USB cable from the

USB port after use.

• A smart phone or a tablet PC may

get warmer during the re-charging

process. It does not indicate any

malfunction with the charging sys-

tem.

• A smart phone or a tablet PC,

which adopts a different re-

charging method, may not be prop-

erly re-charged. In this case, use

an exclusive charger of your de-

vice.

• The charging terminal is only to re-

charge a device. Do not use the

charging terminal either to turn ON

an audio or to play media on the

infotainment system.

Wireless cellular phone

charging system (if equipped)



Front

OSU2I059052



Rear (2nd row)

OSU2I051052L

On certain models, the vehicle comes

equipped with a wireless cellular

phone charger.

To start wireless charging, place the

smart phone equipped with wireless

charging function on the wireless

charging pad. Firmly close all doors,

and turn the ignition to IGN ON.

5-97

To charge a cellular phone

The wireless cellular phone charging

system charges only the Qi-enabled

cellular phones ( ). Read the label

on the cellular phone accessory cov-

er or visit your cellular phone manu-

facturer’s website to check whether

your cellular phone supports the Qi

technology.

The wireless charging process starts

when you put a Qi-enabled cellular

phone on the wireless charging unit.

1. Remove all items including smart

key on wireless charging pad. If

not, the wireless charging will be

interrupted. Place the cellular

phone on the center of the charging

pad.

2. You can turn ON or OFF the wire-

less charging function in the user

settings mode on the instrument

cluster. For further information, re-

fer to the “Cluster Display Modes”

in chapter 4.

If your cellular phone is not charging:

- Slightly change the position of the

cellular phone on the charging

pad.

In this case, temporarily stop the

charging process, and re-attempt to

charge your cellular phone again.

The system warns you with a mes-

sage on the cluster display if the cel-

lular phone is still on the wireless

charging unit after the engine is

turned OFF and the front door is

opened.

i Information

For some manufacturers’ cellular

phones, the system may not warn you

even though the cellular phone is left

on the wireless charging unit. This is

due to the particular characteristic of

the cellular phone and not a malfunc-

tion of the wireless charging.

WARNING

• The wireless cellular phone

charging system may not sup-

port certain cellular phones,

which are not verified for the Qi

specification ( ).

• When placing your cellular

phone on the charging mat, po-

sition the phone in the middle of

the mat for optimal charging

performance. If your cell phone

is off to the side, the charging

rate may be less and in some

cases the cell phone may expe-

rience higher heat conduction.

• In some cases, the wireless

charging may stop temporarily

when the Remote Key or Smart

Key is used, either when start-

ing the vehicle or locking/un-

locking the doors, etc.

• The charging status will be ap-

pear on Head-up display (if

equipped).

• The wireless charging process

may temporarily stop, when

temperature abnormally in-

creases inside the wireless cel-

lular phone charging system.

Stop the charging cellular phone

and wait until temperature falls

to a certain level.

5-98

Convenience Features

• The wireless charging process

may temporarily stop when

there is any metallic item, such

as a coin, between the wireless

cellular phone charging system

and the cellular phone.

• When charging some cellular

phones with a self-protection

feature, the wireless charging

speed may decrease and the

wireless charging may stop.

• If the cellular phone has a thick

cover, the wireless charging

may not be possible.

• If the cell phone is not complete-

ly contacting the charging pad,

wireless charging may not oper-

ate properly.

• Some magnetic items like credit

cards, phone cards or rail tick-

ets may be damaged if left with

the cellular phone during the

charging process.

• When any cellular phone with-

out a wireless charging function

or a metallic object is placed on

the charging pad, a small noise

may sound. This small sound is

due to the vehicle discerning

compatibility of the object

placed on the charging pad. It

does not affect your vehicle or

the cellular phone in any way.

• Smaller handset users (for ex-

ample, IPhone 8) may face inter-

mittent charging issues due to

its small size. (place the Smart

Phone at Center of the PAD)

• To prevent liquid from damag-

ing the wireless smart phone

charging system in your vehicle,

be sure not to spill liquid over

the charging system when

charging your phone

i Information

If the ignition switch is in the OFF po-

sition, the charging also stops.

Floor mat anchor(s)

(if equipped)

OSU2I059064

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors

to attach the front floor mats to the

vehicle. The anchors on the front floor

carpet keep the floor mats from slid-

ing forward.

5-99

WARNING

The following must be observed

when installing ANY floor mat to

the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehi-

cle’s floor mat anchor(s) before

driving the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that

cannot be firmly attached to the

vehicle’s floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top of

one another (for example,

all-weather rubber mat on top of

a carpeted floor mat). Only a sin-

gle floor mat should be installed

in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was

manufactured with driver’s side

floor mat anchors that are de-

signed to securely hold the floor

mat in place. To avoid any interfer-

ence with pedal operation,

HYUNDAI recommends that the

HYUNDAI floor mat designed for

use in your vehicle be installed.

Shopping hook

OSU2I051202L

It is convenient to keep small shop-

ping carry bags in shopping hooks,

which is located in the cargo area.

5-100

Convenience Features

Roof rack (if equipped)

OSU2I059055

Do not load cargo on the roof.

The roof rack is not for loading cargo

but for aesthetic purpose.

EXTERIOR FEATURES

Side curtain (if equipped)

OTM050206

To use the side curtain:

1. Lift the curtain by the hook (1).

2. Hang the curtain on both sides of

the hook.

CAUTION

• Always hang both sides of the

curtain on the hook. This could

cause damage to the side cur-

tain if only one side of the cur-

tain is hooked.

• Do not let any foreign material

get in between the vehicle and

side curtain. The side curtain

may not be lifted up.

• Remove the curtain slowly from

hooks. Sudden drop might re-

sult in damage to door trim

5-101

,1)27$,10(176<67(0

NOTICE

• If you install an aftermarket HID

head light, your vehicle’s audio

and electronic device may mal-

function.

• Prevent chemicals such as per-

fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,

hand cleaner, and air freshener

from contacting the interior

parts because they may cause

damage, button struck issues or

discoloration.

USB port (if equipped)

OSU2I059056

You can use a USB port to plug in

USB to play music.

NOTE : Please go through USB

compatibility list in HYUNDAI India

website.

i Information

When using a portable audio device

connected to the power outlet, noise

may occur during playback. If this

happens, use the power source of the

portable audio device.

Antenna

Pole antenna

OSU2059074

The antenna will receive AM, FM

broadcast signals, etc. and transmit

data. This antenna pole is removable.

Rotate the antenna in a counterclock-

wise direction to remove it.

Rotate it in a clockwise direction to

reinstall it.

Shark fin antenna

OSU2059042

The shark fin antenna receives trans-

mitted data. (for example: AM/FM)

5-102

Convenience Features

NOTICE

• Before entering a place with a

low height clearance, be sure

that the antenna is removed.

• Be sure to remove the antenna

before washing the vehicle in an

automatic car wash or it may be

damaged.

• When reinstalling your antenna,

it is important that it is fully

tightened and adjusted to the

upright position to ensure prop-

er reception. But it could be re-

moved when parking the vehi-

cle.

NOTICE

Installation of aftermarket antenna

may result in water leakage, wind

noise, rattling & improper radio

operation. We recommend to use

the antenna available with an au-

thorized Hyundai dealer.

i Information

Some models do not have audio (plas-

tic blanking cover) system, and will not

supply radio main cable. Thus if you

want to insert Aftermarket audio or

OEM audio to listen radio broadcast-

ing service, we recommend to use the

feeder cable available with an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer.

Steering wheel audio control

(if equipped)

OSU2I059058



Type A



Type B

OSU2I059057

The steering wheel audio control but-

ton is installed to promote safe driv-

ing.

NOTICE

Do not operate audio remote con-

trol buttons simultaneously.

5-103

VOLUME ( / ) (1)

• Press the up button (+) to increase

volume.

• Press the down button (-) to de-

crease volume.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET button is

pressed for 0.8 second or more, it will

work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK se-

lect button. It will SEEK until next

channel is reached.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is

pressed for less than 0.8 second, it

will work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET

STATION select buttons.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/

DOWN button.

MODE (3)

• Press the MODE button to toggle

through radio or media modes.

• Press and hold the button to turn

the system ON/OFF.

MUTE (4)

• Press the button to mute the

sound.

• Press the button again to activate

the sound.

Detailed information for audio control

buttons is included in the following

pages in this chapter.

Audio / Video (AV)

(if equipped)

Detailed information for the infotain

ment system is described in a sepa-

rately supplied manual.

5-104

Convenience Features

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

hands-free (if equipped)

OSU2I059059

OSU2I059060

OSU2I059061

You can use the phone wirelessly by

using the

Bluetooth

® Wireless

Technology.

(1) Call / Answer button : Press the

button shortly.

Voice recognition mode (if

equipped) : Press the button lon-

ger when you have an Android

Auto or Carplay connection.

(2) Call end button

(3) Microphone

• Audio : For detailed information,

refer to “AUDIO” in this chapter.

• Infotainment system : Detailed in-

formation for the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology hands-free is

described in the manual supplied

separately.

5-105

How vehicle radio works

FM reception

OJF045308L

AM and FM radio signals are broad-

cast from transmitter towers located

around your city. They are intercept-

ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-

cle. This signal is then processed by

the radio and sent to your vehicle

speakers.

When a strong radio signal has

reached your vehicle, the precise en-

gineering of your audio system en-

sures the best possible quality repro-

duction. However, in some cases the

signal coming to your vehicle may not

be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as

the distance from the radio station,

closeness of other strong radio sta-

tions or the presence of buildings,

bridges or other large obstructions in

the area.

AM reception

OJF045309L

AM broadcasts can be received at

greater distances than FM broad-

casts. This is because AM radio

waves are transmitted at low frequen-

cies. These long, low frequency radio

waves can follow the curvature of the

earth rather than travelling straight

out into the atmosphere. In addition,

they curve around obstructions so

that they can provide better signal

coverage.

FM radio station

OJF045310L

FM broadcasts are transmitted at

high frequencies and do not bend to

follow the earth’s surface. Because of

this, FM broadcasts generally begin

to fade at short distances from the

station. Also, FM signals are easily

affected by buildings, mountains, or

other obstructions.

5-106

Convenience Features

These can result in certain listening

conditions which might lead you to be-

lieve a problem exists with your radio.

The following conditions are normal

and do not indicate radio trouble :

FM reception

JBM004

• Fading - As your vehicle moves

away from the radio station, the

signal will weaken and sound will

begin to fade. When this occurs,

we suggest that you select another

stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or

large obstructions between the

transmitter and your radio can dis-

turb the signal causing static or

fluttering noises to occur. Reducing

the treble level may lessen this ef-

fect until the disturbance clears.

FM reception

OJF045311L

• Station Swapping - As a FM signal

weakens, another more powerful

signal near the same frequency

may begin to play. This is because

your radio is designed to lock onto

the clearest signal. If this occurs,

select another station with a stron-

ger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio

signals being received from sever-

al directions can cause distortion

or fluttering. This can be caused by

a direct and reflected signal from

the same station, or by signals

from two stations with close fre-

quencies. If this occurs, select an-

other station until the condition has

passed.

5-107

Using a cellular phone or a two-

way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside

the vehicle, noise may be produced

from the audio system. This does not

mean that something is wrong with

the audio equipment. In such a case,

use the cellular phone at a place as

far as possible from the audio equip-

ment.

NOTICE

When using a communication sys-

tem such as a cellular phone or a

radio set inside the vehicle, a sep-

arate external antenna must be fit-

ted. When a cellular phone or a ra-

dio set is used with an internal

antenna alone, it may interfere with

the vehicle’s electrical system and

adversely affect safe operation of

the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not use a cellular phone while

driving. Stop at a safe location to

use a cellular phone.

iPod®

iPod® is a registered trademark of

Apple Inc.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos

are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by HYUNDAI is under li-

cense.

Other trademarks and trade names

are those of their respective owners.

Bluetooth

® Wireless Technology

enabled cell phone is required to use

Bluetooth

® Wireless Technology.

5-108

Convenience Features

Before driving .................................................................................................... 6-4

Before entering the vehicle ........................................................................... 6-4

Before starting ................................................................................................ 6-4

Ignition switch.................................................................................................... 6-6

Key ignition switch ......................................................................................... 6-6

Engine Start/Stop button ..............................................................................6-10

Manual transmission ........................................................................................6-18

Manual transmission operation ....................................................................6-18

Good driving practices ................................................................................. 6-20

Dual clutch transmission .................................................................................. 6-21

Dual clutch transmission operation .............................................................6-22

Parking ...........................................................................................................6-28

Good driving practices ..................................................................................6-29

Automatic transmission ................................................................................... 6-31

Automatic transmission operation ............................................................... 6-31

Parking .......................................................................................................... 6-36

Good driving practices ................................................................................. 6-36

Braking system ................................................................................................. 6-38

Power brakes ................................................................................................ 6-38

Disc brakes wear indicator .......................................................................... 6-38

Rear drum brakes ......................................................................................... 6-39

Parking brake (hand type) ............................................................................ 6-39

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) ....................................................................6-41

Auto hold .......................................................................................................6-47

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .......................................................................6-51

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................................................6-53

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) ........................................................6-56

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ......................................................................6-57

Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) .......................................................................6-57

Good braking practices ...............................................................................6-58

6. While Driving

Idle Stop and Go (ISG) .....................................................................................6-59

ISG system operation ...................................................................................6-59

ISG system off ............................................................................................... 6-62

Forced to restart engine ..............................................................................6-63

ISG malfunction ............................................................................................ 6-63

Calibrating the Battery Sensor ....................................................................6-64

Drive mode integrated control system .......................................................... 6-65

Drive mode ...................................................................................................6-65

Traction control ................................................................................................6-68

Traction control mode ..................................................................................6-68

Traction mode operation .............................................................................6-68

Cluster display message ..............................................................................6-69

Cruise Control (CC) ...........................................................................................6-70

Cruise Control operation ..............................................................................6-70

Special driving conditions ................................................................................6-75

Hazardous driving conditions.......................................................................6-75

Rocking the vehicle .......................................................................................6-75

Smooth cornering .........................................................................................6-76

Driving at night ..............................................................................................6-76

Driving in the rain ..........................................................................................6-76

Driving in flooded areas ................................................................................6-77

Highway driving .............................................................................................6-77

Reducing the risk of a rollover ......................................................................6-78

Winter driving ...................................................................................................6-79

Snow or icy conditions ..................................................................................6-79

Winter precautions ........................................................................................6-81

Vehicle weight ..................................................................................................6-84

Overloading ..................................................................................................6-84

6-3

WARNING

Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause uncon-

sciousness and death.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.

Do not inhale engine exhaust.

If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows

immediately. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and death by

asphyxiation.

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to

change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the

exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the

vehicle, we recommend that the exhaust system be checked as soon as possi-

ble by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a

hazardous practice. Run the engine only long enough to start the engine and to

move the vehicle out of the garage.

Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehi-

cle.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the

vehicle , be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at “Fresh”

and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

Keep the air intakes clear.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air

intakes located in front of the windshield clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other

obstructions.

If you must drive with the tailgate/trunk open:

Close all windows.

Open instrument panel air vents.

Set the air intake control at “Fresh”, the air flow control at “Floor” or “Face”, and

the fan control set to high.

6-4

While Driving

Before entering the vehicle

• Be sure all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean

and unobstructed.

• Remove frost, snow, or ice.

• Visually check the tires for uneven

wear and damage.

• Check under the vehicle for any

sign of leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles

behind you if you intend to back

up.

Before starting

• Make sure the hood, the tailgate,

and the doors are securely closed

and locked.

• Adjust the position of the seat and

steering wheel.

• Adjust the inside and outside rear-

view mirrors.

• Verify all the lights work.

• Fasten your seatbelt. Check that

all passengers have fastened their

seatbelts.

• Check the gauges and indicators

in the instrument panel and the

messages on the instrument dis-

play when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

• Check that any items you are car-

rying are stored properly or fas-

tened down securely.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, take the follow-

ing precautions:

• ALWAYS wear your seat belt. All

passengers must be properly

belted whenever the vehicle is

moving.

For more information, refer to

“Seat Belts” in chapter 3.

• Always drive defensively.

Assume other drivers or pedes-

trians may be careless and make

mistakes.

• Stay focused on the task of driv-

ing. Driver distraction can cause

accidents.

• Leave plenty of space between

you and the vehicle in front of

you.

BEFORE DRIVING

6-5

WARNING

NEVER drink or take drugs and

drive.

Drinking or taking drugs and driv-

ing is dangerous and may result in

an accident and SERIOUS INJURY

or DEATH.

Drunk driving is the number one

contributor to the highway death

toll each year. Even a small amount

of alcohol will affect your reflexes,

perceptions and judgment. Just

one drink can reduce your ability

to respond to changing conditions

and emergencies and your reac-

tion time gets worse with each

additional drink.

Driving while under the influence

of drugs is as dangerous as or

more dangerous than driving

under the influence of alcohol.

You are much more likely to have a

serious accident if you drink or

take drugs and drive. If you are

drinking or taking drugs, don’t

drive. Do not ride with a driver who

has been drinking or taking drugs.

Choose a designated driver or call

a taxi.

6-6

While Driving

IGNITION SWITCH

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, take the follow-

ing precautions:

• NEVER allow children or any

person who is unfamiliar with

the vehicle to touch the ignition

switch or related parts.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle

movement can occur.

• NEVER reach through the steer-

ing wheel for the ignition switch,

or any other control, while the

vehicle is in motion. The pres-

ence of your hand or arm in this

area may cause a loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

Key ignition switch

(if equipped)

ODN8059301L

WARNING

• NEVER turn the ignition switch

to the LOCK or ACC position

while the vehicle is in motion

except in an emergency. This

will result in the engine turning

off and loss of power assist for

the steering and brake systems.

This may lead to loss of direc-

tional control and braking func-

tion, which could cause an acci-

dent.

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in 1st gear (for Manual trans-

mission vehicle) or P (Park, for-

Dual Clutch Transm-ission/

Automatic Transmission vehi-

cle) position, apply the parking

brake, and turn ignition switch

to the LOCK position.

Unexpected vehicle movement

may occur if these precautions

are not followed.

6-7

Key ignition switch positions

Switch

Position Action Notice

LOCK The ignition key can be removed

in the LOCK position.

The steering wheel locks to pro-

tect the vehicle from theft.

(if equipped)

ACC Electrical accessories are

usable.

The steering wheel unlocks.

If difficulty is experienced turning

the ignition switch to the ACC

position, turn the key while turn-

ing the steering wheel right and

left to release tension.

This is the normal key position

when the engine has started.

All features and accessories are

usable.

The warning lights can be

checked when you turn the igni-

tion switch from ACC to ON.

Do not leave the ignition switch

in the ON position when the

engine is not running to prevent

the battery from discharging.

START

To start the engine, turn the igni-

tion switch to the START posi-

tion. The switch returns to the

ON position when you let go of

the key.

The engine will crank until you

release the key.

6-8

While Driving

Starting the engine

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes

when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes, such as high

heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-

flops, etc., may interfere with

your ability to use the brake,

accelerator and clutch pedals.

• Do not start the vehicle with the

accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move and lead

to an accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is nor-

mal. The vehicle may suddenly

move if the brake padel is

released when the rpm is high.

Starting the petrol engine

Vehicle with Manual transmission:

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Make sure the shift lever is in neu-

tral.

3. Depress the clutch and brake ped-

als.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the

START position. Hold the key

(maximum of 10 seconds) until the

engine starts and release it.

The engine can not be started

unless the shift lever is ‘N’ position.

Vehicle with Dual Clutch Transmission

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the

START position. Hold the key

(maximum of 10 seconds) until the

engine starts and release it.

i Information

• Do not wait for the engine to warm

up while the vehicle remains sta-

tionary.

Start driving at moderate engine

speeds. (Steep accelerating and

decelerating should be avoided.)

• Always start the vehicle with your

foot on the brake pedal. Do not

depress the accelerator while start-

ing the vehicle. Do not race the

engine while warming it up.

6-9

Starting the diesel engine

To start the diesel engine when the

engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated

before starting the engine and then

have to be warmed up before starting

to drive.

Vehicle with Manual transmission:

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Make sure the shift lever is in neu-

tral.

3. Depress the clutch and brake ped-

als.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position to pre-heat the engine.

The glow indicator light ( ) w ill

illuminate.

5. When the glow indicator light ( )

goes out, turn the key ignition

switch to the START position. Hold

the key (maximum of 10 seconds)

until the engine starts and release

it.

Vehicle with Automatic transmission:

1. Always carry the smart key with

you.

2. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

3. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

4. Depress the brake pedal.

5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton.

6. Continue depressing the brake

pedal until the glow indicator light

() goes out.

7. When the glow indicator light ( )

goes out, the engine will start.

NOTICE

If the Engine Start/Stop button is

pressed while the engine is pre-

heating, the engine may start.

6-10

While Driving

Starting and stopping the engine for

turbocharger intercooler

1. Do not race or accelerate the

engine immediately after starting

the engine.

If the engine is cold, idle for several

seconds before sufficient lubrica-

tion is ensured in the turbo charger

unit.

2. After high speed or extended driv-

ing that requires heavy engine

load, idle the engine about one

minute before turning the engine

off.

This idle time will allow the turbo-

charger to cool prior to shutting the

engine off.

NOTICE

Do not turn off the engine immedi-

ately after it has been subjected to

a heavy load. Doing so may cause

severe damage to the engine or

turbo charger unit.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

• Do not hold the ignition key in

the START position for more

than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10

seconds before trying again.

• Do not turn the ignition switch

to the START position with the

engine running. It may damage

the starter.

• If traffic and road conditions

permit, you may put the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) position

while the vehicle is still moving

and turn the ignition switch to

the START position in an attempt

to restart the engine.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle

to start the engine.

Engine Start/Stop button

(if equipped)

OSU2I062001

With ignition switch off and all doors

locked, when the driver unlock the

car via smart key and open the door,

Start/Stop button will illuminate for 30

seconds.

WARNING

To reduce risk of serious injury or

death, NEVER allow children or

any person who is unfamiliar with

the vehicle to touch the Engine

Start/Stop button or related parts.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle

movement can occur.

6-11

WARNING

To turn the engine off in an emer-

gency:

Press and hold the Engine Start/

Stop button for more than two sec-

onds OR Rapidly press and release

the Engine Start/Stop button three

times (within three seconds).

If the vehicle is still moving, you

can restart the engine without

depressing the brake pedal by

pressing the Engine Start/Stop

button with the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position.

WARNING

• NEVER press the Engine Start/

Stop button while the vehicle is

in motion except in an emergen-

cy. This will result in the engine

turning off and loss of power

assist for the steering and brake

systems.

This may lead to loss of direc-

tional control and braking func-

tion, which could cause an acci-

dent.

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position, set

the parking brake, press the

Engine Start/Stop button to the

OFF position, and take the Smart

Key with you. Unexpected vehi-

cle movement may occur if

these precautions are not fol-

lowed.

• NEVER reach through the steer-

ing wheel for the Engine Start/

Stop button or any other control

while the vehicle is in motion.

The presence of your hand or

arm in this area may cause a

loss of vehicle control resulting

in an accident.

6-12

While Driving

Engine Start/Stop button positions

- Vehicle with Manual transmission

Button Position Action Notice

OFF

• To turn off the engine, stop

the vehicle and then press

the Engine Start/Stop button.

• The steering wheel locks to

protect the vehicle from theft.

(if equipped)

If the steering wheel is not

locked properly when you open

the driver’s door, the warning

chime will sound.

ACC

• Press the Engine Start/Stop

button when the button is in

the OFF position without

depressing the clutch pedal.

• Electrical accessories are

usable.

• The steering wheel unlocks.

• If you leave the Engine Start/

Stop button in the ACC posi-

tion for more than one hour,

the battery power will turn off

automatically to prevent the

battery from discharging.

• If the steering wheel doesn’t

unlock properly, the Engine

Start/Stop button will not

work. Press the Engine Start/

Stop button while turning the

steering wheel right and left

to release tension.

• Press the Engine Start/Stop

button while it is in the ACC

position without depressing

the clutch pedal.

• The warning lights can be

checked before the engine is

started.

Do not leave the Engine Start/

Stop button in the ON position

when the engine is not running

to prevent the battery from dis-

charging.

START

To start the engine, depress the

clutch and brake pedals and

press the Engine Start/ Stop

button with the shift lever in

neutral.

If you press the Engine Start/

Stop button without depressing

the clutch pedal, the engine

does not start and the Engine

Start/Stop button changes as

follows:

OFF o ACC o ON o OFF

6-13

Engine Start/Stop button positions

- Vehicle with Dual Clutch Transmission/Automatic Transmission

Button Position Action Notice

OFF

To turn off the engine, press the

Engine Start/Stop button with

shift lever in P (Park).

When you press the Engine

Start/Stop button without the

shift lever in P (Park), the

Engine Start/Stop button does

not turn to the OFF position, but

turns to the ACC position.

The steering wheel locks to pro-

tect the vehicle from theft. (if

equipped)

If the steering wheel is not

locked properly when you open

the driver’s door, the warning

chime will sound.

ACC

Press the Engine Start/Stop

button when the button is in the

OFF position without depress-

ing the brake pedal.

Electrical accessories are

usable.

The steering wheel unlocks.

• If you leave the Engine Start/

Stop button in the ACC posi-

tion for more than one hour,

the battery power will turn off

automatically to prevent the

battery from discharging.

• If the steering wheel doesn’t

unlock properly, the Engine

Start/Stop button will not

work. Press the Engine Start/

Stop button while turning the

steering wheel right and left

to release tension.

Press the Engine Start/Stop

button while it is in the ACC

position without depressing the

brake pedal.

The warning lights can be

checked before the engine is

started.

Do not leave the Engine Start/

Stop button in the ON position

when the engine is not running

to prevent the battery from dis-

charging.

START

To start the engine, depress the

brake pedal and press the

Engine Start/Stop button with

the shift lever in the P (Park) or

in the N (Neutral) position.

For your safety, start the engine

with the shift lever in the P

(Park) position.

If you press the Engine Start/

Stop button without depressing

the brake pedal, the engine

does not start and the Engine

Start/Stop button changes as

follows:

OFF o ACC o ON o OFF or

ACC

6-14

While Driving

Starting the engine

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes

when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes, such as high

heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-

flops, etc., may interfere with

your ability to use the brake,

accelerator and clutch pedals.

• Do not start the vehicle with the

accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move and lead

to an accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is nor-

mal. The vehicle may suddenly

move if the brake pedal is

released when the rpm is high.

i Information

• The engine will start by pressing the

Engine Start/Stop button, only

when the smart key is in the vehicle.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-

cle, if it is far away from the driver,

the engine may not start.

• When the Engine Start/Stop button

is in the ACC or ON position, if any

door is open, the system checks for

the smart key. If the smart key is not

in the vehicle, the “ ” indicator

will blink and the warning “Key not

in vehicle” will come on, and if all

doors are closed, the chime will also

sound for about 5 seconds. The indi-

cator will turn off while the vehicle

is moving. Keep the smart key in the

vehicle when using the ACC posi-

tion or if the vehicle engine is ON.

Starting the petrol engine

Vehicle with Manual transmission:

1. Always carry the smart key with

you.

2. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

3. Make sure the shift lever is in neu-

tral.

4. Depress the clutch and brake ped-

als.

5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton.

Vehicle with Dual Clutch Transmission

1. Always carry the smart key with

you.

2. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

3. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

4. Depress the brake pedal.

5 Press the Engine Start/Stop button.

If you press the Engine Start/Stop

button to the START position without

depressing the brake pedal and

clutch pedal, the engine will not start.

6-15

i Information

• Do not wait for the engine to warm

up while the vehicle remains sta-

tionary.

Start driving at moderate engine

speeds. (Steep accelerating and

decelerating should be avoided.)

• Always start the vehicle with your

foot on the brake pedal. Do not

depress the accelerator while start-

ing the vehicle. Do not race the

engine while warming it up.

• When you start to drive, move the

shift lever after checking the

RPM(revolutions per minute) is in

the proper range (under 1000 rpm)

by depressing the clutch pedal and

brake pedal.

After releasing the parking brake,

take your foot off the clutch and

depress the accelerator slowly while

starting your vehicle.

Starting the diesel engine

To start the diesel engine when the

engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated

before starting the engine and then

have to be warmed up before starting

to drive.

Vehicle with Manual transmission:

1. Always carry the smart key with

you.

2. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

3. Make sure the shift lever is in neu-

tral.

4. Depress the clutch and brake ped-

als.

5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton.

6. Continue depressing the brake

pedal until the glow indicator light

() goes out.

7. When the glow indicator light ( )

goes out, the engine will start.

When you start to drive, move the

shift lever after checking the

RPM(revolutions per minute) is in the

proper range (under 1000 rpm) by

depressing the clutch pedal and

brake pedal.

After releasing the parking brake,

take your foot off the clutch and

depress the accelerator slowly while

starting your vehicle.

6-16

While Driving

Vehicle with Automatic Transmission:

1. Always carry the smart key with

you.

2. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

3. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

4. Depress the brake pedal.

5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton.

6. Continue depressing the brake

pedal until the glow indicator light

() goes out.

7. When the glow indicator light ( )

goes out, the engine will start.

When you start to drive, move the

shift lever after checking the

RPM(revolutions per minute) is in the

proper range (under 1000 rpm) by

depressing the clutch pedal and

brake pedal.

After releasing the parking brake,

take your foot off the clutch and

depress the accelerator slowly while

starting your vehicle.

i Information

If the Engine Start/Stop button is

pressed while the engine is pre-heating,

the engine may start.

Starting and stopping the engine for

turbocharger intercooler

1. Do not race or accelerate the

engine immediately after starting

the engine.

If the engine is cold, idle for several

seconds before sufficient lubrica-

tion is ensured in the turbo charger

unit.

2. After high speed or extended driv-

ing that requires heavy engine

load, idle the engine about one

minute before turning the engine

off. This idle time will allow the tur-

bocharger to cool prior to shutting

the engine off.

NOTICE

Do not turn off the engine immedi-

ately after it has been subjected to

a heavy load. Doing so may cause

severe damage to the engine or

turbo charger unit.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

• If the engine stalls while you are

in motion, do not attempt to

move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position.

If traffic and road conditions

permit, you may put the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) position

while the vehicle is still moving

and press the Engine Start/Stop

button in an attempt to restart

the engine.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle

to start the engine.

6-17

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

When the stop light fuse is blown,

you can’t start the engine normal-

ly. Replace the fuse with a new

one. If you are not able to replace

the fuse, you can start the engine

by pressing and holding the

Engine Start/Stop button for 10

seconds with the Engine Start/

Stop button in the ACC position.

Do not press the Engine Start/Stop

button for more than 10 seconds

except when the stop light fuse is

blown.

For your safety always depress the

brake and/or clutch pedal before

starting the engine.

Emergency starting

OSU2I062002

If the smart key battery is weak or the

smart key does not work correctly,

you can start the engine by pressing

the Engine Start/Stop button with the

smart key in the direction of the illus-

tration above.

6-18

While Driving

OSU2I069060

The shift lever can be moved

without pressing the button (1).

The button (1) must be pressed

while moving the shift lever to R

(Reverse).

Manual transmission operation

The manual transmission has 6 for-

ward gears. The transmission is fully

synchronized in all forward gears so

shifting to either a higher or a lower

gear is easily accomplished

WARNING

Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever is

in 1st gear when the vehicle is

parked on a uphill and in R

(Reverse) on a downhill, set the

parking brake, and place the igni-

tion switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-

tion. Unexpected vehicle move-

ment may occur if these

precautions are not followed.

To shift to R (Reverse), make sure

the vehicle has completely stopped,

and then move the shift lever to neu-

tral before moving into R (Reverse).

When you’ve come to a complete

stop and it’s hard to shift into 1st gear

or R (Reverse):

1. Put the shift lever in neutral and

release the clutch pedal.

2. Depress the clutch pedal, and then

shift into first or R (Reverse) gear.

i Information

During cold weather, shifting may be

difficult until the transmission lubri-

cant has warmed up.

0$18$/75$160,66,21ǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

6-19

Using the clutch (if equipped)

The clutch pedal should be depressed

all the way to the floor before:

- Starting the engine

The engine will not start without

depressing the clutch pedal.

- Shifting

To start your vehicle, slowly

release the clutch pedal and

depress the accelerator.

When releasing the clutch pedal,

release it slowly. The clutch pedal

should always be released while driv-

ing.

NOTICE

To prevent unnecessary wear or

damage to the clutch:

• Do not rest your foot on the

clutch pedal while driving.

• Do not hold the vehicle with the

clutch on an incline, while wait-

ing for the traffic light, etc.

• Always depress the clutch pedal

down fully to prevent noise or

damage.

• Do not start with the 2nd (sec-

ond) gear engaged except when

you start on a slippery road.

• Depress the clutch pedal all the

way and be careful not to

depress the pedal again before

returning to the upright position

after you release the pedal. If

you depress the pedal before

returning to the original position

repeatedly, it may cause the

clutch system failure.

Downshifting

Downshift when you must slow down

in heavy traffic or drive up a steep hill

to prevent engine load.

Also, downshifting reduces the

chance of stalling and can accelerate

when you need to increase your

speed again.

When the vehicle is going downhill,

downshifting helps maintain safe

speed by providing brake power from

the engine and enables less wear on

the brakes.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the engine,

clutch and transmission:

• When downshifting from 5th

gear to 4th gear, be careful not

to inadvertently push the shift

lever sideways engaging the

2nd gear. A drastic downshift

may cause the engine speed to

increase to the point the

tachometer will enter the red-

zone.

• Do not downshift more than two

gear at a time or downshift the

gear when the engine is running

at high speed (5,000 RPM or

higher). Such a downshifting

may damage the engine, clutch

and the transmission.

6-20

While Driving

Good driving practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear

and coast down a hill. This is

extremely dangerous.

• Don’t “ride” the brakes. This can

cause the brakes and related parts

to overheat and malfunction.

When you are driving down a long

hill, slow down and shift to a lower

gear. Engine braking will help slow

down the vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to a

lower gear. This will help avoid

over-revving the engine, which can

cause damage.

• Slow down when you encounter

cross winds. This gives you much

better control of your vehicle.

• Be sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before you shift into R

(Reverse) to prevent damage to

the transmission.

• Exercise extreme caution when

driving on a slippery surface. Be

especially careful when braking,

accelerating or shifting gears. On a

slippery surface, an abrupt change

in vehicle speed can cause the

drive wheels to lose traction and

may cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident.

WARNING

Do not use the engine brake (shift-

ing from a higher gear to lower

gear) rapidly on slippery roads.

The vehicle may slip causing an

accident.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt. In

a collision, an unbelted occu-

pant is significantly more likely

to be seriously injured or killed

than a properly belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as

sharp lane changes or fast,

sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over

steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharp-

ly. Instead, slow down before

pulling back into the travel

lanes.

• HYUNDAI recommends you fol-

low all posted speed limits.

6-21

'8$/&/87&+75$160,66,21ǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

OSU2I069003

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift button while moving the shift lever.

Press the shift button while moving the shift lever.

Move shift lever.

6-22

While Driving

Dual clutch transmission oper-

ation

The dual clutch transmission has

seven forward speeds and one

reverse speed.

The individual speeds are selected

automatically when the shift lever is

in the D (Drive) position.

• The dual clutch transmission can

be thought of as an automatically

shifting manual transmission. It

gives the driving feel of a manual

transmission, yet provides the

ease of a fully automatic transmis-

sion.

• When D (Drive) is selected, the

transmission will automatically

shift through the gears similar to a

conventional automatic transmis-

sion. Unlike a traditional automatic

transmission, the gear shifting can

sometimes be felt and heard as the

actuators engage the clutches and

the gears are selected.

• The dual clutch transmission incor-

porates a dry-type dual clutch

mechanism, which allows for bet-

ter acceleration performance and

increased fuel efficiency while driv-

ing. But it differs from a conven-

tional automatic transmission

because it does not incorporate a

torque converter. Instead, the tran-

sition from one gear to the next is

managed by clutch slip, especially

at lower speeds.

As a result, shifts are sometimes

more noticeable, and a light vibra-

tion can be felt as the transmission

shaft speed is matched with the

engine shaft speed. This is a nor-

mal condition of the dual clutch

transmission.

• The dry-type clutch transfers

torque more directly and provides

a direct-drive feeling which may

feel different from a conventional

automatic transmission. This may

be more noticeable when launch-

ing the vehicle from a stop or when

traveling at low, stop-and-go vehi-

cle speeds.

• When rapidly accelerating from a

lower vehicle speed, the engine

rpm may increase dramatically as

a result of clutch slip as the dual

clutch transmission selects the

correct gear. This is a normal con-

dition.

• When accelerating from a stop on

an incline, press the accelerator

smoothly and gradually to avoid

any shudder feeling or jerkiness.

• When traveling at a lower vehicle

speed, if you release the accelerator

pedal quickly, you may feel engine

braking before the transmission

changes gears. This engine braking

feeling is similar to operating a man-

ual transmission at low speed.

• When driving downhill, you may

wish to move the gear shift lever to

Manual Shift mode and downshift

to a lower gear in order to control

your speed without using the brake

pedal excessively.

• When you turn the engine on and

off, you may hear clicking sounds

as the system goes through a self-

test. This is a normal sound for the

dual clutch transmission.

• During the first 1,500 km (1000

miles), you may feel that the vehi-

cle may not be smooth when accel-

erating at low speed. During this

break-in period, the shift quality

and performance of your new vehi-

cle is continuously optimized.

6-23

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury

or death:

• ALWAYS check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for peo-

ple, especially children, before

shifting a vehicle into D (Drive)

or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position, then

set the parking brake, and place

the ignition switch in the LOCK/

OFF position. Unexpected and

sudden vehicle movement can

occur if these precautions are

not followed.

• Do not use aggressive engine

braking (shifting from a higher

gear to a lower gear) on slippery

roads. This could cause the tires

to slip and may result in an acci-

dent.

NOTICE

• Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into D (Drive) or

R (Reverse).

• Do not put the shift lever in N

(Neutral) while driving.

WARNING

If the transmission cannot shift

into Drive or Reverse, the position

indicator D or R) on the cluster will

blink. We recommend that you

contact an authorized Hyundai

dealer to have the system checked.

DCT warning messages

This warning message is displayed

when vehicle is driven slowly on a

grade and the vehicle detects that the

brake pedal is not applied.

OOSH069010L

Steep grade

Driving up hills or on steep grades:

• To hold the vehicle on an incline

use the foot brake or the parking

brake.

• When in stop-and-go traffic on an

incline, allow a gap to form ahead

of you before moving the vehicle

forward. Then hold the vehicle on

the incline with the foot brake.

• If the vehicle is held on a hill by

applying the accelerator pedal or

by creeping with the brake pedal

disengaged, the clutch and trans-

mission may overheat which can

result in damage. At this time, a

warning message will appear on

the cluster display.

• If the cluster display warning is

active, the foot brake must be

applied.

• Ignoring the warnings can lead to

damage to the transmission.

6-24

While Driving

OOSH069012L

Transmission high temperature

• Under certain conditions, such as

repeated stop-and-go launches on

steep grades, sudden take off or

acceleration, or other harsh driving

conditions, the transmission clutch

temperatures will increase exces-

sively.

• When the clutch is overheated, the

safe protection mode engages and

the gear position indicator on the

cluster blinks with a chime. At this

time, “Transmission temp. is high!

Stop safely” warning message will

appear on the cluster display and

driving may not be smooth.

• If this occurs, pull over to a safe

location, stop the vehicle with the

engine running, apply the brakes

and shift the vehicle to P (Park)

with engine on, and allow the

transmission to cool.

• If you ignore this warning, the driv-

ing condition may become worse.

You may experience abrupt shifts,

frequent shifts, or jerkiness. To

return to the normal driving condi-

tion, stop the vehicle and apply the

foot brake or shift into P (Park).

Then allow the transmission to

cool for a few minutes with engine

on, before driving off.

• When possible, drive the vehicle

smoothly.

OOSH069007L/OOSH069013L



Type A



Type B

OOSH069014L

Transmission overheated

• If the vehicle continues to be driv-

en and the clutch temperatures

reach the maximum temperature

limit, the “Trans Hot! Park with

engine on” warning will be dis-

played. When this occurs the

clutch is disabled until the clutch

cools to normal temperatures.

• The warning will display a time to

wait for the transmission to cool.

6-25

• If this occurs, pull over to a safe

location, stop the vehicle with the

engine running, apply the brakes

and shift the vehicle to P (Park)

with engine on, and allow the

transmission to cool.

• When the message “Trans cooled.

Resume driving.” appears you can

continue to drive your vehicle.

• When possible, drive the vehicle

smoothly.

If any of the warning messages in the

cluster display continue to blink, for

your safety, we recommend you con-

tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

and have the system checked.

Transmission ranges

The indicator in the instrument cluster

displays the shift lever position when

the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into P (Park).

To shift from P (Park), you must

depress firmly on the brake pedal and

make sure your foot is off the acceler-

ator pedal.

The shift lever must be in P (Park)

before turning the engine off.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion may cause

you to lose control of the vehicle.

• After the vehicle has stopped,

always make sure the shift lever

is in P (Park), apply the parking

brake, and turn the engine off.

• When parking on an incline,

block the wheels to prevent the

vehicle from rolling down.

• For safety, always engage the

parking brake with the shift lever

in the P (Park) position except

for the case of emergency park-

ing.

6-26

While Driving

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

NOTICE

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the

transmission if you shift into R

(Reverse) while the vehicle is in

motion.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not

engaged.

Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart

a stalled engine, or if it is necessary

to stop with the engine ON. Shift into

P (Park) if you need to leave your

vehicle for any reason.

Always depress the brake pedal

when you are shifting from N (Neutral)

to another gear.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position.

The transmission will automatically

shift through a 7-gear sequence, pro-

viding the best fuel economy and

power.

For extra power when passing anoth-

er vehicle or driving uphill, depress

the accelerator fully. The transmis-

sion will automatically downshift to

the next lower gear (or gears, as

appropriate).

The DRIVE MODE switch, located on

the shift lever console, allows the

driver to switch from COMFORT

mode to SPORT mode.

For more details, refer to “Drive

Mode Integrated Control System”

later in this chapter.

OSU2I069004

Manual shift mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in

motion, manual shift mode is select-

ed by pushing the shift lever from the

D (Drive) position into the manual

gate. To return to D (Drive) range

operation, push the shift lever back

into the main gate.

In manual shift mode, moving the

shift lever backwards and forwards

will allow you to make gearshifts rap-

idly.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once

to shift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards

once to shift down one

gear.

6-27

i Information

• Only the seven forward gears can be

selected. To reverse or park the

vehicle, move the shift lever to the R

(Reverse) or P (Park) position as

required.

• Downshifts are made automatically

when the vehicle slows down. When

the vehicle stops, 1st gear is auto-

matically selected.

• When the engine rpm approaches

the red zone the transmission will

upshift automatically.

• If the driver presses the lever to +

(Up) or - (Down) position, the trans-

mission may not make the requested

gear change if the next gear is out-

side of the allowable engine rpm

range. The driver must execute

upshifts in accordance with road

conditions, taking care to keep the

engine rpms below the red zone.

Paddle shifter (if equipped)

OSU2I069015

The paddle shifter is available when

the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi-

tion or the manual shift mode.

With the shift lever in the D position

The paddle shifter will operate when

the vehicle speed is more than

10km/h.

Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once

to shift up or down one gear and the

system changes from automatic

mode to manual mode.

When the vehicle speed is lower than

10km/h, if you depress the accelera-

tor pedal for more than 5 seconds or

if you move the shift lever from D

(Drive) to manual shift mode and

move it from manual shift mode to D

(Drive) again, the system changes

from manual mode to automatic

mode.

6-28

While Driving

Shift-lock system

For your safety, the dual clutch trans-

mission has a shift-lock system which

prevents shifting the transmission

from P (Park) into R (Reverse) unless

the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transmission from P

(Park) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine or place the igni-

tion switch in the ON position.

3. Move the shift lever.

Parking

Always come to a complete stop and

continue to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position, apply the parking brake, and

place the ignition switch in the LOCK/

OFF position. Take the Key with you

when exiting the vehicle.

WARNING

When you stay in the vehicle with

the engine running, be careful not

to depress the accelerator pedal

for a long period of time. The

engine or exhaust system may

overheat and start a fire.

The exhaust gas and the exhaust

system are very hot. Keep away

from the exhaust system compo-

nents.

Do not stop or park over flamma-

ble materials, such as dry grass,

paper or leaves. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

6-29

Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other

position with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

• Never move the shift lever into P

(Park) when the vehicle is in

motion.

Be sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before you attempt to shift

into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Do not move the shift lever to N

(Neutral) when driving. Doing so

may result in an accident because

of a loss of engine braking and the

transmission could be damaged.

• Do not drive with your foot resting

on the brake pedal. Even light, but

consistent pedal pressure can

result in the brakes overheating,

brake wear and possibly even

brake failure.

• Depressing both accelerator and

brake pedals at the same time can

trigger logic for engine power

reduction to assure vehicle decel-

eration. Vehicle acceleration will

resume after the brake pedal is

released.

• When driving in Manual shift mode,

slow down before shifting to a

lower gear. Otherwise, the lower

gear may not be engaged if the

engine rpms are outside of the

allowable range.

• Always apply the parking brake

when leaving the vehicle. Do not

depend on placing the transmis-

sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle

from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when

driving on a slippery surface. Be

especially careful when braking,

accelerating or shifting gears. On a

slippery surface, an abrupt change

in vehicle speed can cause the

drive wheels to lose traction and

may cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident

• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothly

depressing and releasing the

accelerator.

6-30

While Driving

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt. In

a collision, an unbelted occu-

pant is significantly more likely

to be seriously injured or killed

than a properly belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as

sharp lane changes or fast,

sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over

steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharp-

ly. Instead, slow down before

pulling back into the travel

lanes.

• HYUNDAI recommends you fol-

low all posted speed limits.

Information

- Kickdown Mechanism

(if equipped)

Use the kickdown mechanism for max-

imum acceleration. Depress the accel-

erator pedal beyond the pressure point.

The automatic transmission will shift

to a lower gear depending on the engine

speed.

6-31

Depress the brake pedal, press the shift button, and then move shift lever.

Press the shift button, then move shift lever.

Move shift lever.

Automatic transmission operation

The automatic transmission has six forward speeds and one reverse speed.

The individual speeds are selected automatically in the D (Drive) position.

The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

$8720$7,&75$160,66,21ǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

OSU2I069013

6-32

While Driving

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury

or death:

• ALWAYS check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for peo-

ple, especially children, before

shifting a vehicle into D (Drive)

or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position, then

set the parking brake, and place

the ignition switch in the LOCK/

OFF position. Unexpected and

sudden vehicle movement can

occur if these precautions are

not followed.

• Do not use the engine brake

(shifting from a high gear to

lower gear) rapidly on slippery

roads. The vehicle may slip

causing an accident.

Shift lever position

The indicator in the instrument cluster

displays the shift lever position when

the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into P (Park).

To shift from P (Park), you must

depress firmly on the brake pedal and

make sure your foot is off the acceler-

ator pedal.

The shift lever must be in P (Park)

before turning the engine off.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion may cause

you to lose control of the vehi-

cle.

• After the vehicle has stopped,

always make sure the shift lever

is in P (Park), apply the parking

brake, and turn the engine off.

• When parking on an incline,

place the shift lever in P (Park)

and apply the parking brake to

prevent the vehicle from rolling

downhill.

• For safety, always engage the

parking brake with the shift lever

in the P (Park) position except

for the case of emergency park-

ing.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

NOTICE

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the

transmission if you shift into R

(Reverse) while the vehicle is in

motion.

6-33

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not

engaged.

Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart

a stalled engine, or if it is necessary

to stop with the engine ON. Shift into

P (Park) if you need to leave your

vehicle for any reason.

Always depress the brake pedal

when you are shifting from N (Neutral)

to another gear.

WARNING

Do not shift into gear unless your

foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

Shifting into gear when the engine

is running at high speed can cause

the vehicle to move very rapidly.

You could lose control of the vehi-

cle and hit people or objects.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position.

The transmission will automatically

shift through a 6-gear sequence, pro-

viding the best fuel economy and

power.

For extra power when passing anoth-

er vehicle or driving uphill, depress

the accelerator fully. The transmis-

sion will automatically downshift to

the next lower gear (or gears, as

appropriate).

The DRIVE MODE switch, located on

the shift lever console, allows the

driver to switch from COMFORT

mode to SPORT mode.

For more details, refer to “Drive

Mode Integrated Control System”

later in this chapter.

Manual shift mode

OSU2I069014

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in

motion, manual shift mode is select-

ed by pushing the shift lever from the

D (Drive) position into the manual

gate. To return to D (Drive) range

operation, push the shift lever back

into the main gate.

In manual shift mode, moving the

shift lever backwards and forwards

will allow you to select the desired

range of gears for the current driving

conditions.

+ (Up): Push the lever forward once

to shift up one gear.

- (Down): Pull the lever backwards

once to shift down one gear.

6-34

While Driving

i Information

• Only the six forward gears can be

selected. To reverse or park the

vehicle, move the shift lever to the R

(Reverse) or P (Park) position as

required.

• Downshifts are made automatically

when the vehicle slows down. When

the vehicle stops, 1st gear is auto-

matically selected.

• When the engine rpm approaches

the red zone the transmission will

upshift automatically.

• If the driver presses the lever to +

(Up) or - (Down) position, the trans-

mission may not make the requested

gear change if the next gear is out-

side of the allowable engine rpm

range. The driver must execute

upshifts in accordance with road

conditions, taking care to keep the

engine rpms below the red zone.

• When driving on a slippery road,

push the shift lever forward into the

+ (Up) position. This causes the

transmission to shift into the 2nd

gear which is better for smooth

driving on a slippery road. Push the

shift lever to the - (Down) side to

shift back to the 1st gear.

Paddle shifter (if equipped)

OSU2I069015

The paddle shifter is available when

the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi-

tion or the manual shift mode.

With the shift lever in the D position

The paddle shifter will operate when

the vehicle speed is more than

10km/h.

Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once

to shift up or down one gear and the

system changes from automatic

mode to manual mode.

When the vehicle speed is lower than

10km/h, if you depress the accelera-

tor pedal for more than 5 seconds or

if you move the shift lever from D

(Drive) to manual shift mode and

move it from manual shift mode to D

(Drive) again, the system changes

from manual mode to automatic

mode.

6-35

Automatic transmission warning

messages

OAC3069032TU

Transmission high temperature

• Under certain conditions, such as

repeated stop-and go launches on

steep grades, sudden take off or

acceleration, or other harsh driving

conditions, the transmission clutch

temperatures will increase exces-

sively. Finally the clutch in trans-

mission could be overheated.

• When the clutch is overheated, the

safe protection mode engages and

the gear position indicator on the

cluster blinks with a chime. At this

time, “Transmission temp. is high!

Stop safely” warning message will

appear on the cluster display and

driving may not be smooth.

• If this occurs, pull over to a safe

location, stop the vehicle with the

engine running, apply the brakes

and shift the vehicle to P (Park),

and allow the transmission to cool.

• If you ignore this warning, the driv-

ing condition may become worse.

You may experience abrupt shifts,

or Jerkiness. To return to the nor-

mal driving condition, stop the vehi-

cle and apply the foot brake or shift

into P (Park). Then allow the trans-

mission to cool for a few minutes

with engine on, before driving off.

• When possible, drive the vehicle

smoothly.

OJS058137L/OJS058138L

Transmission overheated

• If the vehicle continues to be driv-

en and the clutch temperatures

reach the maximum temperature

limit, the “Transmission Hot! Park

with engine on” warning will be dis-

played. When this occurs the

clutch is disabled until the clutch

cools to normal temperatures.

• The warning will display a time to

wait for the transmission to cool.

• If this occurs, pull over to a safe

location, stop the vehicle with the

engine running, apply the brakes

and shift the vehicle to P (Park),

and allow the transmission to cool.

• When the message “Transmission

cooled down. Resume driving

(Trans cooled. Resume driving)”

appears you can continue to drive

your vehicle.

• When possible, drive the vehicle

smoothly.

• If any of the warning messages in

the cluster display continue to

blink, for your safety, we recom-

mend that you contact an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer and have

the system checked.

6-36

While Driving

Shift-lock system

For your safety, the automatic trans-

mission has a shift-lock system which

prevents shifting the transmission

from P (Park) into R (Reverse) unless

the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transmission from P

(Park) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine or place the igni-

tion switch in the ON position.

3. Move the shift lever.

Parking

Always come to a complete stop and

continue to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position, apply the parking brake, and

place the ignition switch in the LOCK/

OFF position. Take the Key with you

when exiting the vehicle.

WARNING

When you stay in the vehicle with

the engine running, be careful not

to depress the accelerator pedal

for a long period of time. The

engine or exhaust system may

overheat and start a fire.

The exhaust gas and the exhaust

system are very hot. Keep away

from the exhaust system compo-

nents.

Do not stop or park over flamma-

ble materials, such as dry grass,

paper or leaves. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other

position with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

• Never move the shift lever into P

(Park) when the vehicle is in

motion.

Be sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before you attempt to shift

into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Do not move the shift lever to N

(Neutral) when driving. Doing so

may result in an accident because

of a loss of engine braking and the

transmission could be damaged.

• Do not drive with your foot resting

on the brake pedal. Even light, but

consistent pedal pressure can

result in the brakes overheating,

brake wear and possibly even

brake failure.

• When driving in manual shift mode,

slow down before shifting to a

lower gear. Otherwise, the lower

gear may not be engaged if the

engine rpms are outside of the

allowable range.

• Always apply the parking brake

when leaving the vehicle. Do not

depend on placing the transmis-

sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle

from moving.

6-37

• Exercise extreme caution when

driving on a slippery surface. Be

especially careful when braking,

accelerating or shifting gears. On a

slippery surface, an abrupt change

in vehicle speed can cause the

drive wheels to lose traction and

may cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident

• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothly

depressing and releasing the

accelerator.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt. In

a collision, an unbelted occu-

pant is significantly more likely

to be seriously injured or killed

than a properly belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as

sharp lane changes or fast,

sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over

steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharp-

ly. Instead, slow down before

pulling back into the travel

lanes.

• HYUNDAI recommends you fol-

low all posted speed limits.

Information

- Kickdown Mechanism

(if equipped)

Use the kickdown mechanism for max-

imum acceleration. Depress the accel-

erator pedal beyond the pressure point.

The automatic transmission will shift

to a lower gear depending on the engine

speed.

6-38

While Driving

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted

brakes that adjust automatically

through normal usage.

If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work. You can still

stop your vehicle by applying greater

force to the brake pedal than typical.

The stopping distance, however, will

be longer than with power brakes.

When the engine is not running, the

reserve brake power is partially deplet-

ed each time the brake pedal is

applied. Do not pump the brake pedal

when the power assist has been inter-

rupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when nec-

essary to maintain steering control on

slippery surfaces.

i Information

• When the brake pedal is depressed

under certain driving conditions or

weather conditions, you may tempo-

rarily hear a noise. This is normal

and does not indicate a problem

with your brakes.

• While driving on a road with deic-

ing chemicals, brake noise or abnor-

mal tire wear may occur due to deic-

ing chemicals. In a safe traffic

condition, additionally apply the

brakes to remove deicing chemicals

on the brake discs and pads.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

• Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This will

create abnomally high brake

temperatures, excessive brake

lining and pad wear, and

increased stopping distances.

• When descending a long or

steep hill, shift to a lower gear

and avoid continuous applica-

tion of the brakes. Applying the

brakes continuously will cause

the brakes to overheat and could

result in a temporary loss of

braking performance.

• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-

cle’s ability to safely slow down;

the vehicle may also pull to one

side when the brakes are

applied. Applying the brakes

lightly will indicate whether they

have been affected in this way.

Always test your brakes in this

fashion after driving through

deep water. To dry the brakes,

lightly tap the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes while main-

taining a safe forward speed

until brake performance returns

to normal. Avoid driving at high

speeds until the brakes function

correctly.

Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and

new pads are required, you will hear

a high pitched warning sound from

your front or rear brakes. You may

hear this sound come and go or it

may occur whenever you depress the

brake pedal.

NOTICE

To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn

brake pads.

i Information

Always replace brake pads as complete

front or rear axle sets.

BRAKING SYSTEM

6-39

Rear drum brakes

Your rear drum brakes do not have

wear indicators.Therefore, have the

rear brake linings inspected if you

hear a rear brake rubbing noise. Also

have your rear brakes inspected each

time you change or rotate your tires

and when you have the front brakes

replaced.

Parking brake (hand type)

OSU2I089012

Always set the parking brake before

leaving the vehicle, to apply:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Pull up the parking brake lever as far

as possible.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, do not operate

the parking brake while the vehicle

is moving except in an emergency

situation. It could damage the

brake system and lead to an acci-

dent.

OSU2I089013

To release:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Slightly pull up the parking brake

lever.

While pressing the release button (1),

lower the parking brake (2).

If the parking brake does not release

or does not release all the way, we

recommend that the system be

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

WARNING

• Whenever leaving the vehicle or

parking, always come to a com-

plete stop and continue to

depress the brake pedal. Move

the shift lever into the 1st gear

(for Manual transmission vehi-

cle) or P (Park, for Dual Clutch

Transmission/Automatic

Transmission vehicle) position,

then apply the parking brake,

and place the ignition switch in

the LOCK/OFF position.

Vehicles with the parking brake

not fully engaged are at risk for

moving inadvertently and caus-

ing injury to yourself or others.

6-40

While Driving

• NEVER allow anyone who is

unfamiliar with the vehicle to

touch the parking brake. If the

parking brake is released unin-

tentionally, serious injury may

occur.

• Only release the parking brake

when you are seated inside the

vehicle with your foot firmly on

the brake pedal.

NOTICE

• Do not apply the accelerator

pedal while the parking brake is

engaged. If you depress the

accelerator pedal with the park-

ing brake engaged, warning will

sound. Damage to the parking

brake may occur.

• Driving with the parking brake

on can overheat the braking

system and cause premature

wear or damage to brake parts.

Make sure the parking brake is

released and the Brake Warning

Light is off before driving.

Parking brake warning light

Check the Parking Brake

Warning Light by placing

the ignition switch to the

ON position (do not start

the engine).

This light will be illuminated when the

parking brake is applied with the igni-

tion switch in the START or ON posi-

tion.

Before driving, be sure the parking

brake is released and the Brake

Warning Light is OFF.

If the Parking Brake Warning Light

remains on after the parking brake is

released while engine is running,

there may be a malfunction in the

brake system. Immediate attention is

necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the

vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-

sible, use extreme caution while

operating the vehicle and only contin-

ue to drive the vehicle until you can

reach a safe location.

6-41

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)

(if equipped)

Applying the parking brake

OSU2I069016



Type A



Type B

OSU2I069017

To apply the EPB

(Electronic Parking Brake):

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Pull up the EPB switch.

Make sure the Parking Brake Warning

Light comes on.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, do not operate

the EPB while the vehicle is mov-

ing except in an emergency situa-

tion. It could damage the brake

system and lead to an accident.

Releasing the parking brake

OSU2I069018



Type A



Type B

OSU2I069019

To release the EPB (Electronic

Parking Brake), press the EPB

switch in the following condition:

• Place the Engine Start/Stop button

in the ON position.

• Depress the brake pedal.

Make sure the Parking Brake Warning

Light goes off.

6-42

While Driving

To release EPB (Electronic Parking

Brake) automatically:

• Shift lever in P (Park)

With the engine running depress

the brake pedal and shift out of P

(Park) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Shift lever in N (Neutral)

With the engine running depress

the brake pedal and shift out of N

(Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D

(Drive).

• Dual Clutch Transmission/

Automatic Transmission vehicle

1. Start the engine.

2. Fasten the driver’s seat belt.

3. Close the driver’s door, engine

hood and tailgate.

4. Depress the accelerator pedal

while the shift button is in R

(Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Manual transmission vehicle

1. Ensure seat belts are fastened

and the doors, hood and tailgate

are closed.

2. With the engine running, depress

the clutch pedal and move the

shift lever to 1 (First) gear or R

(Reverse).

3. Depress the accelerator pedal

while releasing the clutch pedal.

i Information

• For your safety, you can engage the

EPB even though the Engine Stop/

Start button is in the OFF position,

but you cannot release it.

• For your safety, depress the brake

pedal and release the parking brake

manually with the EPB switch when

you drive downhill or when backing

up the vehicle.

Information

- Manual transmission

A vehicle towing a trailer on a hill or on

an incline may slightly roll backwards

when starting the vehicle. To prevent

the situation follow the below instruc-

tions.

1. Depress the clutch pedal and select

a gear.

2. Keep pulling up the EPB switch.

3. Depress the accelerator pedal and

slowly release the clutch pedal.

4. If the vehicle starts off with enough

driving power release the EPB

switch.

Do not follow the above procedure

when driving on a flat level ground.

The vehicle may suddenly move for-

ward.

6-43

NOTICE

• If the parking brake warning

light is still on even though the

EPB has been released, we rec-

ommend that the system be

checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not drive your vehicle with

the EPB applied. It may cause

excessive brake pad and brake

rotor wear.

EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)

may be automatically applied when:

• Requested by other systems

• If the driver turns the engine off

while Auto Hold is operating, EPB

will be automatically applied.

Warning messages

OSU2I069020

To release EPB, close the doors,

hood and tailgate and fasten seatbelt

• If you try to drive with the EPB

applied, a warning will sound and a

message will appear.

• If the driver’s seat belt is unfas-

tened and the engine hood or tail-

gate is opened, a warning will

sound and a message will appear.

• If there is a problem with the vehi-

cle, a warning may sound and a

message may appear.

If the situation occurs, depress the

brake pedal and release EPB by

pressing the EPB switch.

6-44

While Driving

WARNING

• Whenever leaving the vehicle or

parking, always come to a com-

plete stop and continue to

depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the P

(Park) position, press the EPB

switch, and press the Engine

Start/Stop button to the OFF

position. Take the Smart Key

with you when exiting the vehi-

cle.

Vehicles not fully engaged in P

(Park) with the parking brake set

are at risk for moving inadver-

tently and causing injury to

yourself or others.

• NEVER allow anyone who is

unfamiliar with the vehicle to

touch the EPB switch. If the EPB

is released unintentionally, seri-

ous injury may occur.

• Only release the EPB when you

are seated inside the vehicle

with your foot firmly on the

brake pedal.

NOTICE

• Do not apply the accelerator

pedal while the parking brake is

engaged. If you depress the

accelerator pedal with the EPB

engaged, a warning will sound

and a message will appear.

Damage to the parking brake

may occur.

• Driving with the parking brake

on can overheat the braking

system and cause premature

wear or damage to brake parts.

Make sure the EPB is released

and the Parking Brake Warning

Light is off before driving.

i Information

• A clicking sound may be heard while

operating or releasing the EPB.

These conditions are normal and

indicate that the EPB is functioning

properly.

• When leaving your keys with a

parking attendant or assistant,

make sure to inform him/her how to

operate the EPB.

OSU2I069032

Deactivating AUTO HOLD...

Press brake pedal

When the conversion from Auto Hold

to EPB is not working properly a

warning will sound and a message

will appear.

6-45

OSU2I069030/OSU2I069029



Type A



Type B



Type C

OJX1069066L

Parking brake automatically applied

If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold

is activated, a warning will sound and

a message will appear.

EPB malfunction indicator

(if equipped)

OSU2I069022/OSU2I069023



Type A



Type B

This warning light illuminates if the

Engine Start/Stop button is changed

to the ON position and goes off in

approximately 3 seconds if the sys-

tem is operating normally.

If the EPB malfunction indicator

remains on, comes on while driving,

or does not come on when the Engine

Start/Stop button is changed to the

ON position, this indicates that the

EPB may have malfunctioned.

If this occurs, we recommend that the

system be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

The EPB malfunction indicator may

illuminate when the ESC indicator

comes on to indicate that the ESC is

not working properly, but it does not

indicate a malfunction of the EPB.

6-46

While Driving

NOTICE

• If the EPB warning light is still

on, we recommend that the sys-

tem be checked by an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the parking brake warning

light does not illuminate or

blinks even though the EPB

switch was pulled up, the EPB

may not be applied.

• If the parking brake warning

light blinks when the EPB warn-

ing light is on, press the switch,

and then pull it up. Repeat this

one more time. If the EPB warn-

ing does not go off, we recom-

mend that the system be

checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Emergency braking

If there is a problem with the brake

pedal while driving, emergency brak-

ing is possible by pulling up and hold-

ing the EPB switch. Braking is possi-

ble only while you are holding the

EPB switch. However, braking dis-

tance will be longer than normal.

WARNING

Do not operate the parking brake

while the vehicle is moving except

in an emergency situation. It could

damage the brake system and lead

to a severe accident.

i Information

During emergency braking, the park-

ing brake warning light will illuminate

to indicate that the system is operating.

NOTICE

If you continuously notice a noise

or burning smell when the EPB is

used for emergency braking, we

recommend that the system be

checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

When the EPB (Electronic Parking

Brake) does not release

If the EPB does not release normally,

we recommend that you contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer by load-

ing the vehicle on a flatbed tow truck

and have the system checked.

6-47

AUTO HOLD (if equipped)

The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle

in a standstill even though the brake

pedal is not depressed, after the driv-

er brings the vehicle to a complete

stop by depressing the brake pedal.

To apply :

OSU2I069024



Type A



Type B

OSU2I069025

1. With the driver’s door, engine hood

closed, depress the brake pedal

and then press the [AUTO HOLD]

switch. The white AUTO HOLD

indicator will come on and the sys-

tem will be in the standby position.

OSU2I069026

2. When you stop the vehicle com-

pletely by depressing the brake

pedal, the Auto Hold maintains the

brake pressure to hold the vehicle

stationary. The indicator changes

from white to green.

3. The vehicle will remain stationary

even if you release the brake

pedal.

4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be

released.

White

Green

6-48

While Driving

To release :

• If you press the accelerator pedal

with the shift lever in D (Drive), R

(Reverse) or manual shift mode,

the Auto Hold will be released

automatically and the vehicle will

start to move. The AUTO HOLD

indicator changes from green to

white.

• If the vehicle is restarted using the

cruise control toggle switch (RES+

or SET-) while Auto Hold and

cruise control is operating, the

Auto Hold will be released regard-

less of accelerator pedal opera-

tion. The AUTO HOLD indicator

changes from green to white. (if

equipped with cruise control sys-

tem)

WARNING

When the AUTO HOLD is automat-

ically released by depressing the

accelerator pedal, always take a

look around your vehicle.

Slowly depress the accelerator

pedal for a smooth start.

To cancel :

OSU2I069027



Type A



Type B

OSU2I069028

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press the [AUTO HOLD] switch.

The AUTO HOLD indicator will turn

off.

WARNING

To prevent, unexpected and sud-

den vehicle movement, ALWAYS

press your foot on the brake pedal

to cancel the Auto Hold before

you:

- Drive downhill.

- Drive the vehicle in R (Reverse).

- Park the vehicle.

Light off

6-49

i Information

• Auto Hold does not operate when:

- Driver’s door is opened

- The engine hood is opened

- The shift lever is in P (Park) or R

(Reverse)

- The EPB is applied

• For your safety, Auto Hold automat-

ically switches to EPB when:

- Driver’s door is opened

- The engine hood is opened

- The vehicle stops for more than 10

minutes

- The vehicle stands on a steep slope

- The vehicle moves several times

In these cases, the parking brake

warning light comes on, the AUTO

HOLD indicator changes from

green to white, and a warning sound

and a message will appear to inform

you that EPB has been automatical-

ly engaged. Before driving off again,

press the foot brake pedal, check the

surrounding area near your vehicle

and release the parking brake man-

ually with the EPB switch.

• While Auto Hold is operating, you

may hear mechanical noise.

However, it is normal operating

noise.

NOTICE

If the AUTO HOLD indicator chang-

es to yellow, the Auto Hold is not

working properly. We recommend

that you contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

• Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly when you start the vehi-

cle.

• For your safety, cancel the Auto

Hold when you drive downhill,

back up the vehicle or park the

vehicle.

NOTICE

If there is a malfunction with the

driver’s door or engine hood open

detection system, the Auto Hold

may not work properly.

We recommend that you contact

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

6-50

While Driving

Warning messages

OSU2I069030/OSU2I069029



Type A



Type B



Type C

OJX1069066L

Parking brake automatically

applied

When the EPB is applied from Auto

Hold, a warning will sound and a

message will appear.

OSU2I069032

Deactivating AUTO HOLD...

Press brake pedal

When the conversion from Auto Hold

to EPB is not working properly a

warning will sound and a message

will appear.

When this message is displayed, the

Auto Hold and EPB may not operate.

For your safety, depress the brake

pedal.

OSU2I069034

Press brake pedal to deactivate

AUTO HOLD

If you did not apply the brake pedal

when you released the Auto Hold by

pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch, a

warning will sound and a message

will appear.

6-51

OSU2I069035

AUTO HOLD conditions not met.

Close door, hood

When you press the [AUTO HOLD]

switch, if the driver’s door and engine

hood are not closed, a warning will

sound and a message will appear on

the cluster display. At this moment,

press the [AUTO HOLD] button after

closing the driver’s door and engine

hood.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

WARNING

An Anti-Lock Braking System

(ABS) will not prevent accidents

due to improper or dangerous driv-

ing maneuvers. Even though vehi-

cle control is improved during

emergency braking, always main-

tain a safe distance between you

and objects ahead of you. Vehicle

speeds should always be reduced

during extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for cars

equipped with ABS may be longer

than for those without these sys-

tems in the following road condi-

tions.

Drive your vehicle at reduced

speeds during the following condi-

tions:

• Rough, gravel or snow-covered

roads.

• On roads where the road sur-

face is pitted or has different

surface height.

• Tire chains are installed on your

vehicle.

The safety features of an ABS

equipped vehicle should not be

tested by high speed driving or

cornering. This could endanger

the safety of yourself or others.

ABS is an electronic braking system

that helps prevent a braking skid.

ABS allows the driver to steer and

brake at the same time.

6-52

While Driving

Using ABS

To obtain the maximum benefit from

your ABS in an emergency situation,

do not attempt to modulate your

brake pressure and do not try to

pump your brakes. Depress your

brake pedal as hard as possible.

When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may lock the wheels,

you may hear sounds from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sen-

sation in the brake pedal. This is nor-

mal and it means your ABS is active.

ABS does not reduce the time or dis-

tance it takes to stop the vehicle.

Always maintain a safe distance from

the vehicle in front of you.

ABS will not prevent a skid that results

from sudden changes in direction,

such as trying to take a corner too

fast or making a sudden lane change.

Always drive at a safe speed for the

road and weather conditions.

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili-

ty. Always steer moderately when

braking hard. Severe or sharp steer-

ing wheel movement can still cause

your vehicle to veer into oncoming

traffic or off the road.

On loose or uneven road surfaces,

operation of the anti-lock brake sys-

tem may result in a longer stopping

distance than for vehicles equipped

with a conventional brake system.

The ABS warning light ( ) will stay

on for several seconds after the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

During that time, the ABS will go

through self-diagnosis and the light

will go off if everything is normal. If

the light stays on, you may have a

problem with your ABS. We recom-

mend that you contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

WARNING

If the ABS warning light ( ) is on

and stays on, you may have a

problem with the ABS. Your power

brakes will work normally. To

reduce the risk of serious injury or

death, we recommend that you

contact your HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,

and apply your brakes continuously,

the ABS will be active continuously

and the ABS warning light ( ) may

illuminate. Pull your car over to a

safe place and turn the engine off.

Restart the engine. If the ABS warn-

ing light is off, then your ABS sys-

tem is normal. Otherwise, you may

have a problem with your ABS sys-

tem. We recommend that you con-

tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

as soon as possible.

i Information

When you jump start your vehicle

because of a drained battery, the ABS

warning light ( ) may turn on at the

same time. This happens because of the

low battery voltage. It does not mean

your ABS is malfunctioning. Have the

battery recharged before driving the

vehicle.

6-53

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) (if equipped)

OSU2I062037

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

system helps to stabilize the vehicle

during cornering maneuvers.

ESC checks where you are steering

and where the vehicle is actually

going.

ESC applies braking pressure to any

one of the vehicle’s brakes and inter-

venes in the engine management

system to assist the driver with keep-

ing the vehicle on the intended path.

It is not a substitute for safe driving

practices. Always adjust your speed

and driving to the road conditions.

WARNING

Never drive too fast for the road

conditions or too quickly when

cornering. The ESC system will

not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt

maneuvers, and hydroplaning on

wet surfaces can result in severe

accidents.

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the ESC and the ESC OFF

indicator lights illuminate for approxi-

mately three seconds and goes off,

then the ESC is turned on.

When operating

When the ESC is in opera-

tion, the ESC indicator

light blinks:

• When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may lock the

wheels, you may hear sounds from

the brakes, or feel a corresponding

sensation in the brake pedal. This

is normal and it means your ESC is

active.

• When the ESC activates, the

engine may not respond to the

accelerator as it does under rou-

tine conditions.

• If the Cruise Control was in use

when the ESC activates, the Cruise

Control automatically disengages.

The Cruise Control can be reen-

gaged when the road conditions

allow. See “Cruise Control

System” later in this chapter (if

equipped).

• When moving out of the mud or

driving on a slippery road, the

engine rpm (revolutions per min-

ute) may not increase even if you

press the accelerator pedal deep-

ly. This is to maintain the stability

and traction of the vehicle and

does not indicate a problem.

6-54

While Driving

ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :

• State 1

Press the ESC OFF button briefly.

The ESC OFF indicator light and/or

message “Traction control disabled”

will illuminate. In this state, the trac-

tion control function of ESC (engine

management) is disabled, but the

brake control function of ESC (brak-

ing management) still operates.

• State 2

Press and hold the ESC OFF button

continuously for more than 3 sec-

onds. The ESC OFF indicator light

and/or message “Traction control and

ESC disabled” illuminates and a

warning chime sounds. In this state,

both the traction control function of

ESC (engine management) and the

brake control function of ESC (brak-

ing management) are disabled.

If the ignition switch is placed in the

LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,

ESC remains off. Upon restarting the

vehicle, the ESC will automatically

turn on again.

6-55

Indicator lights



ESC indicator light (blinks)



ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

OTD059013

OTD059012

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the ESC indicator light illu-

minates, then goes off if the ESC sys-

tem is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks when-

ever the ESC is operating.

If the ESC indicator light stays on,

your vehicle may have a malfunction

with the ESC system. When this

warning light illuminates we recom-

mend that the vehicle be checked by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes

on when the ESC is turned off with

the button.

WARNING

When the ESC is blinking, this

indicates the ESC is active:

Drive slowly and NEVER attempt

to accelerate. NEVER turn the ESC

off while the ESC indicator light is

blinking or you may lose control of

the vehicle resulting in an acci-

dent.

NOTICE

Driving with wheels and tires with

different sizes may cause the ESC

system to malfunction. Before

replacing tires, make sure all four

tires and wheels are the same size.

Never drive the vehicle with differ-

ent sized wheels and tires installed.

ESC OFF usage

When Driving

The ESC OFF mode should only be

used briefly to help free the vehicle if

stuck in snow or mud, by temporarily

stopping operation of the ESC, to

maintain wheel torque.

To turn ESC off while driving, press

the ESC OFF button while driving on

a flat road surface.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the trans-

mission:

• Do not allow wheel(s) of one

axle to spin excessively while

the ESC, ABS, and parking brake

warning lights are displayed.

The repairs would not be cov-

ered by the vehicle warranty.

Reduce engine power and do

not spin the wheel(s) excessive-

ly while these lights are dis-

played.

• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, make sure the

ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light

illuminated).

i Information

Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS

or standard brake system operation.

6-56

While Driving

Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM) (if equipped)

The Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM) is a function of the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system. It

helps ensure the vehicle stays stable

when accelerating or braking sud-

denly on wet, slippery and rough

roads where traction over the

four tires can suddenly become

uneven.

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when using the Vehicle Stability

Management (VSM):

• ALWAYS check the speed and

the distance to the vehicle

ahead. The VSM is not a substi-

tute for safe driving practices.

• Never drive too fast for the road

conditions. The VSM system will

not prevent accidents. Excessive

speed in bad weather, slippery

and uneven roads can result in

severe accidents.

VSM operation

VSM ON condition

The VSM operates when:

• The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) is on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately

above 15 km/h (9 mph) on curve

roads.

• Vehicle speed is approximately

above 20 km/h (12 mph) when the

vehicle is braking on rough roads.

When operating

When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may activate the

ESC, you may hear sounds from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sen-

sation in the brake pedal. This is nor-

mal and it means your VSM is active.

i Information

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on a banked road such as

gradient or incline

• Driving in reverse.

• The ESC OFF indicator light is on.

• The EPS (Electric Power Steering)

warning light ( ) is on or blinks.

WARNING

If the ESC indicator light ( ) or

EPS warning light ( ) stays on

or blinks, your vehicle may have a

malfunction with the VSM system.

When the warning light illuminates

we recommend that the vehicle be

checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

NOTICE

Driving with wheels and tires with

different sizes may cause the ESC

system to malfunction. Before

replacing tires, make sure all four

tires and wheels are the same size.

Never drive the vehicle with differ-

ent sized tires and wheels installed.

6-57

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

(if equipped)

The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

helps prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards when starting a vehicle

from a stop on a hill. The system

operates the brakes automatically for

approximately 2 seconds and releas-

es the brake after 2 seconds or when

the accelerator pedal is depressed.

WARNING

Always be ready to depress the

accelerator pedal when starting off

on a incline. The HAC activates

only for approximately 2 seconds.

i Information

• The HAC does not operate when the

shift lever is in P (Park) or N

(Neutral).

• The HAC activates even when the

ESC (Electronic Stability Control)

is off. However, it does not activate,

when the ESC does not operate nor-

mally.

Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)

The Emergency Stop Signal system

alerts the driver behind by blinking

the stop light when the vehicle is

braked rapidly and severely.

The system is activated when:

• The vehicle suddenly stops (vehi-

cle speed is over 55 km/h and the

vehicle deceleration at greater

than 7 m/s2)

• The ABS is activating

When the vehicle speed is under 40

km/h and the ABS deactivates or the

sudden stop situation is over, the

stop light blinking will stop. Instead,

the hazard warning flasher will turn

on automatically.

The hazard warning flasher will turn

off when vehicle speed is over 10

km/h after the vehicle has stopped.

Also, it will turn off when the vehicle is

driven at low speed for some time.

You can turn it off manually by push-

ing the hazard warning flasher switch.

CAUTION

The Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)

system will not work if the hazard

warning flasher is already on.

6-58

While Driving

Good braking practices

WARNING

Whenever leaving the vehicle or

parking, always come to a com-

plete stop and continue to depress

the brake pedal. Move the shift

lever into the 1st gear (for manual

transmission vehicle) or P (Park,

for Dual Clutch Transmission/

Automatic Transmission vehicle)

position, then apply the parking

brake, and place the ignition switch

in the LOCK/OFF position.

Vehicles with the parking brake

not fully engaged are at risk for

moving inadvertently and causing

injury to yourself or others.

Wet brakes can be dangerous! The

brakes may get wet if the vehicle is

driven through standing water or if it

is washed. Your vehicle will not stop

as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet

brakes may cause the vehicle to pull

to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes

lightly until the braking action returns

to normal, taking care to keep the

vehicle under control at all times. If

the braking action does not return to

normal, stop as soon as it is safe to

do so and we recommend that you

call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

for assistance.

DO NOT drive with your foot resting

on the brake pedal. Even light, but

constant pedal pressure can result in

the brakes overheating, brake wear,

and possibly even brake failure.

If a tire goes flat while you are driving,

apply the brakes gently and keep the

vehicle pointed straight ahead while

you slow down. When you are mov-

ing slowly enough for it to be safe to

do so, pull off the road and stop in a

safe location.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake

pedal when the vehicle is stopped to

prevent the vehicle from rolling for-

ward.

6-59

Idle Stop and Go helps reduce fuel

consumption by automatically shut-

ting down the engine, when the vehi-

cle is at a standstill (for example, red

stop light, stop sign, and traffic jam)

subject to certain prerequisite condi-

tions being satisfied as listed below.

The engine is automatically started

upon satisfying the starting condi-

tions.

ISG system is always active, when

the engine is running.

i Information

When the engine is automatically

started by ISG system, warning lights

(for example, ABS, ESC, ESC OFF,

EPS, and parking brake warning light)

may illuminate for a few seconds due

to low battery voltage.

However, it does not indicate a mal-

function with ISG system.

ISG system operation

Prerequisite for activation

ISG system operates in the following

situations.

• The driver’s seatbelt is fastened

• The driver’s door and hood are

closed

• The brake vacuum pressure is

adequate

• The battery sensor is activated and

the battery is sufficiently charged

• Outside temperature is not too low

or too high

• The vehicle is driven over a con-

stant speed and stops

• The climate control system satis-

fies the conditions

• The vehicle is sufficiently warmed

• ISG related parts are working prop-

erly

• The incline is gradual

• The steering wheel is turned less

than 180 degrees and then the

vehicle stops

,'/(6723$1'*2ǣ,6*Ǥ

6-60

While Driving

i Information

If the ISG light (white) is turned on on

the instrument cluster and does not

meet the ISG system operating condi-

tions, the ISG system is not activated.

When the ISG light (yellow) is on while

the ISG system meets operating condi-

tions, we recommend that the system

be inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Auto stop

When ISG is on the engine will be

stopped automatically when both of

the following occurs:

1. Vehicle speed decreases to 0 km/h

(0 mph) full stop condition.

2. Brake pedal is depressed and gear

is in D (Drive) or N (Neutral).

The Auto Stop ( ) indicator illumi-

nates in green on the instrument clus-

ter, when the engine stops.

i Information

Idle stop cannot reoccur again until

the vehicle speed goes above 5 km/h (3

mph) and then returns again to the

automatic stop conditions as previous-

ly mentioned.

In the Auto Stop mode, if the engine

hood is opened, ISG system will be

deactivated.

Type C

OSU2I062062

6-61

When the system is deactivated, the

ISG off button indicator will illuminate

and a message ‘Auto Stop is off. Shift

to P or N to start engine manually’

appears on the cluster display with a

warning sound.

If this occurs, depress the brake

pedal and restart the engine manual-

ly.

Auto start

When the engine stops automatically

by ISG, the engine will restart if one

of the following is done.

- Release the brake pedal.

- When Auto Hold is activated, take

your foot off the brake pedal and

then depress the accelerator

pedal.

- While depressing the brake pedal,

shift the gear from N (Neutral) or D

(Drive) to R (Reverse) or P (Park).

- While depressing the brake pedal,

shift the gear from N (Neutral) to D

(Drive).

The Auto Stop ( ) indicator goes to

white on the instrument cluster, when

the engine is restarted.

Cluster display messages

The messages are displayed on the

instrument cluster to help use ISG

system.

OJX1069042L

Auto Stop is Off. Shift to P or N to

start engine

When the system is deactivated, the

ISG off button indicator will illuminate

and a message will appear on the

cluster display with a warning sound

in the following situations.

- When the engine hood is opened.

- When ISG system is not working

normally.

If this occurs, depress the brake

pedal and restart the engine manual-

ly. For your safety, restart the vehicle

in the P (Park) position.

6-62

While Driving

Type A

Type B

OJX1069071L

OJX1069070L

Press brake pedal before driving on

/ Press brake pedal for Auto Start

When the gear is shifted from N

(Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or

Manual shift mode without the brake

pedal depressed, a message will

appear on the cluster display. To acti-

vate auto start, depress the brake

pedal.

OJX1069044

AUTO STOP elapsed time

AUTO STOP display shows the

elapsed time of engine stop by the

Idle Stop and Go system.

You may check AUTO STOP elapsed

time in the Trip modes on the instru-

ment cluster.

ISG system off

OSU2I062062

Press the ISG OFF button to turn off

ISG system. The ISG OFF button

indicator will illuminate. To use the

system, press the ISG OFF button

again.

NOTICE

It is recommend to Switch Off the

Idle Stop and Go function when

driving in flooded areas, this will

avoid electrical equipment dam-

age due to water entry.

6-63

Forced to restart engine

The engine is automatically restarted

in the following situations.

• The brake vacuum pressure is low

• The engine has stopped for about

5 minutes

• The air conditioning is ON with the

fan speed set to a certain high

level

• The front defroster is ON

• The battery is weak

• The cooling and heating perfor-

mance of the climate control sys-

tem is unsatisfactory

• The vehicle is shifted to P (Park) or

R (Reverse) when Auto Hold is

activated

• The door is opened or the seatbelt

is unfastened when Auto Hold is

activated

• The EPB switch is pressed when

Auto Hold is activated

• The Auto Stop ( ) indicator blinks

in green for 5 seconds on the

instrument cluster when the engine

is restarted.

• WARNING

When the engine is in Idle Stop

mode, the engine may restart with-

out the driver taking any action.

Before leaving the vehicle or work-

ing on the engine compartment,

turn off the engine by pressing the

Engine Start/Stop button to the

OFF position.

ISG malfunction

ISG system may not operate when

there is a malfunction with the ISG

sensors or ISG system.

The following will occur, when there

is a malfunction with the ISG system:

• The Auto Stop ( ) indicator will

illuminate in yellow on the instru-

ment cluster.

• The light on the ISG OFF button

will illuminate.

We recommend that you contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

6-64

While Driving

Calibrating the Battery Sensor

If the AGM battery is reconnected or

replaced, ISG system will not operate

immediately. If you want to use the

system, the battery sensor needs to

be calibrated following the below pro-

cedure.

OSU2I082059

[A] : Battery sensor

3. Turn off the engine.

4. Disconnect all electronic devices

that were additionally installed

after the vehicle was delivered,

such as navigation, dashcam, etc.

5. After 4 hours with the engine off,

turn the engine on and off 3 to 4

times.

i Information

The ISG system may not operate in the

following situations

• There is a malfunction with the ISG

system.

• The battery is weak.

• The brake vacuum pressure is low.

If this occurs, we recommend that you

have the ISG system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

• Use only a genuine HYUNDAI

ISG battery for replacement. If

not, the ISG system may not

properly operate.

• Do not recharge the ISG battery

with a general battery charger. It

maydamage or explode the ISG

battery.

• Do not remove the battery cap.

The battery electrolyte, which is

harmful to the human body, may

leak out.

6-65

OSU2I069040

The DRIVE mode may be selected

according to the driver’s preference

or road condition.

When the DRIVE MODE is activated

by pressing the DRIVE/TRACTION

MODE button, and turn the DRIVE

MODE knob to desired mode.

❈ If you want to activate the

TRACTION CONTROL mode, press

the DRIVE/TRACTION mode button.

The driving mode will be changed

from Driving control to Traction con-

trol. You can select SNOW, MUD or

SAND mode by rotating the knob to

desired mode.

For more details, refer to “Traction

control” later in this chapter.

Drive mode

The mode changes whenever the

DRIVE MODE selection knob is rotat-

ed.

OSU2I069041/OSU2I069042



Type A



Type B

OSU2I069043/OSU2I069044



Type A



Type B

OSU2I069045/OSU2I069046



Type A



Type B

• COMFORT mode : COMFORT

mode provides soft driving and

comfortable riding.

• SPORT mode : SPORT mode pro-

vides sporty but firm riding.

• ECO mode : ECO mode improves

fuel efficiency for eco-friendly driv-

ing.

'5,9(02'(,17(*5$7('&21752/6<67(0ǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

6-66

While Driving

The driving mode will be set to

COMFORT or ECO mode when the

engine is restarted. if it is in

COMFORT/SPORT mode.

COMFORT mode will be set, when

the engine is restarted.

If it is in Eco mode, Eco mode will be

set when the engine is restarted.

SPORT mode

SPORT mode manages

the driving dynamics by

automatically adjusting

the steering effort, and the

engine and transmission

control logic for enhanced driver per-

formance.

• When SPORT mode is selected by

rotating the DRIVE MODE button,

the SPORT indicator (orange

color) will illuminate.

• Whenever the engine is restarted,

the Drive Mode will revert back to

COMFORT mode. If SPORT mode

is desired, re-select SPORT mode

from the DRIVE/TRACTION

MODE button.

• When SPORT mode is activated:

- The engine rpm will tend to

remain raised over a certain

length of time even after releas-

ing the accelerator

- Upshifts are delayed when accel-

erating

i Information

In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency

may decrease.

ECO mode

When the Drive Mode is

set to ECO mode, the

engine and transmission

control logic are changed

to maximize fuel efficien-

cy.

• When ECO mode is selected by

rotating the DRIVE/TRACTION

MODE button, the ECO indicator

(green color) will illuminate.

• If the vehicle is set to ECO mode,

when the engine is turned OFF

and restarted the Drive Mode set-

ting will remain in ECO mode.

i Information

Fuel efficiency depends on the driver’s

driving habit and road condition.

6-67

When ECO mode is activated:

• The acceleration response may be

slightly reduced if the accelerator

pedal is depressed moderately.

• The air conditioner performance

may be limited.

• The shift pattern of the automatic

transmission may change.

• The engine noise may get louder.

The above situations are normal con-

ditions when ECO mode is activated

to improve fuel efficiency.

Limitation of ECO mode operation:

If the following conditions occur while

ECO mode is operating, the system

operation is limited even though there

is no change in the ECO indicator.

• When the coolant temperature is

low:

The system will be limited until

engine performance becomes nor-

mal.

• When driving up a hill:

The system will be limited to gain

power when driving uphill because

engine torque is restricted.

• When driving the vehicle with the

paddle shifter in manual mode.

The system will be limited accord-

ing to the shift location.

6-68

While Driving

Traction Control is a system that

achieve optimal driving performance

by controlling engine and braking by

road condition (snow, muddy, sandy).

Traction control mode

OSU2I069040

If you press the “DRIVE/TRACTION”

mode button, the driving mode is

changed from Driving control to

Traction control. You can select

SNOW, MUD or SAND mode by rota-

tion the knob. If you press the “DRIVE/

TRACTION” mode button again, the

driving mode is changed from

Traction Control to previous driving

control.

The driving mode will be set to Driving

control when the restarted, If it is in

Traction Control.

WARNING

Traction mode is designed based

on 2WD (2 Wheel Drive), Do not

drive in condition that exceeds the

vehicle’s intended design.

Invalid mode selection can lead to

loss of traction and skidding, par-

ticularly on slippery roads, this

can cause you to lose control of

the vehicle, which can lead to acci-

dents and serious injuries.

Traction mode operation

OSU2I069047/OSU2I069048



Type A



Type B

OSU2I069049/OSU2I069050



Type A



Type B

OSU2I069051/OSU2I069052



Type A



Type B

Traction mode offers special traction

tuning for snow/mud/sand, optimizing

available traction in adverse condi-

tions. Traction mode adjusts left and

right wheel slip control, engine torque

and shift patterns according to avail-

able traction levels.

75$&7,21&21752/ǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

6-69

Cluster display message

Transmission hot! Park with

engine On

OAC3069035TU

OAC3069062TU

• Under certain conditions, such as

harsh driving conditions (mud or

sand road), the transmission tem-

peratures will increase excessive-

ly. Finally the transmission could

be overheated.

• If the vehicle continues to be driv-

en and the transmission tempera-

tures reach the maximum tem-

perature limit, the “Transmission

hot! Park with engine On” warning

will be displayed. When this occurs

the transmission is disabled until

the transmission cools to normal

temperatures.

• The warning will display a time to

wait for the transmission to cool.

• If this occurs, pull over to a safe

location, stop the vehicle with the

engine running, apply the brakes

and shift the vehicle to P (Park),

and allow the transmission to cool.

• When the message “Transmission

cooled down. Resume driving”

appears you can continue to drive

your vehicle.

• When possible, drive the vehicle

smoothly.

6-70

While Driving

Cruise Control operation

OAC3069053TU

1. (Cruise) indicator

2. Set speed

Cruise Control system allows you to

drive at speeds above 30 km/h (20

mph) without depressing the acceler-

ator pedal.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

• If Cruise Control system is left

on, ( (Cruise) indicator light

in the instrument cluster illumi-

nated) Cruise Control system

can be activated unintentionally.

Keep Cruise Control system off

(the (Cruise) indicator light

OFF) when Cruise Control sys-

tem is not in use, to avoid inad-

vertently setting a speed.

• Use Cruise Control system only

when traveling on open high-

ways in good weather.

• Do not use Cruise Control sys-

tem when it may not be safe to

keep the vehicle at a constant

speed:

- Driving in heavy or varying

speed traffic.

- On slippery (rainy, icy or snow

covered) roads.

- Hilly or winding roads.

- Very windy areas.

- When driving with limited view

(possibly due to bad weather

such as fog, snow, rain and

sandstorm)

NOTICE

During cruise-speed driving of a

manual transmission vehicle, do

not shift into neutral without

depressing the clutch pedal, since

the engine will be overrevved. If

this happens, depress the clutch

pedal or press the Cruise button.

&58,6(&21752/ǣ&&Ǥǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

6-71

i Information

• During normal cruise control oper-

ation, when the SET switch is acti-

vated or reactivated after applying

the brakes, Cruise Control system

will activate after approximately 3

seconds. This delay is normal.

• Before activating the cruise control

function, the system will check to

verify that the brake switch is oper-

ating normally. Depress the brake

pedal at least once after turning ON

the ignition or starting the vehicle.

Cruise control switch

OSU2I069058

: Turns Cruise Control system on

or off.

+ : Sets or increases Cruise Control

speed.

- : Sets or decreases Cruise Control

speed.

: Pause and resume Cruise

Control operation.

Setting speed

OSU2I069059

1. Push the (Cruise) button on

the steering wheel to turn the sys-

tem on. The cruise indicator on the

instrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed,

which must be more than 30 km/h

(20 mph).

i Information

For manual transmission vehicles, you

should depress the brake pedal at least

once to set Cruise Control system after

starting the engine.

6-72

While Driving

OSU2I069054

3. Push the switch down (-), and

release it. The Set speed on the

instrument cluster will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

i Information

The vehicle may slow down or speed

up slightly while going uphill or down-

hill.

Increasing set speed

OSU2I069055

• Push the switch up (+) and hold it,

while monitoring the SET speed on

the instrument cluster. Release the

switch when the desired speed is

shown and the vehicle will acceler-

ate to that speed.

• Push the switch up (+) and release

it immediately. The cruising speed

will increase 2.0 km/h (1.2 mph)

each time the switch is operated in

this manner.

• Depress the accelerator pedal.

When the vehicle attains the

desired speed, push the switch

down (-).

6-73

Decreasing set speed

OSU2I069054

• Push the switch down (-) and hold it.

Your vehicle will gradually slow

down. Release the switch at the

speed you want to maintain.

• Push the switch down (-) and release

it immediately. The cruising speed

will decrease 2.0 km/h (1.2 mph)

each time the switch is operated in

this manner.

• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push the switch down (-).

To temporarily accelerate with

the Cruise Control ON

Depress the accelerator pedal. When

you take your foot off the accelerator,

the vehicle will return to the previous-

ly set speed.

If you push the switch Up (+) or down

(-). at the increased speed, Cruise

Control system will maintain the

increased speed.

Temporarily pausing Cruise

Control

OSU2I069056

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Depressing the clutch pedal. (for

manual transmission vehicle)

• Pressing the button located on

the steering wheel. Both the

(Cruise) indicator and the set

speed will turn off.

• Moving the shift lever into N

(Neutral). (for Dual Clutch

Transmission/Automatic

Transmission vehicle)

• Decreasing the vehicle speed

lower than the memory speed by

20 km/h (12 mph).

• Decreasing the vehicle speed to

less than approximately 30 km/h

(20 mph).

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is operating.

• Downshifting to the 2nd gear in

Sports Mode.

6-74

While Driving

i Information

Each of the above actions will cancel

Cruise Control system operation (the

SET indicator light in the instrument

cluster will go off), but only pressing

the (Cruise) button will turn the

system off. If you wish to resume

Cruise Control system operation, push

the switch up (+) located on your steer-

ing wheel. You will return to your pre-

viously preset speed, unless the system

was turned off using the (Cruise)

button.

Resuming Cruise Control

OSU2I069055

Push the switch Up (+) or down (-). If

the vehicle speed is over 30 km/h (20

mph), the vehicle will resume the pre-

set speed.

Turning off Cruise Control

OSU2I069059

Pressing the (CRUISE) button.

The cruise indicator will go off.

6-75

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving elements

are encountered such as water,

snow, ice, mud and sand, take the

bellow suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and keep a longer

braking distance.

• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.

• When your vehicle is stuck in

snow, mud, or sand, use second

gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid

unnecessary wheel spin.

• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or

other non-slip materials under the

wheels to provide additional trac-

tion while the vehicle becomes

stuck in ice, snow, or mud.

WARNING

Downshifting with an Dual Clutch

Transmission/Automatic

Transmission while driving on

slippery surfaces can cause an

accident. The sudden change in

tire speed could cause the tires to

skid. Be careful when downshift-

ing on slippery surfaces.

Use sand, rock salt, or other non-slip

material under the drive wheels to

provide traction when stalled in ice,

snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to

free it from snow, sand, or mud, first

turn the steering wheel right and left

to clear the area around your front

wheels. Then, shift back and forth

between 1st and R (Reverse, for

manual transmission vehicle) or R

(Reverse) and a forward gear (for

Dual Clutch Transmission/Automatic

Transmission vehicle). Try to avoid

spinning the wheels, and do not race

the engine.

To prevent transmission wear, wait

until the wheels stop spinning before

shifting gears. Release the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting, and press

lightly on the accelerator pedal while

the transmission is in gear. Slowly

spinning the wheels in forward and

reverse directions causes a rocking

motion that may free the vehicle.

NOTICE

If the tires spin at high speed the

tires can explode, and you or oth-

ers may be injured. Do not attempt

this procedure if people or objects

are anywhere near the vehicle.

The vehicle can overheat causing

an engine compartment fire or

other damage. Spin the wheels as

little as possible and avoid spin-

ning the wheels at speeds over 56

km/h (35 mph) as indicated on the

speedometer.

NOTICE

If you are still stuck after rocking

the vehicle a few times, have the

vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle

to avoid engine overheating, pos-

sible damage to the transmission,

and tire damage. See “Towing” in

chapter 7.

63(&,$/'5,9,1*&21',7,216

6-76

While Driving

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in

corners, especially when roads are

wet. Ideally, corners should always

be taken under gentle acceleration.

Driving at night

Night driving presents more hazards

than driving in the daylight. Here are

some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more dis-

tance between you and other vehi-

cles, as it may be more difficult to

see at night, especially in areas

where there may not be any street

lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the

glare from other driver’s head-

lights.

• Keep your headlights clean and

properly aimed. Dirty or improperly

aimed headlights will make it much

more difficult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the head-

lights of oncoming vehicles. You

could be temporarily blinded, and it

will take several seconds for your

eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving

dangerous. Here are a few things to

consider when driving in the rain or

on slick pavement:

• Slow down and allow extra follow-

ing distance. A heavy rainfall

makes it harder to see and increas-

es the distance needed to stop

your vehicle.

• Replace your windshield wiper

blades when they show signs of

streaking or missing areas on the

windshield.

• Be sure your tires have enough

tread. If your tires do not have

enough tread, making a quick stop

on wet pavement can cause a skid

and possibly lead to an accident.

See “Tire replacement” in chapter

• Turn on your headlights to make it

easier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large pud-

dles can affect your brakes. If you

must go through puddles, try to

drive through them slowly.

• If you believe your brakes may be

wet, apply them lightly while driv-

ing until normal braking operation

returns.

Hydroplaning

If the road is wet enough and you are

going fast enough, your vehicle may

have little or no contact with the road

surface and actually ride on the water.

The best advice is SLOW DOWN

when the road is wet. The risk of

hydroplaning increases as the depth

of tire tread decreases, refer to “Tire

replacement” in chapter 8.

6-77

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas

unless you are sure the water is no

higher than the bottom of the wheel

hub. Drive through any water slowly.

Allow adequate stopping distance

because brake performance may be

reduced.

After driving through water, dry the

brakes by gently applying them sev-

eral times while the vehicle is moving

slowly.

Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.

Under-inflation may overheat or dam-

age the tires.

Do not install worn-out or damaged

tires, which may reduce traction or

fail the braking operation.

i Information

Never over-inflate your tires above the

maximum inflation pressure, as speci-

fied on your tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine

oil

Driving at higher speeds on the high-

way consumes more fuel and is less

efficient than driving at a slower, more

moderate speed. Maintain a moder-

ate speed in order to conserve fuel

when driving on the highway.

Be sure to check both the engine

coolant level and the engine oil before

driving.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may

overheat the engine.

6-78

While Driving

Reducing the risk of a rollover

Your multi-purpose passenger vehi-

cle is defined as a Sports Utility

Vehicle (SUV). SUV’s have higher

ground clearance and a narrower

track to make them capable of per-

forming in a wide variety of off-road

applications. The specific design

characteristics give them a higher

center of gravity than ordinary vehi-

cles making them more likely to roll

over if you make abrupt turns. Utility

vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehi-

cles. Due to this risk, driver and pas-

sengers are strongly recommended

to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover

crash, an unbelted person is signifi-

cantly more likely to die than a person

wearing a seat belt.

There are steps that a driver can

make to reduce the risk of a rollover.

If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or

abrupt maneuvers, do not load your

vehicle with heavy cargo on the roof,

and never modify your vehicle in any

way.

WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly

higher rollover rate than other

types of vehicles. To prevent roll-

overs or loss of control:

• Take corners at slower speeds

than you would with a passen-

ger vehicle.

• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt

maneuvers.

• Do not modify your vehicle in

any way that you would raise the

center of gravity.

• Keep tires properly inflated.

• Do not carry heavy cargo on the

roof.

WARNING

In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely

to die than a person wearing a seat

belt. Make sure all passengers are

wearing their seat belts.

6-79

The severe weather conditions of

winter quickly wear out tires and

cause other problems. To minimize

winter driving problems, you should

take the following suggestions:

Snow or icy conditions

You need to keep sufficient distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you.

Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,

rapid acceleration, sudden brake

applications, and sharp turns are

potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine brak-

ing to the fullest extent. Sudden brake

applications on snowy or icy roads

may cause skids to occur.

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it

may be necessary to use snow tires

or to install tire chains on your tires.

Always carry emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to

carry include tire chains, tow straps

or chains, a flashlight, emergency

flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,

a window scraper, gloves, ground

cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

Snow tires

WARNING

Snow tires should be equivalent in

size and type to the vehicle’s stan-

dard tires. Otherwise, the safety

and handling of your vehicle may

be adversely affected.

If you mount snow tires on your vehi-

cle, make sure to use radial tires of

the same size and load range as the

original tires. Mount snow tires on all

four wheels to balance your vehicle’s

handling in all weather conditions.

The traction provided by snow tires

on dry roads may not be as high as

your vehicle’s original equipment

tires. Check with the tire dealer for

maximum speed recommendations.

i Information

Do not install studded tires without

first checking local and municipal reg-

ulations for possible restrictions

against their use.

WINTER DRIVING

6-80

While Driving

Tire chains

OSU2I069057

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are

thinner than other types of tires, they

may be damaged by mounting some

types of tire chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tires is

recommended instead of tire chains.

Do not mount tire chains on vehicles

equipped with aluminum wheels; if

possible use a wire type chain. If tire

chains must be used, use genuine

HYUNDAI parts and install the tire

chain after reviewing the instructions

provided with the tire chains. Damage

to your vehicle caused by improper

tire chain use is not covered by your

vehicle manufacturer’s warranty.

WARNING

The use of tire chains may adverse-

ly affect vehicle handling:

• Drive less than 30 km/h (20 mph)

or the chain manufacturer’s rec-

ommended speed limit, which-

ever is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,

holes, sharp turns, and other

road hazards, which may cause

the vehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked

wheel braking.

i Information

• Install tire chains on the front tires.

It should be noted that installing tire

chains on the tires will provide a

greater driving force, but will not

prevent side skids.

• Do not install tire chains without

first checking local and municipal

regulations for possible restrictions

against their use.

Chain Installation

When installing tire chains, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions and

mount them as tightly possible. Drive

slowly (less than 30 km/h (20 mph))

with chains installed. If you hear the

chains contacting the body or chas-

sis, stop and tighten them. If they still

make contact, slow down until the

noise stops. Remove the tire chains

as soon as you begin driving on

cleared roads.

6-81

When mounting snow chains, park

the vehicle on level ground away from

traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard

Warning Flasher and place a triangu-

lar emergency warning device behind

the vehicle (if available). Always

place the vehicle in P (Park), apply

the parking brake and turn off the

engine before installing snow chains.

If your vehicle has 215/55R18 size

tires, do not use tire chain; they can

damage your vehicle (wheel, suspen-

sion and body). It is advised to use

snow tires.

NOTICE

When using tire chains:

• Wrong size chains or improperly

installed chains can damage

your vehicle’s brake lines, sus-

pension, body and wheels.

• Use SAE “S” class or wire

chains.

• If you hear noise caused by

chains contacting the body,

retighten the chain to prevent

contact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage,

retighten the chains after driv-

ing 0.5~1.0 km (0.3~0.6 miles).

• Do not use tire chains on vehi-

cles equipped with aluminum

wheels. If unavoidable, use a

wire type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 12mm

(0.47 in) wide to prevent damage

to the vehicle body and chain

connection if your vehicle has

215/60R17 size tires.

Winter precautions

Use high quality ethylene glycol

coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high

quality ethylene glycol coolant in the

cooling system. It is the only type of

coolant that should be used because it

helps prevent corrosion in the cooling

system, lubricates the water pump and

prevents freezing. Be sure to replace

or replenish your coolant in accor-

dance with the maintenance schedule

in chapter 8. Before winter, have your

coolant tested to assure that its freez-

ing point is sufficient for the tempera-

tures anticipated during the winter.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the

battery system. Visually inspect the

battery and cables as described in

chapter 8. The level of charge in your

battery can be checked by an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer or a service

station.

Change to “winter weight” oil if

necessary

In some climates it is recommended

that a lower viscosity “winter weight”

oil be used during cold weather. See

chapter 2 for recommendations. If

you aren’t sure what weight oil you

should use, we recommend that you

consult with an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Check spark plugs and ignition

system

Inspect your spark plugs as described

in chapter 8 and replace them if neces-

sary. Also check all ignition wiring and

components to be sure they are not

cracked, worn or damaged in any way.

6-82

While Driving

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing,

squirt an approved de-icer fluid or

glycerine into the key opening. If a

lock is covered with ice, squirt it with

an approved de-icing fluid to remove

the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,

you may be able to thaw it out by

using a heated key. Handle the heat-

ed key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window

washer system from freezing, add an

approved window washer anti-freeze

solution in accordance with instruc-

tions on the container. Window wash-

er anti-freeze is available from an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

most auto parts outlets. Do not use

engine coolant or other types of anti-

freeze as these may damage the

paint finish.

Do not let your parking brake

freeze

Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged

position. This is most likely to happen

when there is an accumulation of

snow or ice around or near the rear

brakes or if the brakes are wet. If

there is a risk the parking brake may

freeze, apply it only temporarily while

you put the shift lever in P (for Dual

Clutch Transmission/Automatic

Transmission) or in first or reverse

gear (for manual transmission) and

block the rear wheels so the vehicle

cannot roll. Then release the parking

brake.

Do not let ice and snow accumu-

late underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice

can build up under the fenders and

interfere with the steering. When driv-

ing in severe winter conditions where

this may happen, you should periodi-

cally check underneath the car to be

sure the movement of the front

wheels and the steering components

is not obstructed.

6-83

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the

weather, you should carry appropri-

ate emergency equipment. Some of

the items you may want to carry

include tire chains, tow straps or

chains, flashlight, emergency flares,

sand, shovel, jumper cables, window

scraper, gloves, ground cloth, cover-

alls, blanket, etc.

Do not place foreign objects or

materials in the engine compart-

ment

Placement of foreign objects or mate-

rials which prevent cooling of the

engine, in the engine compartment,

may cause a failure or combustion.

The manufacturer is not responsible

for the damage caused by such

placement.

Drive your vehicle when water

vapor condenses and accumu-

lates inside the exhaust pipes

When the vehicle is stopped for a

long time in winter while the engine is

running, water vapor may condense

and accumulate inside the exhaust

pipes. Water in the exhaust pipes

may cause noise, etc., but it is drained

driving at medium to high speed.

6-84

While Driving

Two labels on your driver’s door sill

show how much weight your vehicle

was designed to carry: the Tire and

Loading Information Label and the

Certification Label.

Before loading your vehicle, familiar-

ize yourself with the following terms

for determining your vehicle’s weight

ratings, from the vehicle’s specifica-

tions and the Certification Label:

Base Curb Weight

This is the weight of the vehicle

including a full tank of fuel and all

standard equipment. It does not

include passengers, cargo, or option-

al equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle

when you picked it up from your deal-

er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo Weight

This illustration includes all weight

added to the Base Curb Weight,

including cargo and optional equip-

ment.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight)

This is the total weight placed on

each axle (front and rear) - including

vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight

that can be carried by a single axle

(front or rear). These numbers are

shown on the Certification Label. The

total load on each axle must never

exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus

actual Cargo Weight plus passen-

gers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight

of the fully loaded vehicle (including

all options, equipment, passengers

and cargo). The GVWR is shown on

the Certification Label located on the

driver’s door sill.

Overloading

WARNING

The Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) and the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) for your

vehicle are on the Certification

Label attached to the driver’s (or

front passenger’s) door. Exceeding

these ratings can cause an acci-

dent or vehicle damage. You can

calculate the weight of your load

by weighing the items (and people)

before putting them in the vehicle.

Be careful not to overload your

vehicle.

VEHICLE WEIGHT

Hazard warning flasher ..................................................................................... 7-2

In case of an emergency while driving ............................................................ 7-2

If the engine stalls while driving ..................................................................... 7-2

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing .............................................. 7-2

If you have a flat tire while driving ................................................................7-3

If the engine will not start .................................................................................7-3

If the engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly ....................................7-3

If the engine turns over normally but doesn’t start .....................................7-3

Jump starting .....................................................................................................7-4

If the engine overheats .......................................................................................7-7

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - TYPE A ..........................................7-9

Low tire pressure telltale ................................................................................7-10

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator ................7-12

Changing a tire with TPMS ............................................................................7-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - TYPE B .........................................7-14

Check tire pressure ........................................................................................7-14

Tire pressure monitoring system ...................................................................7-15

Low tire pressure telltale ................................................................................7-16

Low tire pressure position telltale and tire pressure telltale .......................7-16

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator ................7-17

Changing a tire with TPMS ............................................................................7-18

If you have a flat tire (with spare tire) ..............................................................7-20

Jack and tools ...............................................................................................7-20

Removing and storing the spare tire ............................................................7-20

Changing tires ................................................................................................7-21

Jack label .......................................................................................................7-26

EC Declaration of conformity for Jack..........................................................7-27

Towing ..............................................................................................................7-28

Towing service ...............................................................................................7-28

Removable towing hook ..............................................................................7-29

Emergency towing .......................................................................................7-30

Emergency commodity ...................................................................................7-32

First aid kit .....................................................................................................7-32

Triangle reflector ...........................................................................................7-32

7. Emergency Situations

7-2

Emergency Situations

OSU2I079001



Type A

OSU2I079011



Type B

The hazard warning flasher serves as

a warning to other drivers to exercise

extreme caution when approaching,

overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emer-

gency repairs are being made or

when the vehicle is stopped near the

edge of a roadway.

To turn the hazard warning flasher on

or off, press the hazard warning flash-

er button with the ignition switch in

any position. The button is located in

the heater control switch panel.

All turn signal lights will flash simulta-

neously.

• The hazard warning flasher oper-

ates whether your vehicle is run-

ning or not.

• The turn signals do not work when

the hazard flasher is on.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

WHILE DRIVING

If the engine stalls while driv-

ing

• Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-

tiously off the road to a safe place.

• Turn on your hazard warning flash-

er.

• Try to start the engine again. If

your vehicle will not start, we rec-

ommend that you contact an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the engine stalls at a cross-

road or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or

crossing, if safe to do so, move the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position

and then push the v ehicle to a safe

location.

• If your vehicle has a manual trans-

mission not equipped with a igni-

tion lock switch, the vehicle can

move forward by shifting to the

2(second) or 3(third) gear and then

turning the starter without depress-

ing the clutch pedal.

7-3

If you have a flat tire while driv-

ing

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

• Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the vehicle slow

down while driving straight ahead.

Do not apply the brakes immedi-

ately or attempt to pull off the road

as this may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

When the vehicle has slowed to

such a speed that it is safe to do

so, brake carefully and pull off the

road. Drive off the road as far as

possible and park on firm, level

ground. If you are on a divided

highway, do not park in the median

area between the two traffic lanes.

• When the vehicle is stopped, press

the hazard warning flasher button,

move the shift lever into P (Park,

for Dual Clutch Transmission/Au-

tomatic Transmission) or neutral

(for manual transmission vehicle),

apply the parking brake, and place

the ignition switch in the LOCK/

OFF position.

• Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle. Be sure they all get out on

the side of the vehicle that is away

from traffic.

• When changing a flat tire, follow

the instructions provided later in

this chapter.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT

START

If the engine doesn’t turn over

or turns over slowly

• Be sure the for Dual Clutch Trans-

mission/Automatic Transmission

or P (Park) if it is a vehicle. The en-

gine starts only when the shift lever

is in N (Neutral) or P (Park).

• Check the battery connections to

be sure they are clean and tight.

• Turn on the interior light. If the light

dims or goes out when you operate

the starter, the battery is drained.

Do not push or pull the vehicle to start

it. This could cause damage to your

vehicle.

See instructions for “Jump

Starting” provided in this chapter.

WARNING

Pushing or pulling to start the ve-

hicle may cause the catalytic con-

verter overload, which can lead to

damage to the emission control

system.

If the engine turns over nor-

mally but doesn’t start

• Check the fuel level and add fuel if

necessary.

If the engine still does not start, we

recommend that you call an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

7-4

Emergency Situations

Jump starting can be dangerous if

done incorrectly. Follow the jump

starting procedure in this section to

avoid serious injury or damage to

your vehicle. If in doubt about how to

properly jump start your vehicle, we

strongly recommend that you have a

service technician or towing service

do it for you.

WARNING

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders, al-

ways follow these precautions

when working near or handling the

battery: Always read and follow

instructions carefully

when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection de-

signed to protect the

eyes from acid splash-

es.

Keep all flames, sparks,

or smoking materials

away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always

present in battery cells,

is highly combustible,

and may explode if ignit-

ed.

Keep batteries out of

reach of children.

Batteries contain sulfu-

ric acid which is highly

corrosive. Do not allow

acid to contact your

eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush

your eyes with clean water for at

least 15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention. If acid gets

on your skin, thoroughly wash the

area. If you feel pain or a burning

sensation, get medical attention

immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on the

case may cause battery acid to

leak. Lift with a battery carrier or

with your hands on opposite

corners.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle if your battery is

frozen.

• NEVER attempt to recharge the

battery when the vehicle’s bat-

tery cables are connected to the

battery.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage. NEVER

touch these components with

the engine running or when the

ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

• Do not allow the (+) and (-) jump-

er cables to touch. It may cause

sparks.

• The battery may rupture or ex-

plode when you jump start with

a low or frozen battery.

• Never attempt jump start if you

observe cracks, leaks or other

damage on Battery.

JUMP STARTING

7-5

CAUTION

• Improper jump starting proce-

dure can result in battery explo-

sion and acid burn hazard.

• Loosely connected battery ca-

bles could damage the electron-

ic control units.

• To disconnect battery terminals

wait for at least 2 minutes to al-

low discharge of high voltage or

it could lead to personal injury.

• While disconnecting, always

disconnect the -VE terminal first

and while connecting, always

connect the -VE terminal last.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your vehi-

cle:

• Only use a 12-volt power supply

(battery or jumper system) to

jump start your vehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle by push-starting.

i Information

An inappropriately dis-

posed battery can be harm-

ful to the environment and

human health. Dispose the

battery according to your

local law(s) or regulation.

Jump starting procedure

1. Position the vehicles close enough

that the jumper cables will reach,

but do not allow the vehicles to

touch.

2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in

the engine compartment at all

times, even when the vehicles are

turned off.

3. Turn off all electrical devices such

as radios, lights, air conditioning,

etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park, for

Dual Clutch Transmission/Auto-

matic Transmission vehicle) or

neutral (for manual transmission

vehicle), and set the parking

brakes. Turn both vehicles OFF.

1VQA4001

Booster Battery

Jumper Terminal

Jumper Cables

4. Connect the jumper cables in the

exact sequence shown in the illus-

tration. First connect one jumper

cable to the red, positive (+) jump-

er terminal of your vehicle (1).

5. Connect the other end of the jump-

er cable to the red, positive (+) bat-

tery/jumper terminal of the assist-

ing vehicle (2).

6. Connect the second jumper cable

to the black, negative (-) battery/

chassis ground of the assisting ve-

hicle (3).

7-6

Emergency Situations

7. Connect the other end of the sec-

ond jumper cable to the black, neg-

ative (-) chassis ground of your ve-

hicle (4).

Do not allow the jumper cables to

contact anything except the correct

battery or jumper terminals or the

correct ground. Do not lean over

the battery when making connec-

tions.

8. Start the engine of the assisting

vehicle and let it run at approxi-

mately 2,000 rpm for a few min-

utes. Then start your vehicle.

If your vehicle will not start after a few

attempts, it probably requires servic-

ing. In this event please seek quali-

fied assistance. If the cause of your

battery discharging is not apparent,

we recommend that your vehicle be

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

WARNING

Never connect Jumper Cable di-

rectly to the negative (-) terminal of

discharged Battery (Your Vehicle

Battery), or an Explosion may oc-

cur.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the

exact reverse order you connected

them:

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from

the black, negative (-) chassis

ground of your vehicle (4).

2. Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the black, nega-

tive (-) battery/chassis ground of

the assisting vehicle (3).

3. Disconnect the second jumper ca-

ble from the red, positive (+) bat-

tery/jumper terminal of the assist-

ing vehicle (2).

4. Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the red, positive

(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

7-7

If your temperature gauge indicates

overheating, you experience a loss of

power, or hear loud pinging or knock-

ing, the engine may be overheating. If

this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon

as it is safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (Park, for

Dual Clutch Transmission/Auto-

matic Transmission vehicle) or

neutral (for manual transmission

vehicle) and set the parking brake.

If the air conditioning is ON, turn it

OFF.

3. If engine coolant is running out un-

der the vehicle or steam is coming

out from the hood, stop the engine.

Do not open the hood until the

coolant has stopped running or the

steaming has stopped. If there is

no visible loss of engine coolant

and no steam, leave the engine

running and check to be sure the

engine cooling fan is operating. If

the fan is not running, turn the en-

gine off.

WARNING

While the engine is run-

ning, keep hands, cloth-

ing and tools away from

the moving parts such

as the cooling fan and

drive belt to prevent se-

rious injury.

4. Check for coolant leaking from the

radiator, hoses or under the vehi-

cle. (If the air conditioning had

been in use, it is normal for cold

water to be draining from it when

you stop.)

5. If engine coolant is leaking out,

stop the engine immediately and

we recommend that you call an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer for as-

sistance.

WARNING

NEVER remove the radi-

ator cap or the drain

plug while the engine

and radiator are hot. Hot

coolant and steam may

blow out under pressure, causing

serious injury.

Turn the engine off and wait until

the engine cools down. Use ex-

treme care when removing the ra-

diator cap. Wrap a thick towel

around it, and turn it counterclock-

wise slowly to the first stop. Step

back while the pressure is released

from the cooling system. When

you are sure all the pressure has

been released, press down on the

cap, using a thick towel, and con-

tinue turning counterclockwise to

remove it.

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

7-8

Emergency Situations

6. If you cannot find the cause of the

overheating, wait until the engine

temperature has returned to nor-

mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,

carefully add coolant to the reser-

voir to bring the fluid level in the

reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping

alert for further signs of overheat-

ing. If overheating happens again,

we recommend that you call an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer for as-

sistance.

NOTICE

• Serious loss of coolant indi-

cates a leak in the cooling sys-

tem and we recommend the sys-

tem be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• When the engine overheats from

low engine coolant, suddenly

adding engine coolant may

cause cracks in the engine. To

prevent damage, add engine

coolant slowly in small quanti-

ties.

7-9

OSU2I079012

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the ve-

hicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label, you should determine the prop-

er tire inflation pressure for those

tires.)

As an added safety feature, your ve-

hicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale when one or more of your tires

is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pres-

sure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the prop-

er pressure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may af-

fect the vehicle’s handling and stop-

ping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumina-

tion of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

7,5(35(6685(021,725,1*6<67(0ǣ7306Ǥǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

ǘ7<3($

7-10

Emergency Situations

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not oper-

ating properly. The TPMS malfunc-

tion indicator is combined with the

low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the

telltale will flash for approximately

one minute and then remain continu-

ously illuminated. This sequence will

continue upon subsequent vehicle

start-ups as long as the malfunction

exists. When the malfunction indica-

tor is illuminated, the system may not

be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS mal-

functions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of

replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-

sure that the replacement or alternate

tires and wheels allow the TPMS to

continue to function properly.

i Information

If the TPMS indicator does not illumi-

nate for 3 seconds when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position or

engine is running, or if it comes on af-

ter blinking for approximately one

minute, we recommend that you con-

tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Low tire pressure tell-

tale

ONX4E040019

When the tire pressure monitoring

system warning indicators are illumi-

nated, and warning message dis-

played on the cluster display, one or

more of your tires is significantly un-

der-inflated. The low tire pressure po-

sition telltale warning message will

indicate which tire is significantly un-

der-inflated by illuminating the corre-

sponding position light.

If either telltale or cluster display

warning message displays immedi-

ately reduce your speed, avoid hard

cornering and anticipate increased

stopping distances. You should stop

and check your tires as soon as pos-

sible.

7-11

Inflate the tires to the proper pressure

as indicated on the vehicle’s placard

or tire inflation pressure label located

on the driver’s side center pillar outer

panel.

If you cannot reach a service station

or if the tire cannot hold the newly

added air, replace the low pressure

tire with a spare tire.

After you replace the low pressure

tire with the spare tire, one of the fol-

lowing will happen:

• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may blink for approximately 1 min-

ute and then remain continuously

illuminated because the TPMS

sensor is not mounted on the spare

wheel. (changed tire equipped with

a sensor not in the vehicle)

• The TPMS malfunction indicator

will remain continuously illuminat-

ed while driving because the TPMS

sensor is not mounted on the spare

wheel. (changed tire equipped with

a sensor in the vehicle)

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the low

tire pressure telltale may be illumi-

nated if the tire pressure was ad-

justed to the recommended tire in-

flation pressure in warm weather.

It does not mean your TPMS is

malfunctioning because the de-

creased temperature leads to a

proportional lowering of tire pres-

sure.

When you drive your vehicle from

a warm area to a cold area or from

a cold area to a warm area, or the

outside temperature is greatly

higher or lower, you should check

the tire inflation pressure and ad-

just the tires to the recommended

tire inflation pressure.

WARNING

Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and

can contribute to loss of vehicle

control and increased braking dis-

tances.

Continued driving on low pressure

tires can cause the tires to over-

heat and fail.

7-12

Emergency Situations

TPMS (Tire Pressure

Monitoring System)

malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will

illuminate after it blinks for approxi-

mately one minute when there is a

problem with the Tire Pressure Moni-

toring System. If the system is able to

correctly detect an under inflation

warning at the same time as system

failure then it will illuminate the TPMS

malfunction indicator.

We recommend that the system be

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

NOTICE

• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may be illuminated if the vehicle

is moving around electric power

supply cables or radios trans-

mitter such as at police stations,

government and public offices,

broadcasting stations, military

installations, airports, or trans-

mitting towers, etc. This can in-

terfere with normal operation of

the Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may illuminate if snow chains or

some separately purchased de-

vices such as notebook comput-

ers, mobile charger, remote

starter, navigation etc. are used

in the vehicle. This can interfere

with normal operation of the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS).

Changing a tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire

Pressure will come on. We recom-

mend that the flat tire be checked by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

We recommend that you use a

puncture-repairing agent approved

by HYUNDAI.

The sealant on the tire pressure

sensor and wheel shall be elemi-

nated when you replace the tire

with a new one.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire

pressure sensor mounted inside the

tire behind the valve stem. You must

use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-

ommended that you have your tires

serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Even if you replace the low pressure

tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire

Pressure Telltale will blink or remain

on until the low pressure tire is re-

paired and placed on the vehicle.

After you replace the low pressure

tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire

Pressure Telltale may blink or illumi-

nate after a few minutes because the

TPMS sensor mounted on the spare

wheel is not initiated.

Once the low pressure tire is re-in-

flated to the recommended pressure

and installed on the vehicle or the

new TPMS sensor mounted on the

wheel, the TPMS malfunction indica-

tor and the low tire pressure and posi-

tion telltales will turn off within a few

minutes of driving.

7-13

If the indicator does not turn off after

a few minutes of driving, we recom-

mend that the system be checked by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

If original mounted tire is replaced

with the spare tire, the TPMS sen-

sor on the replaced spare wheel

should be initiated and we recom-

mend that the TPMS sensor on the

original mounted wheel be deacti-

vated by a HYUNDAI dealer. If the

TPMS sensor on the original

mounted wheel located in the

spare tire carrier still activates, the

tire pressure monitoring system

may not operate properly. We rec-

ommend that the system be ser-

viced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

You may not be able to identify a low

tire by simply looking at it. Always use

a good quality tire pressure gauge to

measure the tire’s inflation pressure.

Please note that a tire that is hot (from

being driven) will have a higher pres-

sure measurement than a tire that is

cold.

A cold tire means the vehicle is in

parked position for at least 3 hours or

driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in

that period.

Allow the tire to cool before measur-

ing the inflation pressure. Always be

sure the tire is cold before inflating to

the recommended pressure.

NOTICE

We recommend that you use the

tire sealant approved by HYUNDAI

if your vehicle is equipped with a

Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

The liquid sealant can damage the

tire pressure sensors.

WARNING

TPMS

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damage

caused by external factors such

as nails or road debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instability,

immediately take your foot off

the accelerator, apply the brakes

gradually and with light force,

and slowly move to a safe posi-

tion off the road.

WARNING

Protecting TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or dis-

abling the Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing System (TPMS) components

may interfere with the system’s

ability to warn the driver of low tire

pressure conditions and/or TPMS

malfunctions. Tampering with,

modifying, or disabling the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) components may void the

warranty for that portion of the ve-

hicle.

7-14

Emergency Situations

OSU2I079012

ONX4E080005

(1) Low tire pressure telltale /

TPMS malfunction indicator

(2) Low tire pressure position telltale

and tire pressure telltale (Shown

on the cluster display)

Check tire pressure

ONX4E040019

• You can check the tire pressure in

the Assist mode on the cluster.

Refer to the “Cluster Display

Modes” in chapter 4.

• Tire pressure is displayed after a

few minutes of driving after initial

engine start up.

• If tire pressure is not displayed

when the vehicle is stopped, “Drive

to display” message will appear.

After driving, check the tire pres-

sure.

• The displayed tire pressure values

may differ from those measured

with a tire pressure gauge.

• You can change the tire pressure

unit in the User Settings mode on

the instrument cluster.

- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to “Cluster

Modes” in chapter 4).

7,5(35(6685(021,725,1*6<67(0ǣ7306Ǥǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

ǘ7<3(%

7-15

Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem

WARNING

Over-inflation or under-inflation

can reduce tire life, adversely af-

fect vehicle handling, and lead to

sudden tire failure that may cause

loss of vehicle control resulting in

an accident.

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the ve-

hicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label, you should determine the prop-

er tire inflation pressure for those

tires.)

As an added safety feature, your ve-

hicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale when one or more of your tires

is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pres-

sure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the prop-

er pressure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may af-

fect the vehicle’s handling and stop-

ping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumina-

tion of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not oper-

ating properly. The TPMS malfunc-

tion indicator is combined with the

low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the

telltale will flash for approximately

one minute and then remain continu-

ously illuminated. This sequence will

continue upon subsequent vehicle

start-ups as long as the malfunction

exists. When the malfunction indica-

tor is illuminated, the system may not

be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS mal-

functions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of

replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-

sure that the replacement or alternate

tires and wheels allow the TPMS to

continue to function properly.

i Information

If the TPMS indicator does not illumi-

nate for 3 seconds when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position or

engine is running, or if it comes on af-

ter blinking for approximately one

minute, we recommend that you con-

tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-16

Emergency Situations

Low tire pressure tell-

tale

Low tire pressure position tell-

tale and tire pressure telltale

ONX4E040019

When the tire pressure monitoring

system warning indicators are illumi-

nated and a warning message dis-

played on the cluster display, one or

more of your tires is significantly un-

der-inflated. The low tire pressure po-

sition telltale light will indicate which

tire is significantly under-inflated by

illuminating the corresponding posi-

tion light.

If either telltale illuminates, immedi-

ately reduce your speed, avoid hard

cornering and anticipate increased

stopping distances. You should stop

and check your tires as soon as pos-

sible. Inflate the tires to the proper

pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s

placard or tire inflation pressure label

located on the driver’s side center pil-

lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a

service station or if the tire cannot

hold the newly added air, replace the

low pressure tire with a spare tire.

If you drive the vehicle for about 10

minutes at speeds above 25 km/h af-

ter replacing the low pressure tire

with the spare tire, the following will

happen:

• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may blink for approximately 1 min-

ute and then remain continuously

illuminated because the TPMS

sensor is not mounted on the spare

wheel.

NOTICE

In winter or cold weather, the low

tire pressure telltale may be illumi-

nated if the tire pressure was ad-

justed to the recommended tire in-

flation pressure in warm weather.

It does not mean your TPMS is

malfunctioning because the de-

creased temperature leads to a

proportional lowering of tire pres-

sure.

When you drive your vehicle from

a warm area to a cold area or from

a cold area to a warm area, or the

outside temperature is greatly

higher or lower, you should check

the tire inflation pressure and ad-

just the tires to the recommended

tire inflation pressure.

7-17

WARNING

Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and

can contribute to loss of vehicle

control and increased braking dis-

tances.

Continued driving on low pressure

tires can cause the tires to over-

heat and fail.

TPMS (Tire Pressure

Monitoring System)

malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will

illuminate after it blinks for approxi-

mately one minute when there is a

problem with the Tire Pressure Moni-

toring System. If the system is able to

correctly detect an under inflation

warning at the same time as system

failure then it will illuminate the TPMS

malfunction indicator.

We recommend that the system be

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

NOTICE

If there is a malfunction with the

TPMS, the low tire pressure posi-

tion telltale will not be displayed

even though the vehicle has an un-

der-inflated tire.

7-18

Emergency Situations

CAUTION

• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may be illuminated if the vehicle

is moving around electric power

supply cables or radios trans-

mitter such as at police stations,

government and public offices,

broadcasting stations, military

installations, airports, or trans-

mitting towers, etc. This can in-

terfere with normal operation of

the Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may illuminate if snow chains or

some separately purchased de-

vices such as notebook comput-

ers, mobile charger, remote

starter, navigation etc. are used

in the vehicle. This can interfere

with normal operation of the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS).

Changing a tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the low Tire

Pressure and Position telltales will

come on.

We recommend that you have the flat

tire repaired by an authorized HYUN-

DAI dealer as soon as possible or re-

place the flat tire with the spare tire.

CAUTION

It is recommended that you do not

use a puncture-repairing agent not

approved by HYUNDAI dealer or

the equivalent specified for your

vehicle to repair and/or inflate a

low pressure tire. Tire sealant not

approved by HYUNDAI dealer or

the equivalent specified for your

vehicle may damage the tire pres-

sure sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire

pressure sensor mounted inside the

tire behind the valve stem. You must

use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-

ommended that you have your tires

serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Even if you replace the low pressure

tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire

Pressure Telltale will blink or remain

on until the low pressure tire is re-

paired and placed on the vehicle.

After you replace the low pressure

tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire

Pressure Telltale may blink or illumi-

nate after a few minutes because the

TPMS sensor mounted on the spare

wheel is not initiated.

7-19

Once the low pressure tire is re-in-

flated to the recommended pressure

and installed on the vehicle or the

new TPMS sensor mounted on the

wheel, the TPMS malfunction indica-

tor and the low tire pressure and posi-

tion telltales will turn off within a few

minutes of driving.

If the indicator does not turn off after

a few minutes of driving, we recom-

mend that the system be checked by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

If original mounted tire is replaced

with the spare tire, the TPMS sen-

sor on the replaced spare wheel

should be initiated and we recom-

mend that the TPMS sensor on the

original mounted wheel be deacti-

vated by a HYUNDAI dealer. If the

TPMS sensor on the original

mounted wheel located in the

spare tire carrier still activates, the

tire pressure monitoring system

may not operate properly. We rec-

ommend that the system be ser-

viced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

You may not be able to identify a low

tire by simply looking at it. Always use

a good quality tire pressure gauge to

measure the tire’s inflation pressure.

Please note that a tire that is hot (from

being driven) will have a higher pres-

sure measurement than a tire that is

cold.

A cold tire means the vehicle is in

parked position for at least 3 hours or

driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in

that period.

Allow the tire to cool before measur-

ing the inflation pressure. Always be

sure the tire is cold before inflating to

the recommended pressure.

NOTICE

We recommend that you use the

tire sealant approved by HYUNDAI

if your vehicle is equipped with a

Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

The liquid sealant can damage the

tire pressure sensors.

WARNING

TPMS

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damage

caused by external factors such

as nails or road debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instability,

immediately take your foot off

the accelerator, apply the brakes

gradually and with light force,

and slowly move to a safe posi-

tion off the road.

WARNING

Protecting TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or dis-

abling the Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing System (TPMS) components

may interfere with the system’s

ability to warn the driver of low tire

pressure conditions and/or TPMS

malfunctions. Tampering with,

modifying, or disabling the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) components may void the

warranty for that portion of the ve-

hicle.

7-20

Emergency Situations

WARNING

Changing a tire can be dangerous.

Follow the instructions in this sec-

tion when changing a tire to reduce

the risk of serious injury or death.

CAUTION

Be careful as you use the jack han-

dle to stay clear of the flat end. The

flat end has sharp edges that could

cause cuts.

WARNING

Be cautious as the minimum

ground clearance gets lower when

you store the original tire in the

bottom of the vehicle after replac-

ing it with a spare tire.

In particular, drive below 30 km/h

(18 mph) when driving over a

speed bump and on uphill/down-

hill/uneven road.

Jack and tools

OSU2I071028L

The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut

wrench and socket are stored in the

cargo area.

Pull up the luggage box cover to

reach this equipment.

(1) Jack handle

(2) Jack

(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

(4) Socket

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency

tire changing only.

To prevent the jack from "rattling"

while the vehicle is in motion, store it

properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce

the possibility of personal injury.

Removing and storing the

spare tire

Your spare tire is stored underneath

your vehicle, directly below the cargo

area.

OTMA068022

To remove the spare tire:

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Find the plastic hex bolt cover and

remove the cover with a coin or flat

- blade screwdriver.

,)<28+$9($)/$77,5(ǣ:,7+63$5(7,5(,)(48,33('Ǥ

7-21

OSU2I071027L

3. Connect the socket and wheel lug

nut wrench.

4. Loosen the bolt enough to lower

the spare tire. Turn the wrench

counterclockwise until the spare

tire reaches the ground.

5. After the spare tire reaches the

ground, continue to turn the wrench

counterclockwise, and draw the

spare tire outside. Never rotate the

wrench excessively, otherwise the

spare tire carrier may be damaged.

OTM068024L

6. Draw out the retainer guide (1) the

through the center hole of spare

tire.

Changing tires

WARNING

A vehicle can slip or roll off of a

jack causing serious injury or

death to you or those nearby. Take

the following safety precautions:

• Do not get under a vehicle that

is supported by a jack.

• NEVER attempt to change a tire

in the lane of traffic. ALWAYS

move the vehicle completely off

the road on level, firm ground

away from traffic before trying

to change a tire. If you cannot

find a level, firm place off the

road, call a towing service for

assistance.

• Be sure to use the jack provided

with the vehicle.

• ALWAYS place the jack on the

designated jacking positions on

the vehicle and NEVER on the

bumpers or any other part of the

vehicle for jacking support.

• Do not start or run the engine

while the vehicle is on the jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain

in the vehicle while it is on the

jack.

• Keep children away from the

road and the vehicle.

7-22

Emergency Situations

Follow these steps to change your

vehicle’s tire:

1. Park on a level, firm surface.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park,

for Dual Clutch Transmission/Au-

tomatic Transmission vehicle) or

neutral (for manual transmission

vehicle), apply the parking brake,

and place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

3. Press the hazard warning flasher

button.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,

jack, jack handle, and spare tire

from the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of the

tire diagonally opposite of the tire

you are changing.

OSU2I079004

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter-

clockwise one turn each in the or-

der shown above, but do not re-

move any lug nuts until the tire has

been raised off of the ground.

OSU2I079006

7. Place the jack at the designated

jacking position under the frame

closest to the tire you are chang-

ing. The jacking positions are

plates welded to the frame with two

tabs and a raised dot. Never jack

any other position or part of the ve-

hicle. Doing so may damage the

side seal molding of other parts of

the vehicle.

WARNING

- Jack location

To reduce the possibility of injury,

be sure to use only the jack provid-

ed with the vehicle and in the cor-

rect jack position; never use any

other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

7-23

OSU2I071007

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack

and turn it clockwise, raising the

vehicle until the tire clears the

ground. Make sure the vehicle is

stable on the jack.

9. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel

lug nut wrench and remove them

with your fingers. Remove the

wheel from the studs and lay it flat

on the ground out of the way. Re-

move any dirt or debris from the

studs, mounting surfaces, and

wheel.

10. Install the spare tire onto the

studs of the hub.

11. Tighten the lug nuts with your fin-

gers onto the studs with the small-

er end of the lug nuts closest to

the wheel.

12. Lower the vehicle to the ground

by turning the jack handle coun-

terclockwise.

OSU2I079005

13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to

tighten the lug nuts in the order

shown. Double-check each lug

nut until they are tight. After

changing tires, we recommend

that an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer tighten the lug nuts to their

proper torque as soon as possi-

ble. The wheel lug nut should

be tightened to 11~13 kgf.m

(79~94 lbf.ft).

7-24

Emergency Situations

If you have a tire gauge, check the

tire pressure (see “Tires and Wheels”

in chapter 2 for tire pressure instruc-

tions.). If the pressure is lower or

higher than recommended, drive

slowly to the nearest service station

and adjust it to the recommended

pressure. Always reinstall the valve

cap after checking or adjusting tire

pressure. If the cap is not replaced,

air may leak from the tire. If you lose

a valve cap, buy another and install it

as soon as possible. After changing

tires, secure the flat tire and return

the jack and tools to their proper stor-

age locations.

i Information

Check the tire pressure as soon as pos-

sible after installing a spare tire. Ad-

just it to the recommended pressure.

NOTICE

Your vehicle has metric threads on

the studs and lug nuts. Make cer-

tain during tire changing that the

same nuts that were removed are

reinstalled. If you have to replace

your lug nuts make sure they have

metric threads to avoid damaging

the studs and ensure the wheel is

properly secured to the hub. We

recommend that you consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for as-

sistance.

If any of the equipment such as the

jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equip-

ment is damaged or in poor condition,

do not attempt to change the tire and

call for assistance.

Use of compact spare tires

(if equipped)

Compact spare tires are designed for

emergency use only. Drive carefully

on the compact spare tire and always

follow the safety precautions.

WARNING

To prevent compact spare tire fail-

ure and loss of control possibly

resulting in an accident:

• Use the compact spare tire only

in an emergency.

• NEVER operate your vehicle

over 80 km/h (50 mph).

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s

maximum load rating or the load

carrying capacity shown on the

sidewall of the compact spare

tire.

• Do not use the compact spare

tire continuously. Repair or re-

place the original tire as soon as

possible to avoid failure of the

compact spare tire.

When driving with the compact spare

tire mounted to your vehicle:

• Check the tire pressure after in-

stalling the compact spare tire. The

compact spare tire should be in-

flated to 420 kPa (60 psi).

• Do not take this vehicle through an

automatic car wash while the com-

pact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use the compact spare tire

on any other vehicle because this

tire has been designed especially

for your vehicle.

7-25

• The compact spare tire’s tread life

is shorter than a regular tire. In-

spect your compact spare tire reg-

ularly and replace worn compact

spare tires with the same size and

design, mounted on the same

wheel.

• Do not use more than one compact

spare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the com-

pact spare tire is installed.

i Information

When the original tire and wheel are

repaired and reinstalled on the vehicle,

the lug nut torque must be set correctly

to prevent wheel vibration. The correct

lug nut tightening torque is 11~13

kgf.m (79~94 lbf.ft).

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the compact

spare tire and your vehicle:

• Drive slowly enough for the road

conditions to avoid all hazards,

such as a potholes or debris.

• Avoid driving over obstacles.

The compact spare tire diameter

is smaller than the diameter of a

conventional tire and reduces

the ground clearance approxi-

mately 25 mm (1 inch).

• Do not use tire chains on the

compact spare tire. Because of

the smaller size, a tire chain will

not fit properly.

• Do not use the compact spare

tire on any other wheels, nor

should standard tires, snow

tires, wheel covers or trim rings

be used with the compact spare

wheel.

7-26

Emergency Situations

1. Model Name

2. Maximum allowable load

3. When using the jack, set your

parking brake.

4. When using the jack, stop the en-

gine.

5. Do not get under a vehicle that is

supported by a jack.

6. The designated locations under

the frame

7. When supporting the vehicle, the

base plate of jack must be vertical

under the lifting point.

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles

with manual transmission or move

the shift lever to the P position on

vehicles with Dual Clutch Trans-

mission/Automatic Transmission

9. The jack should be used on firm

level ground.

10. Jack manufacture

11. Production date

12. Representative company and ad-

dress



Example

• Type B

• Type A

OHYK065011

OHYK065010

Jack label

❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

7-27

EC Declaration of conformity for Jack

NX4I082001

7-28

Emergency Situations

Towing service

OSU2I071020L

[A] : Dolly

If emergency towing is necessary, we

recommend having it done by an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer or a com-

mercial tow-truck service. Proper lift-

ing and towing procedures are

necessary to prevent damage to the

vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or

flatbed is recommended.

On 2WD vehicles, if the transmission

is operable in N (Neutral), it is only

acceptable to tow the vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground (without

dollies) and the front wheels off the

ground. If the transmission is not

shifted to N (Neutral), the vehicle

should never be towed with the

wheels on the ground. If any of the

loaded wheels or suspension compo-

nents are damaged or the vehicle is

being towed with the front wheels on

the ground, use a towing dolly under

the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial

tow truck and wheel dollies are not

used, the front of the vehicle should

always be lifted, not the rear.

OSU2I071021L

OSU2I071022L

OSU2I071024L

CAUTION

• Do not tow the vehicle with the

front wheels on the ground as

this may cause damage to the

vehicle and transmission.

• Do not tow with sling-type equip-

ment. Use a wheel lift or flatbed

equipment.

• Do not tow the vehicle with four

wheels in contact with the

ground if it is the vehicle

equipped with IVT, AT or DCT.

Otherwise, the transmission will

be seriously damaged. Also,

make sure not to tow the vehicle

connecting it with other vehicles

including camper vans.

TOWING

7-29

WARNING

If your vehicle is equipped with a

rollover sensor, place the ignition

switch in the OFF or ACC position

when the vehicle is being towed.

The side impact and curtain air

bag may deploy if the sensor de-

tects the situation as a rollover.

When towing your vehicle in an emer-

gency without wheel dollies:

1. Place the ignition switch in the

ACC position.

2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

Failure to place the shift lever in N

(Neutral) when being towed with

the front wheels on the ground can

cause internal damage to the

transmission.

Removable towing hook

OSU2I079009

1. Open the tailgate, and remove the

towing hook from the tool case.

2. Remove the hole cover pressing

the lower part of the cover on the

front bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it

clockwise into the hole until it is ful-

ly secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and in-

stall the cover after use.

7-30

Emergency Situations

Emergency towing

OSU2I079010



Front



Rear

OSU2I071029L

If towing is necessary, we recom-

mend you have it done by an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer or a commer-

cial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tem-

porarily towed using a cable or chain

secured to the emergency towing

hook at the front (or rear) of the vehi-

cle.

Use extreme caution when towing the

vehicle with a cable or chain. A driver

must be in the vehicle to steer it and

operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done

only on hard-surfaced roads for a

short distance and at low speeds.

Also, the wheels, axles, power train,

steering and brakes must all be in

good condition.

CAUTION

The driver must be in the vehicle

for steering and braking opera-

tions when the vehicle is being

towed. Passengers other than the

driver must not be in the vehicle.

Always follow these emergency tow-

ing precautions:

• Place the ignition switch in the

ACC position so the steering wheel

is not locked.

• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

• Release the parking brake.

• Depress the brake pedal with more

force than normal since you will

have reduced braking perfor-

mance.

• More steering effort will be required

because the power steering sys-

tem will be disabled.

• Use a vehicle heavier than your

own to tow your vehicle.

• The drivers of both vehicles should

communicate with each other fre-

quently.

• Before emergency towing, check

that the hook is not broken or dam-

aged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain

securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady

and even force.

7-31

OSU2I071023L

• Use a towing cable or chain less

than 5 m (16 feet) long. Attach a

white or red cloth (about 30 cm (12

inches) wide) in the middle of the

cable or chain for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so the towing cable

or chain remains tight during tow-

ing.

• Before towing, check the automat-

ic transmission for fluid leaks un-

der your vehicle. If the automatic

transmission fluid is leaking, flat-

bed equipment or a towing dolly

must be used.

NOTICE

Accelerate or decelerate the vehi-

cle in a slow and gradual manner

while maintaining tension on the

tow rope or chain to start or drive

the vehicle, otherwise tow hooks

and the vehicle may be damaged.

NOTICE

To avoid damage to your vehicle

and vehicle components when

towing:

• Always pull straight ahead when

using the towing hooks. Do not

pull from the side or at a vertical

angle.

• Do not use the towing hooks to

pull a vehicle out of mud, sand

or other conditions from which

the vehicle cannot be driven out

under its own power.

• Limit the vehicle speed to 15

km/h (10 mph) and drive less

than 1.5 km (1 mile) when towing

to avoid serious damage to the

transmission.

7-32

Emergency Situations

Your vehicle is equipped with emer-

gency commodities to help you re-

spond to emergency situation.

First aid kit

Supplies for use in giving first aid

such as bandage and adhesive tape,

etc. are provided.

Triangle reflector

Place the triangle reflector on the

road to warn oncoming vehicles

during emergencies, such as when

the vehicle is parked by the roadside

due to problems.

EMERGENCY COMMODITY

Engine compartment ........................................................................................8-4

Maintenance services ....................................................................................... 8-6

Owner’s responsibility .................................................................................... 8-6

Owner maintenance precautions .................................................................8-7

Owner maintenance .........................................................................................8-8

Owner maintenance schedule .....................................................................8-9

Scheduled maintenance services ....................................................................8-11

Normal Maintenance Schedule - Petrol Engine .......................................... 8-12

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions- Petrol Engine ..................8-16

Normal Maintenance Schedule - Diesel Engine .........................................8-18

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions - Diesel Engine ................8-22

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ...............................................8-24

Engine oil ...........................................................................................................8-28

Checking the engine oil level (Petrol engine) ..............................................8-28

Checking the engine oil level (Diesel engine) .............................................8-29

Changing the engine oil and filter ................................................................ 8-31

Engine coolant ..................................................................................................8-32

Checking the coolant level ...........................................................................8-32

Recommended engine coolant ....................................................................8-34

Changing the coolant ....................................................................................8-34

Brake/clutch fluid ............................................................................................8-35

Checking the brake/clutch fluid level ..........................................................8-35

Automatic transmission fluid ..........................................................................8-37

Changing the automatic transmission fluid ................................................8-37

Washer fluid ..................................................................................................... 8-38

Checking the washer fluid level ................................................................ 8-38

Parking brake ................................................................................................... 8-39

Checking the parking brake......................................................................... 8-39

Fuel filter (for diesel) ........................................................................................8-40

Draining water from fuel filter .....................................................................8-40

Fuel filter cartridge replacement ................................................................8-40

8. Maintenance

Air cleaner .........................................................................................................8-41

Filter replacement .........................................................................................8-41

Climate control air filter ..................................................................................8-43

Filter inspection ............................................................................................ 8-43

Filter replacement ........................................................................................ 8-43

Wiper blades ................................................................................................... 8-45

Blade inspection ........................................................................................... 8-45

Blade replacement ..................................................................................... 8-45

Battery ...............................................................................................................8-47

For best battery service ................................................................................8-47

Battery capacity label .................................................................................8-49

Battery recharging ........................................................................................8-49

Reset items ...................................................................................................8-50

Battery replacement ....................................................................................8-50

Tires and wheels ...............................................................................................8-51

Tire care ........................................................................................................8-51

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...............................................8-51

Checking tire inflation pressure .................................................................. 8-53

Tire rotation ................................................................................................... 8-54

Wheel alignment and tire balance ...............................................................8-55

Tire replacement ...........................................................................................8-55

Wheel replacement ......................................................................................8-57

Tire traction ....................................................................................................8-57

Tire maintenance ..........................................................................................8-57

Tire sidewall labeling .....................................................................................8-57

Low aspect ratio tire ......................................................................................8-61

Fuses .................................................................................................................8-62

Instrument panel fuse replacement ...........................................................8-63

Engine compartment panel fuse replacement ..........................................8-64

Fuse/relay panel description .......................................................................8-66

Light bulbs ..........................................................................................................8-71

Headlight, position light, turn signal light, fog light and

daytime running light bulb replacement ....................................................8-72

Side repeater lamp bulb replacement ........................................................8-75

Rear combination light bulb replacement ..................................................8-76

Back up lamp replacement ...........................................................................8-78

High mounted stop light replacement ........................................................8-79

License plate light bulb replacement .........................................................8-79

Interior light bulb replacement ...................................................................8-80

Appearance care .............................................................................................. 8-82

Exterior care .................................................................................................. 8-82

Interior care...................................................................................................8-88

Emission control system .................................................................................8-92

Crankcase emission control system ........................................................... 8-92

Evaporative emission control system ......................................................... 8-92

Exhaust emission control system ................................................................8-93

Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) (for diesel engine) ............................8-97

Self Regeneration Mode .............................................................................8-103

8-4

Maintenance

1. Engine oil dipstick

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Engine coolant reservoir

4. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir

5. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

6. Air cleaner

7. Battery

8. Fuse box

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OSU2I092001



Petrol Engine (Smartstream G1.5 T-GDi)

8-5

1. Engine oil dipstick

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Engine coolant reservoir

4. Radiator cap

5. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Battery

9. Engine room fuse block

The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OSU2I089003



Diesel Engine (1.5 VGT)

8-6

Maintenance

You should exercise the utmost care

to prevent damage to your vehicle

and injury to yourself whenever per-

forming any maintenance or inspec-

tion procedures.

We recommend you have your vehi-

cle maintained and repaired by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer meets

HYUNDAI’s high service quality stan-

dards and receives technical support

from HYUNDAI in order to provide

you with a high level of service satis-

faction.

Owner’s responsibility

i Information

Maintenance Service and Record Re-

tention are the owner’s responsibility.

We recommend in general that you

have your vehicle serviced by an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

You should retain documents that

show proper maintenance has been

performed on your vehicle in accor-

dance with the scheduled mainte-

nance service charts shown on the

following pages. You need this infor-

mation to establish your compliance

with the servicing and maintenance

requirements of your vehicle warran-

ties.

Detailed warranty information is pro-

vided in your Service Passport.

Repairs and adjustments required as

a result of improper maintenance or a

lack of required maintenance are not

covered when your vehicle is covered

by warranty.

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

8-7

Owner maintenance precau-

tions

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient

servicing may result in operational

problems with your vehicle that could

lead to vehicle damage, an accident,

or personal injury. This chapter pro-

vides instructions only for the mainte-

nance items that are easy to perform.

Several procedures can be done only

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

with special tools.

Your vehicle should not be modified

in any way. Such modifications may

adversely affect the performance,

safety or durability of your vehicle

and may, in addition, violate condi-

tions of the limited warranties cover-

ing the vehicle.

i Information

Improper owner maintenance during

the warranty period may affect war-

ranty coverage. For details, read the

separate Service Passport provided

with the vehicle. If you’re unsure about

any servicing or maintenance proce-

dure, we recommend that the system

be serviced by an authorized HYUND-

AI dealer.

WARNING

Maintenance work

• Performing maintenance work

on a vehicle can be dangerous.

You can be seriously injured

while performing some mainte-

nance procedures. If you lack

sufficient knowledge and expe-

rience or the proper tools and

equipment to do the work, we

recommend that the system be

serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Working under the hood with

the engine running is danger-

ous. It becomes even more dan-

gerous when you wear jewelry

or loose clothing. These can be-

come entangled in moving parts

and result in injury.

8-8

Maintenance

WARNING

Performing maintenance work on

a vehicle can be dangerous. If you

lack sufficient knowledge and ex-

perience or the proper tools and

equipment to do the work, we rec-

ommend that the system be ser-

viced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer. ALWAYS follow these pre-

cautions for performing mainte-

nance work:

• Park your vehicle on level

ground, move the shift button

into the P (Park) position, apply

the parking brake, place the ig-

nition switch in the LOCK/OFF

position.

• Block the tires (front and back)

to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing.

Remove loose clothing or jewel-

ry that can become entangled in

moving parts.

• If you must run the engine

during maintenance, do so in an

outdoor area or in an area with

plenty of ventilation.

• Keep flames, sparks, or smok-

ing materials away from the bat-

tery and fuel-related parts.

WARNING

Touching metal parts

Do not touch metal parts (includ-

ing strut bars) while the engine is

operating or hot. Doing so could

result in serious personal injury.

Turn the engine off and wait until

the metal parts cool down to per-

form maintenance work on the ve-

hicle.

The following lists are vehicle checks

and inspections that should be per-

formed at the frequencies indicated

to help ensure safe, dependable op-

eration of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be

brought to the attention of your dealer

as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance Checks

are generally not covered by warran-

ties and you may be charged for la-

bor, parts and lubricants used.

WARNING

Diesel Engine

Never manipulate or modify the in-

jection system while running the

diesel engine or within 30 seconds

after turning OFF the diesel en-

gine. The high-pressure pump,

high-pressure pipes, rail, and in-

jectors are still subject to high

pressure immediately after stop-

ping the diesel engine.

When the fuel leakage vents out, it

may cause serious body injury.

Any people, who are implanted

with the artificial cardiac pacemak-

er, should remain away from the

ECU or the wiring harness by at

least 30 cm, while running the die-

sel engine. The high currents of

the electronic engine control sys-

tem produce a considerable

amount of magnetic fields.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

8-9

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the coolant level in coolant

reservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

• Check the radiator and condenser.

Check if the front of the radiator

and condenser are clean and not

blocked with leaves, dirt or insects

etc.

If any of the above parts are ex-

tremely dirty or you are not sure of

their condition, we recommend

that you contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Be careful when checking your en-

gine coolant level if the engine is

hot. Scalding hot coolant and

steam may blow out under pres-

sure. This could cause burns or

other serious injuries.

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of

the exhaust or any smell of ex-

haust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice any increased steer-

ing effort or looseness in the steer-

ing wheel, or change in its straight-

ahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly

turns slightly or “pulls” to one side

when traveling on smooth, level

road.

• When stopping, listen and check

for unusual sounds, pulling to one

side, increased brake pedal travel

or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the

operation of your transmission oc-

curs, check the transmission fluid

level.

• Check Dual Clutch Transmission/

Automatic Transmission P (Park)

function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your

vehicle (water dripping from the air

conditioning system during or after

use is normal).

8-10

Maintenance

At least monthly:

• Check the coolant level in the en-

gine coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn

signals and hazard warning flash-

ers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all

tires including the spare for tires

that are worn, show uneven wear,

or are damaged.

• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.

At least twice a year

(for example, every Spring and

Fall):

• Check the radiator, heater and air

conditioning hoses for leaks or

damage.

• Check the windshield washer

spray and wiper operation. Clean

wiper blades with clean cloth

dampened with washer fluid.

• Check the headlight alignment.

• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.

• Check the lap/shoulder belts for

wear and function.

At least once a year:

• Clean the body and door drain

holes.

• Lubricate the door hinges and

checks, and hood hinges.

• Lubricate the door and hood locks

and latches.

• Lubricate the door rubber weather-

strips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transmission linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake/clutch fluid level.

8-11

*1. Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before

starting a long trip.

*2. Driving in ambient temperature over 40 °C (104°F) or driving at constant

highway speeds must conform the severe driving conditions.

*3. The engine oil level should be checked regularly and maintained properly.

Operating with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and

such damage is not covered by warranty.

*4. Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if

necessary. We recommend that an authorized HYUNDAI dealer should

perform the operation.

*5. When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your

vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An

improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine

damage.

*6. Manual/Auto/iMT/iVT transaxle fluid should be changed anytime the

vehicle has been submerged in water.

*7. It is applicable only when using a qualified fuel <”EN228 or equivalent”>. if

the same is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended.

Additives are available from your authorised HYUNDAI dealer along with

information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

*8. This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some

important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power,

hard starting problem etc., replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of

maintenance schedule. We recommend that you consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for details.

*9. Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler & alternator pulley, starter & all chassis

electrical items. Correct or replace if necessary.

*10. For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it’s interval when you do

maintenance of other items.

*11. Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air

conditioner drive belt (if equipped). Inspect if necessary, correct or

replace.

1250$/0$,17(1$1&(6&+('8/(ǘ)253(752/',(6(/(1*,1(

8-12

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Kmsx1,000 1.51020304050607080

Months 2 1224364860728496

Years -1234567 8

ENGINE BAY

Engine oil & filter *1 *2 *3IRRRRRRRR

Drive belt - - - I ----I

Air Cleaner Filter C C R C R C R C R

Battery condition & specific gravity IIIIIIIII

Spark Plugs *10 Replace at every 160,000 kms

Valve clearance *4Inspect at every 90,000 kms or 108 months

Vaccum Hose - - - I - - I - I

Idler / damper pulley/Adj. Bolt Inspect when replacing the drive belt or timing belt/chain

Brake/Clutch fluid Inspect at every service; Replace at every 40,000 Km or 36 months

Engine Coolant (topup & specify gravity) *5Inspect at every service;

Replace first at 1,00,000 Km or 60 months; then at every 40,000 Km or 24 months

Manual transaxle fluid *6No check ; No Service Required

Dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped) No check ; No Service Required

Automatic /Intelligent Var. Transmission fluid

(if equipped) *6No check ; No Service Required

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - PETROL ENGINE

I : Inspect and if necessary adjust,top-up, clean or replace C : Clean and Replace if necessary R : Replace

8-13

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Kmsx1,000 1.51020304050607080

Months 2 1224364860728496

Years -1234567 8

VEHICLE ON FLOOR

Wiper (wiper blade , washer fluid) I I I IIIIII

Brake/Clutch (Pedal free play/Pipes/Hoses/

Connectors) IIIIIIIII

Fuel filler cap - I I IIIIII

Climate control air filter I C R CRCRCR

Check AC system (refrigerant/Compressor) I I I IIIIII

Cooling system (water pump,hoses) & leakage I I I IIIIII

VEHICLE ON LIFT

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I IIIIII

Exhaust system I I IIIIII

Fuel filter*8IIIIIIII

Fuel tank air filter (if equipped) Replace at every 60,000 Km or 48 months

Front & rear suspension (linkages & ball joints) ------I-I

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - PETROL ENGINE (CONT.)

I : Inspect and if necessary adjust,top-up, clean or replace C : Clean and Replace if necessary R : Replace

8-14

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - PETROL ENGINE (CONT.)

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Kmsx1,000 1.51020304050607080

Months 2 1224364860728496

Years -1234567 8

Tyre Pressure,condition & rotation - I,TR I,TR I,TR I,TR I,TR I,TR I,TR I,TR

Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I IIIIII

Driveshafts & boots I I I IIIIII

Fluid leakages I I I IIIIII

Front and rear wheel bearings & bushes Inspect and if necessary, adjust, clean or replace

Parking brake (disc/drum, pad/shoe & operation) - C C C CCCCC

Wheel Alignment & Balancing - Inspect and if necessary, adjust

FINAL CHECKS

Bolt and nuts on chasis and body I I I IIIIII

Lubricate locks & hinges I L L L LLLLL

Check all electrical systems (Drive belts ,alterna-

tor)*9IIIIIIIII

Warning lights operation & GDS system check I I I IIIIII

Ext & int. lights, horn & gauges IIIIIIIII

I : Inspect and if necessary adjust,top-up, clean or replace C : Clean and Replace if necessary R : Replace

TR : Tire Rotation; L : Lubricate

8-15

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Kmsx1,000 1.51020304050607080

Months 2 1224364860728496

Years -1234567 8

Power window I I IIIIIII

Sunroof operation (if equipped) I C C C CCCCC

All seat belt operation I I IIIIIII

Road test - - - I - - - - I

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - PETROL ENGINE (CONT.)

I : Inspect and if necessary adjust,top-up, clean or replace C : Clean and Replace if necessary R : Replace

8-16

Maintenance

Maintenance item Maintenance

operation Maintenance intervals Driving condition

Engine oil and engine oil filter R Every 5,000 km or 6 months A, B, C, D, E,

F, G, H, I, J, K, L

Air cleaner filter R Replace more frequently

depending on the condition C, E

Spark plugs R Replace more frequently

depending on the condition A, B, H, I, K

Manual transmission fluid R Every 1,20,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, F, G, H,

I, J

Dual clutch transmission fluid R Every 1,20,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, F, G, H,

I, J

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions- Petrol Engine

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.

Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace R : Replace or change

8-17

Maintenance item Maintenance

operation Maintenance intervals Driving condition

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition C, D, E, F, G

Front suspension ball joints I Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition C, D, E, F, G

Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition C, D, E, G, H

Drum brakes and linings (if equipped) I Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition C, D, E, G, H

Parking brake I Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition C, D, G, H

Driveshaft and boots I Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition C, D, E, F,

G, H, I, J

Cabin air filter R Replace more frequently

depending on the condition C, E, G

Severe driving conditions

A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in

normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing

temperature

B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-

spread roads

D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in

very cold weather

E : Driving in the heavy dust condition

F : Driving in heavy traffic area

G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly

H : Towing a trailer, or using a camper

I : Driving as patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing

J : Driving over 170km/h (106mile/h) or frequent rapid accelera-

tion/deceleration

K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions and under 15,000

km per year.

L : Engine oil usage which is not recommended (Mineral type,

Semi-synthetic, Lower grade spec, etc.)

8-18

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Kmsx1,000 1.51020304050607080

Months 2 1224364860728496

Years -1234567 8

ENGINE BAY

Engine oil & filter *1 *2 *3IRRRRRRRR

Drive belt - - - I - - - - I

Air cleaner filter - C R CRCRCR

Battery condition & specific gravity I I I IIIIII

Valve clearance*4Inspect at every 90,000 kms or 108 months

Hoses (Vaccum/ EGR / VGT) - I I I IIIII

Idler / damper pulley/Adj. Bolt Inspect when replacing the drive belt or timing belt/chain

Brake/Clutch fluid Inspect at every service; Replace at every 40,000 Km or 36 months

Engine Coolant (topup & specify gravity) *5Inspect at every service;

Replace first at 1,00,000 Km or 60 months; then at every 40,000 Km or 24 months

Manual transaxle fluid *6No Check ; No Service reqd.

Automatic Transmission fluid (if equipped) *6No Check ; No Service reqd.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE

I : Inspect and if necessary adjust,top-up, clean or replace C : Clean and Replace if necessary R : Replace

8-19

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Kmsx1,000 1.51020304050607080

Months 2 1224364860728496

Years -1234567 8

VEHICLE ON FLOOR

Wiper (wiper blade , washer fluid) IIIIIIIII

Brake/Clutch (Pedal free play/Pipes/Hoses/

Connectors) IIIIIIIII

Fuel filler cap - IIIIIIII

Climate control air filter I C R C R C R C R

Check AC system (refrigerant/Compressor) IIIIIIIII

Cooling system (water pump,hoses) & leakage IIIIIIIII

VEHICLE ON LIFT

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots IIIIIIIII

Exhaust system (leakages & damages) IIIIIIIII

Fuel filter*8IIRIRIRIR

Urea solution lines, hoses and connections IIIIIIIII

Urea solution tank cap IIIIIIIII

Front & rear suspension (linkages & ball joints) IIIIIIIII

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (CONT.)

I : Inspect and if necessary adjust,top-up, clean or replace C : Clean and Replace if necessary R : Replace

8-20

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (CONT.)

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Kmsx1,000 1.51020304050607080

Months 2 1224364860728496

Years -1234567 8

Tyre Pressure,condition & rotation - I,TR I,TR I,TR I,TR I,TR I,TR I,TR I,TR

Fuel lines, hoses and connections IIIIIIIII

Driveshafts & boots IIIIIIIII

Fluid leakages IIIIIIIII

Front and rear wheel bearings & bushes Inspect and if necessary, adjust, clean or replace

Parking brake (disc/drum ,pad/shoe & operation) - CCCCCCCC

Wheel Alignment & Balancing - Inspect and if necessary, adjust

FINAL CHECKS

Bolt and nuts on chasis and body IIIIIIIII

Lubricate locks & hinges I LLLLLLLL

Check all electrical systems (Drive belts ,alterna-

tor)*9IIIIIIIII

Warning lights operation & GDS system check IIIIIIIII

Ext & int. lights, horn & gauges IIIIIIIII

I : Inspect and if necessary adjust,top-up, clean or replace C : Clean and Replace if necessary R : Replace

TR : Tire Rotation; L : Lubricate

8-21

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Kmsx1,000 1.51020304050607080

Months 2 1224364860728496

Years -1234567 8

Power window IIIIIIIII

Sunroof operation (if equipped) I CCCCCCCC

All seat belt operation IIIIIIIII

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE

I : Inspect and if necessary adjust,top-up, clean or replace C : Clean and Replace if necessary R : Replace

8-22

Maintenance

Maintenance item Maintenance

operation Maintenance intervals Driving condition

Engine oil and engine oil filter R Every 5,000 km or 6 months A, B, C, D, E, F,

G, H, I, K, L

Air cleaner filter R Replace more frequently

depending on the condition C, E

Manual transmission fluid R Every 1,20,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, F, G, H,

I, J

Automatic transmission fluid R Every 1,00,000 km (62,500 miles) A, C, D, E, F, G,

H, I, J

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition C, D, E, F, G

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions - Diesel Engine

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.

Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace R : Replace or change

8-23

Maintenance item Maintenance

operation Maintenance intervals Driving condition

Front suspension ball joints I Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition C, D, E, F, G

Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition C, D, E, G, H

Parking brake I Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition C, D, G, H

Driveshaft and boots I Inspect more frequently

depending on the condition C, D, E, F,

G, H, I, K

Cabin air filter R Replace more frequently

depending on the condition C, E, G

Severe driving conditions

A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in

normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing

temperature

B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-

spread roads

D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in

very cold weather

E : Driving in the heavy dust condition

F : Driving in heavy traffic area

G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly

H : Towing a trailer, or using a camper

I : Driving as patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing

J : Driving over 170km/h (106mile/h) or frequent rapid accelera-

tion/deceleration

K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions and under 15,000

km per year.

L : Engine oil usage which is not recommended (Mineral type,

Semi-synthetic, Lower grade spec, etc.)

8-24

Maintenance

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be

changed at the intervals specified in

the maintenance schedule. If the car

is being driven in severe conditions,

more frequent oil and filter changes

are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of

cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil

saturation and replace if necessary.

Drive belts should be checked peri-

odically for proper tension and adjust-

ed as necessary.

NOTICE

When you are inspecting the belt,

place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF or ACC position.

Fuel filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at

which the vehicle may be driven,

damage the emission system and

cause multiple issues such as hard

starting. If an excessive amount of

foreign matter accumulates in the fuel

tank, the filter may require replace-

ment more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the en-

gine for several minutes, and check

for leaks at the connections.

We recommend that the fuel filter be

replaced by an authoized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and

connections for leakage and dam-

age. We recommend that the fuel

lines, fuel hoses and connections be

replaced by an authoized HYUNDAI

dealer.

WARNING

Diesel Engine

Never manipulate or modify the in-

jection system while running the

diesel engine or within 30 seconds

after turning OFF the diesel en-

gine. The high-pressure pump,

high-pressure pipes, rail, and in-

jectors are still subject to high

pressure immediately after stop-

ping the diesel engine.

When the fuel leakage vents out, it

may cause serious body injury.

Any people, who are implanted

with the artificial cardiac pacemak-

er, should remain away from the

ECU or the wiring harness by at

least 30 cm, while running the die-

sel engine. The high currents of

the electronic engine control sys-

tem produce a considerable

amount of magnetic fields.

(;3/$1$7,212)6&+('8/('0$,17(1$1&(,7(06

8-25

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap

should be inspected at those inter-

vals specified in the maintenance

schedule. Make sure that a new va-

por hose or fuel filler cap is correctly

replaced.

Vacuum crankcase ventilation

hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-

dence of heat and/or mechanical

damage. Hard and brittle rubber,

cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and

excessive swelling indicate deteriora-

tion. Particular attention should be

paid to examine those hose surfaces

nearest to high heat sources, such as

the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure

that the hoses do not come in contact

with any heat source, sharp edges or

moving component which might

cause heat damage or mechanical

wear. Inspect all hose connections,

such as clamps and couplings, to

make sure they are secure, and that

no leaks are present. Hoses should

be replaced immediately if there is

any evidence of deterioration or dam-

age.

Air cleaner filter

We recommend that the air cleaner

filter be replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs

of the correct heat range.

When assembling parts, be sure to

wipe out foreign substances inside

and outside of the boot bottom of the

ignition coil and the insulator of the

spark plug with a soft cloth to prevent

contamination of the spark plug insu-

lator.

WARNING

Do not disconnect and inspect

spark plugs when the engine is

hot. You may burn yourself.

Valve clearance (if equipped)

Inspect for excessive valve noise

and/or engine vibration and adjust if

necessary. We recommend that the

system be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Cooling system

Check cooling system components,

such as radiator, coolant reservoir,

hoses and connections for leakage

and damage. Replace any damaged

parts.

8-26

Maintenance

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at

the intervals specified in the mainte-

nance schedule.

Manual transmission fluid

(if equipped)

Inspect the manual transmission fluid

according to the maintenance sched-

ule.

Dual clutch transmission fluid

(if equipped)

Inspect the dual clutch transmission

fluid according to the maintenance

schedule.

Automatic transmission fluid

(if equipped)

Inspect the automatic transmission

fluid according to the maintenance

schedule.

NOTICE

The use of non-specified fluid

(even marked as compatible with

genuine) could result in shift qual-

ity deterioration and vibrations,

eventually, the transmission fail-

ure.

Use only specified automatic

transmission fluid. (Refer to “Rec-

ommended lubricants and capaci-

ties” in chapter 2.)

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation,

chafing, cracks, deterioration and any

leakage. Replace any deteriorated or

damaged parts immediately.

Brake/clutch fluid (if equipped)

Check brake/clutch fluid level in the

brake fluid reservoir. The level should

be between “MIN” (Minimum) and

“MAX” (Maximum) marks on the side

of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic

brake/clutch fluid conforming to DOT

4 specification.

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system in-

cluding the parking brake lever and

cables.

Rear brake drums and linings

(if equipped)

Check the rear brake drums and lin-

ings for scoring, burning, leaking flu-

id, broken parts, and excessive wear.

Brake pads, calipers and discs

Check the pads for excessive wear,

discs for run out and wear, and cali-

pers for fluid leakage.

8-27

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections

for looseness or damage. Retighten

to the specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine

off, check for excessive free-play in

the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or dam-

age. Check the dust boots and ball

joints for deterioration, cracks, or

damage. Replace any damaged

parts.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and

clamps for cracks, deterioration, or

damage. Replace any damaged parts

and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and

connections for leakage and dam-

age.

8-28

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level

(Petrol engine)

Engine oil is used for lubricating,

cooling, and operating various hy-

draulic components in the engine.

Engine oil consumption while driving

is normal, and it is necessary to check

and refill the engine oil regularly.

Also, check and refill the oil level

within the recommended mainte-

nance schedule to prevent deteriora-

tion of oil performance.

Check the engine oil following the be-

low procedure.

OSU2I092002



Smartstream G1.5 T-GDi

1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer’s

precautions.

2. Be sure the vehicle is on the level

ground in P (Park) with the parking

brake set. If possible, block the

wheels.

3. Turn the engine on and warm the

engine up until the coolant tem-

perature reaches a constant nor-

mal temperature.

4. Turn the engine off, remove the oil

filler cap and pull the dipstick out.

Wait for 15 minutes for the oil to re-

turn to the oil pan.

5. Wipe the dipstick clean and re-in-

sert it fully.

6. Pull the dipstick out again and

check the level.

OSU2I092003



Smartstream G1.5 T-GDi

7. If the oil level is below L, add

enough oil to bring the level to F.

Use only the specified engine oil.

(Refer to “Recommended lubricants

and capacities” in chapter 2.)

8-29

WARNING

Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the ra-

diator hose when checking or add-

ing the engine oil as it may be hot

enough to burn you.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your engine:

• Do not spill engine oil when add-

ing or changing engine oil. Wipe

off spilled oil immediately.

• The engine oil consumption may

increase while you break in a

new vehicle and it will be stabi-

lized after driving 6,000 km

(4,000 miles).

• The engine oil consumption can

be affected by driving habits, cli-

mate conditions, traffic condi-

tions, oil quality, etc. Therefore,

it is recommended that you in-

spect the engine oil level regu-

larly and refill it if necessary.

Checking the engine oil level

(Diesel engine)

OSU2I089009



1.5 VGT

Range Required action

ARecommend to contact an

authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er.

BDo not refill engine oil.

CYou may add engine oil as

long as the oil level does

not go above the C range.

DYou must add oil and make

sure that the oil level is in

the C Range.

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level

ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to

reach normal operating tempera-

ture.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a

few minutes (about 5 minutes) for

the oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Turn the engine off, remove the oil

filler cap and pull the dipstick out.

Wait for 15 minutes for the oil to re-

turn to the oil pan.

5. Wipe the dipstick clean and re-in-

sert it fully.

6. Pull the dipstick out again and

check the level. The level should

be in the C range.

8-30

Maintenance

WARNING

Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the ra-

diator hose when checking or add-

ing the engine oil as it may be hot

enough to burn you.

OSU2I089010



1.5 VGT

7. If the level is in the D range, add

enough engine oil to bring the level

up the range.

Use only the specified engine oil.

(Refer to “Recommended lubri-

cants and capacities” in chapter

2.)

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your engine:

• Do not spill engine oil when add-

ing or changing engine oil. Wipe

off spilled oil immediately.

• The engine oil consumption may

increase while you break in a

new vehicle and it will be stabi-

lized after driving 6,000 km

(4,000 miles).

• The engine oil consumption can

be affected by driving habits, cli-

mate conditions, traffic condi-

tions, oil quality, etc. Therefore,

it is recommended that you in-

spect the engine oil level regu-

larly and refill it if necessary.

8-31

Changing the engine oil and fil-

ter

• We recommend that the engine oil

and filter be replaced by an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the maintenance schedule to re-

place engine oil is exceeded, the

engine oil performance may deteri-

orate, and the engine condition

may be affected. Therefore, re-

place the engine oil according to

the maintenance schedule.

• To keep the engine in optimal con-

dition, use the recommended en-

gine oil and filter. If the recom-

mended engine oil and filter are

not used, replace it according to

the maintenance schedule under

severe usage conditions.

• The purpose of the maintenance

schedule for engine oil replace-

ment is to prevent oil deterioration

and it is irrelevant to oil consump-

tion. Check and refill engine oil

regularly.

i Information

When the oil pressure is low due to in-

sufficient engine oil, the Engine Oil

Pressure ( ) warning light will illu-

minate. In addition, the enhanced en-

gine protection system, which limits

the engine’s power is activated and the

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ( )

will illuminate when the vehicle is driv-

en in this state continuously. When oil

pressure is restored, the Engine Oil

Pressure warning light will turn off

and the engine power will no longer be

limited.

CAUTION

The engine oil is very hot immedi-

ately after the vehicle has been

driven and can cause burns during

replacement. Replace the engine

oil after the engine oil has cooled

down.

WARNING

Used engine oil may cause skin ir-

ritation or cancer if left in contact

with the skin for prolonged peri-

ods of time. Used engine oil con-

tains chemicals that have caused

cancer in laboratory animals. Al-

ways protect your skin by washing

your hands thoroughly with soap

and warm water as soon as possi-

ble after handling used oil.

8-32

Maintenance

The high-pressure cooling system

has a reservoir filled with year-round

antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is

filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level at least once a year, at

the beginning of the winter season,

and before traveling to a colder cli-

mate.

NOTICE

• Do not drive with no engine cool-

ant. It may cause water pump

failure and engine seizure, etc.

• When the engine overheats from

low engine coolant, suddenly

adding engine coolant may

cause cracks in the engine. To

prevent damage, add engine

coolant slowly in small quanti-

ties.

Checking the coolant level

OSU2I092004

Check the condition and connections

of all cooling system hoses and heat-

er hoses. Replace any swollen or de-

teriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled be-

tween F (Full) and L (Low) marked

on the side of the coolant reservoir

when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

distilled (deionized) water.

Bring the level to F (Full), but do not

overfill. If frequent additions are re-

quired, we recommend that the sys-

tem be inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

ENGINE COOLANT

8-33

OAI3089005

WARNING

Removing radiator cap

• Never attempt to remove the ra-

diator cap while the engine is

operating or hot. Doing so might

lead to cooling system and en-

gine damage and could result in

serious personal injury from es-

caping hot coolant or steam.

• Turn the engine off and wait un-

til it cools down. Use extreme

care when removing the radiator

cap. Wrap a thick towel around

it, and turn it counterclockwise

slowly to the first stop. Step

back while the pressure is re-

leased from the cooling system.

When you are sure all the pres-

sure has been released, press

down on the cap, using a thick

towel, and continue turning

counterclockwise to remove it.

• Even if the engine is not operat-

ing, do not remove the radiator

cap or the drain plug while the

engine and radiator are hot. Hot

coolant and steam may still blow

out under pressure, causing se-

rious injury.

WARNING

The electric motor (cool-

ing fan) is controlled by

engine coolant tempera-

ture, refrigerant pres-

sure and vehicle speed.

It may sometimes operate even

when the engine is not running.

Use extreme caution when work-

ing near the blades of the cooling

fan so that you are not injured by a

rotating fan blades. As the engine

coolant temperature decreases,

the electric motor will automatical-

ly shut off. This is a normal condi-

tion.

The electric motor (cooling fan)

may operate until you disconnect

the negative battery cable.

8-34

Maintenance

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only de-

ionized water or soft water for your

vehicle and never mix hard water

in the coolant filled at the factory.

An improper coolant mixture can

result in serious malfunction or en-

gine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must be

protected by an phosphate based

ethylene-glycol coolant to prevent

corrosion and freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol

coolant or mix them with the speci-

fied coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less

than 35% antifreeze, which would

reduce the effectiveness of the

solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the

following table.

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze Water

-15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

i Information

If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50%

water and 50% antifreeze mix is the

easiest to mix together as it will be the

same quantity of each. It is suitable to

use for most temperature ranges of

-35°C (-31°F) and higher.

WARNING

Radiator cap

Do not remove the radia-

tor cap when the engine

and radiator are hot.

Scalding hot coolant and steam

may blow out under pressure

causing serious injury.

Changing the coolant

We recommend that the coolant be

replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

NOTICE

Put a thick cloth or fabric around

the radiator cap before refilling the

coolant in order to prevent the

coolant from overflowing into en-

gine parts such as the alternator.

WARNING

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Engine coolant can severely ob-

scure visibility when sprayed on

the windshield and may cause

loss of vehicle control or dam-

age to paint and body trim.

8-35

Checking the brake/clutch fluid

level

OSU2I092005

Check the fluid level in the reservoir

periodically. The fluid level should be

between MAX (Maximum) and MIN

(Minimum) marks on the side of the

reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap

and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean

the area around the reservoir cap

thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch

fluid contamination. If the level is low,

add fluid to the MAX (Maximum) lev-

el. The level will fall with accumulated

mileage. This is a normal condition

associated with the wear of the brake

linings and/or clutch disc (if equipped).

If the fluid level is excessively low, we

recommend that the system be

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch

fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubri-

cants or capacities” in chapter 2.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING

Loss of brake fluid

In the event the brake system re-

quires frequent additions of fluid,

we recommend that the system be

inspected by an authorized HYUN-

DAI dealer.

i Information

Before removing the brake/clutch fil-

ter cap, read the warning on the cap.

WARNING

Clean filler cap before removing.

Use only DOT 4 brake/clutch fluid

from a sealed container.

%5$.(&/87&+)/8,'ǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

8-36

Maintenance

WARNING

Brake/clutch fluid

When changing and adding brake/

clutch fluid, handle it carefully. Do

not let it come in contact with your

eyes. If brake/clutch fluid come in

contact with your eyes, immediate-

ly flush them with a large quantity

of fresh tap water. Have your eyes

examined by a doctor as soon as

possible.

NOTICE

• Do not allow brake/clutch fluid

to contact the vehicle’s body

paint, as it will result in paint

damage.

• NEVER use brake/clutch fluid

which has been exposed to

open air for an extended time, as

its quality cannot be guaran-

teed. It should be properly dis-

posed.

• Don’t put in the wrong type of

fluid. A few drops of miner-

al-based oil such as engine oil in

your brake/clutch system can

damage brake/clutch system

parts.

8-37

i Information

A new automatic transmission fluid

should be red. The red dye is added so

the assembly plant can identify it as

automatic transmission fluid and dis-

tinguish it from engine oil or anti-

freeze. The red dye, which is not an

indicator of fluid quality, is not perma-

nent. As the vehicle is driven, the auto-

matic transmission fluid will begin to

look darker. The color may eventually

appear light brown. Therefore, we rec-

ommend that the system be replaced

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

according to the Scheduled Mainte-

nance at the beginning of this chapter.

Use only the specified automatic

transmission fluid.

(Refer to “Recommended lubricants

and capacities” in chapter 2.)

Changing the automatic trans-

mission fluid

We recommend that the system be

replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

$8720$7,&75$160,66,21)/8,'ǣ,)(48,33('Ǥ

8-38

Maintenance

Checking the washer fluid level

OSU2I092006

Check the fluid level in the washer

fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-

sary. Plain water may be used if

washer fluid is not available.

However, use washer solvent with

antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-

mates to prevent freezing.

WARNING

Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windshield and may

cause loss of vehicle control or

damage to the paint and body

trim.

• Windshield washer fluid agents

contain some amounts of alco-

hol and can be flammable under

certain circumstances. Do not

allow sparks or flame come in

contact with the washer fluid or

the washer fluid reservoir. Dam-

age to the vehicle or occupants

could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poi-

sonous to humans and animals.

Do not drink and avoid coming

in contact with the windshield

washer fluid. Serious injury or

death could occur.

:$6+(5)/8,'

8-39

Checking the parking brake

OSU2I089012

Check the stroke of the parking brake

by counting the number of “clicks’’

heard while fully applying it from the

released position.

Also, the parking brake alone should

securely hold the vehicle on a fairly

steep grade. If the stroke is more or

less than specified, we recommend

that the system be inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 5~7 “clicks’’ at a force of

20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).

PARKING BRAKE

8-40

Maintenance

Draining water from fuel filter

The fuel filter for diesel engine plays

an important role of separating water

from fuel and accumulating the water

in its bottom.

If water accumulates in the fuel filter,

the warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

If this warning light turned

on, we recommend that

the system be serviced by

an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

NOTICE

If the water accumulated in the fuel

filter is not drained at proper times,

damages to the major parts such

as the fuel system can be caused

by water permeation in the fuel fil-

ter.

Fuel filter cartridge replace-

ment

OAI3089072

i Information

When replacing the fuel filter car-

tridge, we recommend that you use

parts for replacement from an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer.

)8(/),/7(5ǣ)25',(6(/Ǥ

8-41

Filter replacement

OSU2I092007

The air cleaner filter can be cleaned

for inspection using compressed air.

Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,

as water will damage the filter. If

soiled, the air cleaner filter must be

replaced.

OSU2I092013

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover at-

taching clips and open the cover.

OSU2I092012

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

3. Replace the air cleaner filter.

4. Lock the cover with the cover at-

taching clips.

5. Check that the cover is firmly in-

stalled.

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely

dusty or sandy areas, replace the el-

ement more often than the usual rec-

ommended intervals. (Refer to “Main-

tenance under severe usage

conditions” in this chapter.)

AIR CLEANER

8-42

Maintenance

NOTICE

• Do not drive with the filter re-

moved; this will result in exces-

sive engine wear.

• Clean the filter carefully. Do not

wash or beat too strongly. Be

careful for dust and other con-

taminations to come over upper

side.

• Keep the new filter clean of any

contamination while replacing.

• We recommend that you use

parts for replacement from an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Don’t clean the used filter. It can

cause contaminations on the clean

side of filter to result in engine

wear or sensors’ failure.

8-43

Filter inspection

If the vehicle is operated in the se-

verely air-polluted cities or on dusty

rough roads for a long period, it

should be inspected more frequently

and replaced earlier. When you, the

owner, replace the climate control air

filter, replace it performing the follow-

ing procedure, and be careful to avoid

damaging other components.

Replace the filter according to the

maintenance Schedule.

Filter replacement

OSU2I059044

1. Open the glove box.

OSU2I089023

2. Push in both sides of the glove box

as shown. This will ensure that the

glove box stopper pins will get re-

leased from its holding location al-

lowing the glove box to hang.

OSU2089012

3. Remove the climate control air fil-

ter cover.

&/,0$7(&21752/$,5),/7(5

8-44

Maintenance

ODH073012

4. Clean the climate control air filter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse order of

disassembly.

NOTICE

Install a new climate control air fil-

ter in the correct direction with the

arrow symbol() facing down-

wards.

Otherwise, the climate control ef-

fects may decrease, possibly with

a noise.

8-45

Blade inspection

1JBA5122

i Information

Commercial hot waxes applied by au-

tomatic car washes have been known

to make the windshield difficult to

clean.

Contamination of either the wind-

shield or the wiper blades with foreign

matter can reduce the effectiveness

of the windshield wipers. Common

sources of contamination are insects,

tree sap, and hot wax treatments

used by some commercial car wash-

es. If the blades are not wiping prop-

erly, clean both the window and the

blades with a good cleaner or mild

detergent, and rinse thoroughly with

clean water.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use petrol, kero-

sene, paint thinner, or other sol-

vents on or near them.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean ad-

equately, the blades may be worn or

cracked, and require replacement.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper

arms or other components, do not

attempt to move the wipers manu-

ally.

NOTICE

The use of a non-specified wiper

blade could result in wiper mal-

function and failure.

Front windshield wiper blade

OLMB073020

Type A

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the

wiper blade assembly to expose

the plastic locking clip.

NOTICE

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall

against the windshield, since it

may chip or crack the windshield.

WIPER BLADES

8-46

Maintenance

OLMB073021

OLMB073022

2. Compress the clip and slide the

blade assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

Rear window wiper blade

(if equipped)

OLMB073023

1. Raise the wiper arm and rotate the

wiper blade assembly (1).

2. Pull out the wiper blade assembly.

OLMB073024

3. Install the new blade assembly by

inserting the center part into the

slot in the wiper arm until it clicks

into place.

4. Make sure the blade assembly is

installed firmly by trying to pull it

slightly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms

or other components, we recommend

that the wiper blade be replaced by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

8-47

For best battery service

OSU2I092008

• Keep the battery securely mount-

ed.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated with

gasolineeum jelly or terminal

grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from

the battery immediately with a

solution of water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be

used for an extended time, discon-

nect the negative terminal cable of

the battery to prevent discharge.

Information - For batteries

marked with UPPER and

LOWER

OHYK077011

If your vehicle is equipped with a bat-

tery marked with LOWER (MIN) and

UPPER (MAX) on the side, you should

check the electrolyte level.

The electrolyte level should be between

LOWER (MIN) and UPPER (MAX).

Be careful not to spill distilled (or

de-mineralized) water over the battery

surface or other adjacent components.

Also, do not overfill the battery cells.

If not, it may corrode the battery or

other components. Finally, securely

close the cell cap. However, we recom-

mend you to contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for better battery

service.

NOTICE

If the Electrolyte level is Low, add

distilled (or demineralized) water.

Never add sulfuric acid or other

electrolyte.

BATTERY

8-48

Maintenance

WARNING

Battery dangers

Always read the follow-

ing instructions careful-

ly when handling a bat-

tery.

Keep lighted cigarettes

and all other flames or

sparks away from the

battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-

bustible gas, is always

present in battery cells

and may explode if ignit-

ed.

Keep batteries out of the

reach of children be-

cause batteries contain

highly corrosive SULFU-

RIC ACID. Do not allow

battery acid to contact

your skin, eyes, clothing

or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets

into your eyes, flush

your eyes with clean wa-

ter for at least 15 min-

utes and get immediate

medical attention. If

electrolyte gets on your

skin, thoroughly wash

the contacted area. If

you feel a pain or a burn-

ing sensation, get medi-

cal attention immediate-

ly.

Wear eye protection

when charging or work-

ing near a battery. Al-

ways provide ventilation

when working in an en-

closed space.

An inappropriately dis-

posed battery can be

harmful to the environ-

ment and human health.

Dispose the battery ac-

cording to your local

law(s) or regulation.

The battery contains

lead. Do not dispose of it

after use. Please return

the battery to an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer to

be recycled.

8-49

• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on the

case may cause battery acid to

leak, resulting in personal inju-

ry. Lift with a battery carrier or

with your hands on opposite

corners.

• Never attempt to recharge the

battery when the battery cables

are connected.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage. Never

touch these components with

the engine running or the igni-

tion switched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-

ings can result in serious bodily

injury or death.

NOTICE

If you connect unauthorized elec-

tronic devices to the battery, the

battery may be discharged. Never

use unauthorized devices.

Battery capacity label

OQXI079062



Example

※ The actual battery label in the vehi-

cle may differ from the illustration.

1. CMF45L-DIN : The HYUNDAI

model name of battery

2. 12V : The nominal voltage

3. 45Ah(20HR) : The nominal capaci-

ty (in Ampere hours)

4. RC 80min : The nominal reserve

capacity (in min.)

5. CCA410 : The cold-test current in

amperes by SAE

6. 410A : The cold-test current in am-

peres by EN

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,

calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged

in a short time (because, for exam-

ple, the headlights or interior lights

were left on while the vehicle was

not in use), recharge it by slow

charging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges

because of high electric load while

the vehicle is being used, recharge

it at 20-30A for two hours.

8-50

Maintenance

WARNING

Recharging battery

When recharging the battery, ob-

serve the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in

an area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,

or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during

charging, and stop or reduce the

charging rate if the battery cells

begin gassing (boiling) violently

or if the temperature of the elec-

trolyte of any cell exceeds 49°C

(120°F).

• Wear eye protection when

checking the battery during

charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger

in the following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger

main switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from

the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from

the positive battery terminal.

WARNING

• Before performing maintenance

or recharging the battery, turn

off all accessories and stop the

engine.

• The negative battery cable must

be removed first and installed

last when the battery is discon-

nected.

Reset items

Items should be reset after the bat-

tery has been discharged or the

battery has been disconnected.

• Auto up/down window

(See chapter 5)

• Climate control system

(See chapter 5)

• Audio (See chapter 5)

Battery replacement

Replacing a Battery required precau-

tionary measures.

We recommend that you consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

8-51

Tire care

For proper maintenance, safety, and

maximum fuel economy, you must al-

ways maintain recommended tire in-

flation pressures and stay within the

load limits and weight distribution rec-

ommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire infla-

tion pressures

All tire pressures (including the spare)

should be checked when the tires are

cold. “Cold Tires” means the vehicle

has not been driven for at least three

hours or driven less than 1.6 km (one

mile).

Recommended pressures must be

maintained for the best ride, top vehi-

cle handling, and minimum tire wear.

For recommended inflation pressure,

refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter

OSU2I019021

All specifications (sizes and pres-

sures) can be found on a label at-

tached to the vehicle.

WARNING

Tire underinflation

Severe underinflation (70 kPa (10

psi) or more) can lead to severe

heat build-up, causing blowouts,

tread separation and other tire fail-

ures that can result in the loss of

vehicle control leading to severe

injury or death. This risk is much

higher on hot days and when driv-

ing for long periods at high speeds.

TIRES AND WHEELS

8-52

Maintenance

NOTICE

• Underinflation also results in ex-

cessive wear, poor handling and

reduced fuel economy. Wheel

deformation also is possible.

Keep your tire pressures at the

proper levels. If a tire frequently

needs refilling, we recommend

that the system be checked by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Overinflation produces a harsh

ride, excessive wear at the cen-

ter of the tire tread, and a greater

possibility of damage from road

hazards.

NOTICE

• Warm tires normally exceed rec-

ommended cold tire pressures

by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do

not release air from warm tires

to adjust the pressure or the

tires will be underinflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire infla-

tion valve caps. Without the

valve cap, dirt or moisture could

get into the valve core and cause

air leakage. If a valve cap is

missing, install a new one as

soon as possible.

WARNING

Tire Inflation

Overinflation or underinflation can

reduce tire life, adversely affect ve-

hicle handling, and lead to sudden

tire failure. This could result in

loss of vehicle control and poten-

tial injury.

NOTICE

Tire pressure

Always observe the following:

• Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehicle has

been parked for at least three

hours or hasn’t been driven

more than 1.6 km (one mile)

since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your

spare tire each time you check

the pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle. Be

careful not to overload a vehicle

luggage rack if your vehicle is

equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause acci-

dents. If your tread is badly

worn, or if your tires have been

damaged, replace them.

8-53

Checking tire inflation pres-

sure

Check your tires once a month or

more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the

spare tire.

How to check

Use a good quality gage to check tire

pressure. You can not tell if your tires

are properly inflated simply by look-

ing at them. Radial tires may look

properly inflated even when they’re

underinflated.

Check the tire’s inflation pressure

when the tires are cold. - “Cold”

means your vehicle has been sitting

for at least three hours or driven no

more than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly

onto the valve to get a pressure mea-

surement. If the cold tire inflation

pressure matches the recommended

pressure on the tire and loading infor-

mation label, no further adjustment is

necessary. If the pressure is low, add

air until you reach the recommended

amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the cen-

ter of the tire valve. Recheck the tire

pressure with the tire gage. Be sure

to put the valve caps back on the

valve stems. They help prevent leaks

by keeping out dirt and moisture.

WARNING

• Inspect your tires frequently for

proper inflation as well as wear

and damage. Always use a tire

pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too little

pressure wear unevenly causing

poor handling, loss of vehicle

control, and sudden tire failure

leading to accidents, injuries,

and even death. The recom-

mended cold tire pressure for

your vehicle can be found in this

manual and on the tire label lo-

cated on the driver’s side center

pillar.

• Worn tires can cause accidents.

Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are dam-

aged.

• Remember to check the pres-

sure of your spare tire. HYUND-

AI recommends that you check

the spare every time you check

the pressure of the other tires

on your vehicle.

8-54

Maintenance

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI

recommends that the tires be rotated

according to the maintenance sched-

ule or sooner if irregular wear devel-

ops.

During rotation, check the tires for

correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage. Abnormal wear is

usually caused by incorrect tire pres-

sure, improper wheel alignment, out-

of-balance wheels, severe braking or

severe cornering. Look for bumps or

bulges in the tread or side of tire. Re-

place the tire if you find either of these

conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or

cord is visible. After rotation, be sure

to bring the front and rear tire pres-

sures to specification and check lug

nut tightness.

Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter

CBGQ0706



With a full-size spare tire (if equipped)



Without a spare tire

CBGQ0707



Directional tires (if equipped)

CBGQ0707A

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tires are rotated.

i Information

Rotate radial tires that have an asym-

metric tread pattern only from front to

rear and not from right to left.

8-55

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare

tire for tire rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circumstanc-

es. This may cause unusual

handling characteristics that

could result in death, severe in-

jury, or property damage.

Wheel alignment and tire bal-

ance

The wheels on your vehicle were

aligned and balanced carefully at the

factory to give you the longest tire life

and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to

have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire

wear or your vehicle pulling one way

or the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating

when driving on a smooth road, your

wheels may need to be rebalanced.

NOTICE

Improper wheel weights can dam-

age your vehicle’s aluminum

wheels. Use only approved wheel

weights.

Tire replacement

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear

indicator will appear as a solid band

across the tread. This shows there is

less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread

left on the tire. Replace the tire when

this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear

across the entire tread before replac-

ing the tire.

NOTICE

When replacing the tires, recheck

and tighten the wheel nuts after

driving about 1,000 km (620 miles).

If the steering wheel shakes or the

vehicle vibrates while driving, the

tire is out of balance. Align the tire

balance. If the problem is not

solved, we recommend that you

contact an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

8-56

Maintenance

WARNING

Replacing tires

To reduce the chance or serious or

fatal injuries from an accident

caused by tire failure or loss of ve-

hicle control:

• Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are dam-

aged. Worn tires can cause loss

of braking effectiveness, steer-

ing control, and traction.

• Do not drive your vehicle with

too little or too much pressure in

your tires. This can lead to un-

even wear and tire failure.

• When replacing tires, never mix

radial and bias-ply tires on the

same car. You must replace all

tires (including the spare) if

moving from radial to bias-ply

tires.

• It is best to replace all four tires

at the same time. If that is not

possible, or necessary, then re-

place the two front or two rear

tires as a pair. Replacing just

one tire can seriously affect

your vehicle’s handling.

• Using tires and wheel other than

the recommended sizes could

cause unusual handling charac-

teristics and poor vehicle con-

trol, resulting in a serious acci-

dent.

• Wheels that do not meet HYUN-

DAI’s specifications may fit

poorly and result in damage to

the vehicle or unusual handling

and poor vehicle control.

• The ABS works by comparing

the speed of the wheels. Tire

size can affect wheel speed.

When replacing tires, all 4 tires

must use the same size original-

ly supplied with the vehicle. Us-

ing tires of a different size can

cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System) and ESC (Electronic

Stability Control) to work irregu-

larly. (if equipped)

Compact spare tire replacement

(if equipped)

A compact spare tire has a shorter

tread life than a regular size tire. Re-

place it when you can see the tread

wear indicator bars on the tire. The

replaced compact spare tire should

be the same size and design tire as

the one provided with your new vehi-

cle and should be mounted on the

same compact spare tire wheel. The

compact spare tire is not designed to

be mounted on a regular size wheel,

and the compact spare tire wheel is

not designed to mount a regular size

tire.

8-57

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for

any reason, make sure the new

wheels are equivalent to the original

factory units in diameter, rim width

and offset.

WARNING

A wheel that is not the correct size

may adversely affect wheel and

bearing life, braking and stopping

abilities, handling characteristics,

ground clearance, body-to-tire

clearance, snow chain clearance,

speedometer and odometer cali-

bration, headlight aim and bumper

height.

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you

drive on worn tires, tires that are im-

properly inflated or on slippery road

surfaces. Tires should be replaced

when tread wear indicators appear.

Slow down whenever there is rain,

snow or ice on the road, to reduce the

possibility of losing control of the ve-

hicle.

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct

wheel alignment helps decrease tire

wear. If you find a tire worn unevenly,

have your dealer check the wheel

alignment.

When you have new tires installed,

make sure they are balanced. This

will increase vehicle ride comfort and

tire life. Additionally, a tire should al-

ways be rebalanced if it is removed

from the wheel.

Tire sidewall labeling

B0464EU01

This information identifies and de-

scribes the fundamental characteris-

tics of the tire and also provides the

tire identification number (TIN) for

safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in case

of a recall.

8-58

Maintenance

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.

2. Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire

size designation. You will need this

information when selecting replace-

ment tires for your car. The following

explains what the letters and num-

bers in the tire size designation mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tire size designa-

tor could vary depending on your ve-

hicle.)

215/60R17 96H

215 - Tire width in millimeters.

60 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of its

width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

96 - Load Index, a numerical code as-

sociated with the maximum load

the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the

speed rating chart in this chapter

for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with import-

ant information that you need if you

ever have to replace one. The follow-

ing explains what the letters and

numbers in the wheel size designa-

tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.5J X 17

6.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

17 - Rim diameter in inches

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-

ferent speed ratings currently being

used for passenger car tires. The

speed rating is part of the tire size

designation on the sidewall of the tire.

This symbol corresponds to that tire’s

designed maximum safe operating

speed.

Speed Rating

Symbol Maximum Speed

S180 km/h (112 mph)

T190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph)

W 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y 300 km/h (186 mph)

8-59

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire

Identification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old,

based on the manufacturing date, (in-

cluding the spare tire) should be re-

placed by new ones. You can find the

manufacturing date on the tire side-

wall (possibly on the inside of the

wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of num-

bers on a tire consisting of numbers

and English letters. The manufactur-

ing date is designated by the last four

digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a

plant code number, tire size and tread

pattern and the last four numbers in-

dicate week and year manufactured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 2223 represents

that the tire was produced in the 22th

week of 2023.

WARNING

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even

when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining tread,

it is recommended that tires gener-

ally be replaced after six (6) years

of normal service. Heat caused by

hot climates or frequent high load-

ing conditions can accelerate the

aging process. Failure to follow

this warning could cause sudden

tire failure, which could lead to a

loss of control and an accident in-

volving serious injury or death.

4. Tire ply composition and ma-

terial

The number of layers or plies of rub-

ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire man-

ufacturers also must indicate the ma-

terials in the tire, which include steel,

nylon, polyester, and others. The

letter “R” means radial ply construc-

tion; the letter “D” means diagonal or

bias ply construction; and the letter

“B” means belted-bias ply construc-

tion.

5. Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tire and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation pres-

sure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When re-

placing the tires on the vehicle, al-

ways use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

8-60

Maintenance

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maximum

chapter width.

For example:

TREAD wear 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government

test course. For example, a tire grad-

ed 150 would wear one-and-a-half

times (1½) as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires de-

pends upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and may depart

significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service

practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the

side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or op-

tional equipment on your vehicle may

vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement measured un-

der controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt

and concrete. A tire marked C may

have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this

tire is based on straight-ahead

braking traction tests, and does

not include acceleration, corner-

ing, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to de-

generate and reduce tire life, and ex-

cessive temperature can lead to sud-

den tire failure. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

8-61

WARNING

Tire temperature

The temperature grade for this tire

is established for a tire that is

properly inflated and not overload-

ed. Excessive speed, underinfla-

tion, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can

cause heat build-up and sudden

tire failure. This can cause loss of

vehicle control and serious injury

or death.

Low aspect ratio tire

(if equipped)

Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect

ratio is lower than 50, are provided for

sporty looks.

Because the low aspect ratio tires are

optimized for handling and braking, it

may be more uncomfortable to ride in

and there is more noise compare with

normal tires.

NOTICE

Because the sidewall of the low as-

pect ratio tire is shorter than the

normal, the wheel and tire of the

low aspect ratio tire is easier to be

damaged. So, follow the instruc-

tions below.

- When driving on a rough road or

off road, drive cautiously be-

cause tires and wheels may be

damaged. And after driving, in-

spect tires and wheels.

- When passing over a pothole,

speed bump, manhole, or curb

stone, drive slowly so that the

tires and wheels are not dam-

aged.

- If the tire is impacted, we recom-

mend that you inspect the tire

condition or contact an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer.

- To prevent damage to the tire,

inspect the tire condition and

pressure every 3,000km.

NOTICE

• It is not easy to recognize the

tire damage with your own eyes.

But if there is the slightest hint

of tire damage, even though you

cannot see the tire damage with

your own eyes, have the tire

checked or replaced because

the tire damage may cause air

leakage from the tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driving

on a rough road, off road, pot-

hole, manhole, or curb stone, it

will not be covered by the war-

ranty.

• You can find out the tire infor-

mation on the tire sidewall.

8-62

Maintenance

OTA070039



Blade type

Normal

Blown



Slow Blow type



Multi fuse

Normal

Blown

Normal

Blown

A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-

tected from electrical overload dam-

age by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one

located in the driver’s side panel bol-

ster, the other in the engine compart-

ment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-

sories, or controls do not work, check

the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse

has blown, the element inside the

fuse will be melted.

If the electrical system does not work,

first check the driver’s side fuse pan-

el.

Before replacing a blown fuse, dis-

connect the negative battery cable.

Always replace a blown fuse with one

of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this in-

dicates an electrical problem. Avoid

using the system involved and imme-

diately consult an authorized HYUN-

DAI dealer.

i Information

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade

type for lower amperage rating, car-

tridge type and multi fuse for higher

amperage ratings.

WARNING

Never replace a fuse with anything

but another fuse of the same rat-

ing.

• A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly a

fire.

• Never install a wire or aluminum

foil instead of the proper fuse -

even as a temporary repair. It

may cause extensive wiring

damage and a possible fire.

NOTICE

Do not use a screwdriver or any

other metal object to remove fuses

because it may cause a short cir-

cuit and damage the system.

i Information

The actual fuse/relay panel label may

differ from equipped items.

)86(6

8-63

NOTICE

• When replacing a blown fuse or

relay with a new one, make sure

the new fuse or relay fits tightly

into the clips. The incomplete

fastening fuse or relay may

cause the vehicle wiring and

electric systems damage and a

possible fire.

• Do not remove fuses, relays and

terminals fastened with bolts or

nuts. The fuses, relays and ter-

minals may be fastened incom-

pletely, and it may cause a pos-

sible fire. If fuses, relays and

terminals fastened with bolts or

nuts are blown, consult an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not input any other objects

except fuses or relays into fuse/

relay terminals such as a driver

or wiring. It may cause contact

failure and system malfunction.

• Check the blown fuse with

checking the fuse information

on the fuse box cover.

• Replace the blown fuse on the

safe place after turning off the

ignition switch and all electric

switches and disconnecting the

negative battery cable.

Instrument panel fuse replace-

ment

OSU2I089025

1. Turn the ignition switch and all oth-

er switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

8-64

Maintenance

OSU2I092009

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight

out. Use the removal tool provided

in the engine compartment fuse

panel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it

if it is blown.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rat-

ing, and make sure it fits tightly in

the clips.

If it fits loosely, we recommend that

you consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse

of the same rating from a circuit you

may not need for operating the vehi-

cle, such as the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the electrical components do not

work and the fuses are OK, check the

fuse panel in the engine compart-

ment. If a fuse is blown, it must be

replaced.

Engine compartment panel

fuse replacement

OSU2I092010

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Turn all other switches off.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tap and pulling up.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it

if it is blown. To remove or insert

the fuse, use the removal tool in

the engine compartment fuse pan-

el.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rat-

ing, and make sure it fits tightly in

the clips. If it fits loosely, we rec-

ommend that you consult an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

8-65

NOTICE

After checking the fuse panel in

the engine compartment, securely

install the fuse panel cover. If not,

electrical failures may occur from

water leaking in.

Main fuse (Multi fuse)

OSU2I092011

If the main fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

2. Remove the nuts shown in the

illustration above.

3. Replace the fuse with a new one of

the same rating.

4. Reinstall in the reverse order of re-

moval.

CAUTION

If the main fuse is not assembled

properly, it may cause fire.

If the main fuse is blown, we rec-

ommend that you consult an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

8-66

Maintenance

Fuse/relay panel description

Inner fuse panel

OSU2I089026

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you

can find the fuse/relay label describing

fuse/relay name and capacity

OSU2I089020

i Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your ve-

hicle. It is accurate at the time of print-

ing. When you inspect the fuse panel in

your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel la-

bel.

8-67

Inner fuse panel

Type Fuse Name Symbol Fuse

rating Circuit Protected

LP MINI

FUSE

S/VENT FRT 10A VENTILATION SEAT

T/GATE 10A TAILGATE ACTUATOR

DOOR LOCK 20A DOOR ACTUATOR

A/BAG IND 7.5A CLUSTER

A/BAG 15A ACU

P/OUTLET 2 20A POWER OUTLET

MODULE 6 7.5A IBU

SAFETY P/

WINDOW LH 25A SAFETY ECU

SAFETY P/

WINDOW RH 25A SAFETY ECU

MODULE 1 7.5A O/S MIRR SW

A/C 2 10A MTC, FATC, ECU

MODULE 4 MODULE

47.5A CONSOLE SWITCH, ESC SWITCH

MODULE 3 7.5A STOP SWITCH, ATM LEVER

USB

CHARGE 10A REAR USB CHARGER

RR WIPER 10A REAR WIPER MOTOR

8-68

Maintenance

Type Fuse Name Symbol Fuse

rating Circuit Protected

LP MINI

FUSE

P/WINDOW

RH 25A POWER WINDOW MOTOR

AMP AMP 25A EXT. AMP

WIPER FRT

110A FRONT WIPER MOTOR

IBU 1 15A “IBU

(INTEGRATED BODY CONTROL UNIT)”

MULTIMEDIA 15A AUDIO

ABS 10A “ABS

(ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM)”

CLUSTER 7.5A CLUSTER

MODULE 2 MODULE

210A O/S MIRR SW, AMP, IBU,AUDIO

A/C 1 7.5A MTC,FATC

SUNROOF 20A SUNROOF MOTOR

P/WINDOW

LH 25A POWER WINDOW MOTOR

P/SEAT(DRV) DRV 20A DRIVE POWER SEAT

START 7.5A INHIBITOR SWITCH,

IGNITION LOCK SWITCH

MODULE 5 10A FATC,C/PAD SWITCH,AUDIO,

CONSOLE SWITCH

MDPS 7.5A MDPS

Inner fuse panel

8-69

Type Fuse Name Symbol Fuse

rating Circuit Protected

LP MINI

FUSE

P/OUTLET 1 20A POWER OUTLET

MODULE 7 7.5A IONIZER, SEAT ECU

WASHER 15A MULTI FUNCTION SWITCH

HEATED 10A "RR HEATED MIRROR, ECU"

BRAKE

SWITCH 10A STOP SWITCH

MEMORY 2 10A CLUSTER, FATC, MTC

IG 1 IG1 25A ECU,PCU,SENSOR

IBU 2 IBU 7.5A “IBU

(INTEGRATED BODY CONTROL UNIT)”

WIPER FRT

225A FRONT WIPER MOTOR

Inner fuse panel

8-70

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

OSU2I092010

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,

you can find the fuse/relay label de-

scribing fuse/relay name and capaci-

ty.

OSU2I081024L

i Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your ve-

hicle. It is accurate at the time of print-

ing. When you inspect the fuse panel in

your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel la-

bel.

8-71

Consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer to replace most vehicle light

bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle

light bulbs because other parts of the

vehicle must be removed before you

can get to the bulb. This is especially

true for removing the headlight as-

sembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlight as-

sembly can result in damage to the

vehicle.

i Information

The headlight and tail light lenses

could appear frosty if the vehicle is

washed after driving or the vehicle is

driven at night in wet weather. This

condition is caused by temperature dif-

ference between the lamp inside and

outside and, it does not indicate a

problem with your vehicle. When

moisture condenses in the lamp, it will

be removed after driving with the

headlight on. The removable level may

differ depending on lamp size, lamp

position and environmental condition.

However, if moisture is not removed,

we recommend that your vehicle is in-

spected by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

WARNING

Prior to replacing a light, depress

the foot brake, move the shift lever

into the P (Park, for Dual Clutch

Transmission/Automatic Trans-

mission vehicle) or neutral (for

manual transmission vehicle), ap-

ply the parking brake, place the ig-

nition switch in the LOCK/OFF po-

sition, and take the key with you

when leaving the vehicle to avoid

sudden movement of the vehicle

and to prevent possible electric

shock.

Be aware the bulbs may be hot and

may burn your fingers.

NOTICE

Be sure to replace the burned-out

bulb with one of the same wattage

rating. Otherwise, it may cause

damage to the fuse or electric wir-

ing system.

NOTICE

To prevent damage, do not clean

the headlight lens with chemical

solvents or strong detergents.

LIGHT BULBS

8-72

Maintenance

i Information

• A normally functioning lamp may

flicker momentarily to stabilize the

vehicle’s electrical control system.

However, if the lamp goes out after

flickering momentarily, or contin-

ues to flicker, we recommend the

system be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• The position light may not turn on

when the position light switch is

turned on, but the position light and

headlight switch may turn on when

the headlight switch is turned on.

This may be caused by network fail-

ure or vehicle electrical control sys-

tem malfunction. If this occurs, we

recommend the system be checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information

The headlight aiming should be ad-

justed after an accident or after the

headlight assembly is reinstalled.

i Information

Traffic Change (For Europe)

The low beam light distribution is

asymmetric. If you go abroad to a

country with opposite traffic direction,

this asymmetric part will dazzle on-

coming car driver. To prevent dazzle,

ECE regulation demand several tech-

nical solutions (for example, automatic

change system, adhesive sheet, down

aiming). This headlights are designed

not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you

need not change your headlights in a

country with opposite traffic direction.

Headlight, position light, turn

signal light, fog light and day-

time running light bulb replace-

ment

Type A

OSU2I081021L



Type A

(1) Headlight (High/Low) *1

(2) Position light

(3) Turn signal light

(4) Front fog light (if equipped)

*1 : Bi-Function Projection Headlight

8-73

Type B

OSU2I081022L



Type B

(1) Headlight (Low) *2

(2) Headlight (High) *2

(3) Daytime running light (DRL)/

Position light

(4) Turn signal light

(5) Front fog light (if equipped)

*2 : MFR (Multi Focus Reflector)

Headlight

OLMB073042L

WARNING

Halogen bulbs

• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-

ized gas that will produce flying

pieces of glass if broken.

• Always handle them carefully,

and avoid scratches and abra-

sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid

contact with liquids. Never

touch the glass with bare hands.

Residual oil may cause the bulb

to overheat and burst when lit. A

bulb should be operated only

when installed in a headlight.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediately

and carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when

changing a bulb. Allow the bulb

to cool down before handling it.

i Information

• If the headlight aiming adjustment

is necessary after the headlight as-

sembly is reinstalled, consult an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• The Fog Light aiming adjustment

can be done by removing UNDER

COVER. Consult an authorised

HYUNDAI dealer.

8-74

Maintenance

Headlight (Low/High)

OSU2089030



Headlamp (Low/High)

Headlight (Low/High) - Type A

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the headlight bulb cover

by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the headlight bulb

socket-connector.

5. Remove the bulb from the head-

light assembly.

6. Install a new bulb.

7. Connect the bulb socket-connec-

tor.

8. Install the headlight bulb cover by

turning it clockwise.

i Information

- Bi-Function projection

headlight

This headlight is bi-function type that

switches the low beam to high or the

high beam to low using solenoid sys-

tem. So, the moving sound may be

heard when the headlight switches the

low beam to high or the high beam to

low and it does not indicate malfunc-

tion of the headlight.

Headlight (Low/High) –Type B

If the lamp (LED) does not operate,

we recommend that the system be

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

The LED lamps cannot be replaced

as a single unit because it is an inte-

grated unit. The LED lamps has to be

replaced with the unit.

A skilled technician should check or

repair the LED lamp, for it may dam-

age related parts of the vehicle.

i Information

The headlight aiming should be ad-

justed after an accident or after the

headlight assembly is reinstalled at an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Daytime running light (DRL)/ Posi-

tion light

If the lamp (LED) does not operate,

we recommend that the system be

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

The LED lamps cannot be replaced

as a single unit because it is an inte-

grated unit. The LED lamps has to be

replaced with the unit.

A skilled technician should check or

repair the LED lamp, for it may dam-

age related parts of the vehicle.

8-75

OSU2I089036

OSU2I089035

Turn signal light / Front fog light

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Loosen the pin-type retainers and

screws of the front wheel guard

and then detach it from the front

bumper.

4. Reach your hand into the back of

the front bumper.

5. Remove the socket from the as-

sembly by turning the socket coun-

terclockwise until the tabs on the

socket align with the slots on the

assembly.

6. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it

locks into place.

Side repeater lamp bulb

replacement (if equipped)

OSU2089049

Type A

If the lamp (LED) does not operate,

we recommend that the system be

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

The LED lamps cannot be replaced

as a single unit because it is an inte-

grated unit. The LED lamps has to be

replaced with the unit.

A skilled technician should check or

repair the LED lamp, for it may dam-

age related parts of the vehicle.

8-76

Maintenance

OSU2I089018

Type B

1. Remove the lamp assembly from

the vehicle by prying the lens and

pulling the assembly out.

2. Disconnect the bulb electrical con-

nector.

3. Separate the socket and the lens

parts by turning the socket coun-

terclockwise until the tabs on the

socket align with the slots on the

lens part.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

6. Reassemble the socket and the

lens part.

7. Connect the bulb electrical con-

nector.

8. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

Rear combination light bulb

replacement

OSU2I081027L

Type A

(1) Tail light

(2) Stop light

(3) Turn signal light

(4) Back up light

(5) Reflex reflector

8-77

Stop light and turn signal light

(Bulb Type)

OSU2089035

OSU2089036

1. Open the tailgate

2. Loosen the light assembly retain-

ing screws with a cross-tip screw-

driver.

3. Remove the rear combination light

assembly from the body of the ve-

hicle.

OSU2089037



Type A



Type B

OSU2089038

4. Remove the socket from the as-

sembly by turning the socket coun-

terclockwise until the tabs on the

socket align with the slots on the

assembly.

5. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it

locks into place.

7. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly.

Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

8-78

Maintenance

Tail light / Stop light (LED Type)

If the lamp (LED) does not operate,

we recommend that the system be

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

The LED lamps cannot be replaced

as a single unit because it is an inte-

grated unit. The LED lamps has to be

replaced with the unit.

A skilled technician should check or

repair the LED lamp, for it may dam-

age related parts of the vehicle.

Back up light replacement

OSU2I089034

1. Loosen the pin-type retainers and

screws of the rear wheel guard and

then detach it from the rear bumper.

2. Reach your hand into the back of

the rear bumper.

3. Remove the socket from the as-

sembly by turning the socket coun-

terclockwise until the tabs on the

socket align with the slots on the

assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it

locks into place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly.

Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

8-79

High mounted stop light

replacement

OSU2I081056L

If the light (LED) does not operate,

we recommend that the system be

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

License plate light bulb

replacement

OSU2089041

1. Loosen the Lamp retaining screws

with a Philips head screwdriver.

2. Pull the License Plate light from the

garnish

3. Remove the bulb holder from the

lamp by rotating it Counter clockwise.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

5. Install a new bulb.

6. Reinstall the Bulb Holder in the Lamp

7. Reinstall the lamp securely in the

Garnish with the retaining screws.

8-80

Maintenance

Interior light bulb replacement

Map lamp and personal lamp -

LED



Map lamp (LED)

OSU2I089030



Personal lamp

OSU2I089017

If the LED lamp (1) does not operate,

we recommend that the system be

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

The LED lamps cannot be replaced

as a single unit because it is an inte-

grated unit. The LED lamps has to be

replaced with the unit.

A skilled technician should check or

repair the LED lamp, for it may dam-

age related parts of the vehicle.

Map lamp, room lamp and cargo

area lamp - Bulb

WARNING

Prior to working on the Interior

Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-

ton is depressed to avoid burning

your fingers or receiving an elec-

tric shock.

8-81

OSU2I089031



Map lamp (Bulb)

1. Open the Sunglass Holder & find 2

Screws on the Body surface.

2. Loose the lamp assembly retaining

screws with a cross-tip screw-

driver.

3. Remove the Over Head Console

Lamp assembly from the Headlin-

ing.

4. Remove the bulb from the bulb

base by rotating it counterclock-

wise . Pull the bulb out of the sock-

et.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the bulb base and rotating it until it

locks into place

6. Remove the Blue Clips from the

Roof Panel & Screw them to the

Lamp Assembly using the Cross-

tip screw Driver.

7. Assemble the Over Head Console

Lamp assembly into the Headlin-

ing by pushing & making sure that

the clips are locked in place.

8. Insert the outer cover into the

housing.



Room lamp

OSU2I089032



Cargo area lamp

OSU2089044

1. Using a flat-head screwdriver, gen-

tly pry the lens from the interior

light housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snap the

lens into place.

If the lamps do not operating, have

the vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

Use care not to dirty or damage

lenses, lens tabs, and plastic hous-

ings.

8-82

Maintenance

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label

directions when using any chemical

cleaner or polish. Read all warning

and caution statements that appear

on the label.

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure wash-

ers, make sure to maintain suffi-

cient distance from the vehicle.

Insufficient clearance or excessive

pressure can lead to component

damage or water penetration.

• Do not spray the camera, sensors

or its surrounding area directly with

a high pressure washer. Shock ap-

plied from high pressure water

may cause the device to not oper-

ate normally.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to

boots (rubber or plastic covers) or

connectors as they may be dam-

aged if they come into contact with

high pressure water.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish

from rust and deterioration, wash it

thoroughly and frequently at least

once a month with lukewarm or cold

water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road

driving, you should wash it after each

off-road trip. Pay special attention to

the removal of any accumulation of

salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign ma-

terials. Make sure the drain holes in

the lower edges of the doors and

rocker panels are kept clear and

clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar depos-

its can damage your vehicle’s finish if

not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain wa-

ter may not completely remove all

these deposits. A mild soap, safe for

use on painted surfaces, may be

used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-

oughly with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

APPEARANCE CARE

8-83

NOTICE

• Do not use strong soap, chemi-

cal detergents or hot water, and

do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or when the body of the

vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the

side windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure

water, water may leak through

the windows and wet the interi-

or.

• To prevent damage to the plas-

tic parts and lamps, do not clean

with chemical solvents or strong

detergents.

WARNING

Wet brakes

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes while driving slowly to see

if they have been affected by wa-

ter. If braking performance is im-

paired, dry the brakes by applying

them lightly while maintaining a

slow forward speed.

OSU2I089019

NOTICE

• Water washing in the engine

compartment including high

pressure water washing may

cause the failure of electrical cir-

cuits located in the engine com-

partment.

• Never allow water or other liq-

uids to come in contact with

electrical/electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this

may damage them.

8-84

Maintenance

NOTICE

Matte paint finish vehicle

(if equipped)

Automatic car wash which uses

rotating brushes should not be

used as this can damage the sur-

face of your vehicle. A steam

cleaner which washes the vehicle

surface at high temperature may

result the oil to adhere and leave

stains that is difficult to remove.

Use a soft cloth (for example, mi-

crofiber towel or sponge) when

washing your vehicle and dry with

a microfiber towel. When you hand

wash your vehicle, you should not

use a cleaner that finishes with

wax. If the vehicle surface is too

dirty (sand, dirt, dust, contami-

nant, etc.), clean the surface with

water before washing the car.

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no

longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle be-

fore waxing. Use a good quality liquid

or paste wax, and follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions. Wax all metal

trim to protect it and to maintain its

luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-

als with a spot remover will usually

strip the wax from the finish. Be sure

to re-wax these areas even if the rest

of the vehicle does not yet need wax-

ing.

NOTICE

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the

finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive

cleaners, or strong detergents

containing highly alkaline or

caustic agents on chrome-plat-

ed or anodized aluminum parts.

This may result in damage to the

protective coating and cause

discoloration or paint deteriora-

tion.

NOTICE

Matte paint finish vehicle

(if equipped)

Do not use any polish protector

such as a detergent, an abrasive

and a polish. In case wax is ap-

plied, remove the wax immediately

using a silicon remover and if any

tar or tar contaminant is on the

surface use a tar remover to clean.

However, be careful not to apply

too much pressure on the painted

area.

8-85

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repaired

promptly. Exposed metal will quickly

rust and may develop into a major re-

pair expense.

i Information

If your vehicle is damaged and re-

quires any metal repair or replace-

ment, be sure the body shop applies

anti-corrosion materials to the parts

repaired or replaced.

NOTICE

Matte paint finish vehicle

(if equipped)

In case of matte paint finish vehi-

cles, it is impossible to modify

only the damaged area and repair

of the whole part is necessary. If

the vehicle is damaged and paint-

ing is required, we recommend

that you have your vehicle main-

tained and repaired by an autho-

rized HYUNDAI dealer. Take ex-

treme care, as it is difficult to

restore the quality after the repair.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper or

other sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of

bright-metal parts from corrosion,

apply a coating of wax or chrome

preservative and rub to a high lus-

ter.

• During winter weather or in coastal

areas, cover the bright metal parts

with a heavier coating of wax or

preservative. If necessary, coat the

parts with non-corrosive gaso-

lineeum jelly or other protective

compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may

collect on the underbody. If these ma-

terials are not removed, accelerated

rusting can occur on the underbody

parts such as the fuel lines, frame,

floor pan and exhaust system, even

though they have been treated with

rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-

body and wheel openings with luke-

warm or cold water once a month,

after off-road driving and at the end of

each winter. Pay special attention to

these areas because it is difficult to

see all the mud and dirt. It will do

more harm than good to wet down

the road grime without removing it.

The lower edges of the doors, rocker

panels, and frame members have

drain holes that should not clog with

dirt; trapped water in these areas can

cause rusting.

8-86

Maintenance

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes while driving slowly to see

if they have been affected by wa-

ter. If braking performance is im-

paired, dry the brakes by applying

them lightly while maintaining a

slow forward speed.

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated

with a clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,

polishing compound, solvent, or

wire brushes on aluminum wheels.

They may scratch or damage the

finish.

• Clean the wheel when it has

cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral de-

tergent, and rinse thoroughly with

water. Also, be sure to clean the

wheels after driving on salted

roads. This helps prevent corro-

sion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with

high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any alkaline or acid de-

tergent. It may damage and cor-

rode the aluminum wheels coated

with a clear protective finish.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corro-

sion

By using the most advanced design

and construction practices to combat

corrosion, we produce vehicles of the

highest quality. However, this is only

part of the job. To achieve the long-

term corrosion resistance your vehi-

cle can deliver, the owner’s coopera-

tion and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corro-

sion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath

the vehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective

coatings by stones, gravel, abra-

sion or minor scrapes and dents

which leave unprotected metal ex-

posed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehi-

cle is regularly exposed to corrosive

materials, corrosion protection is par-

ticularly important. Some of the com-

mon causes of accelerated corrosion

are road salts, dust control chemi-

cals, ocean air and industrial pollu-

tion.

8-87

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in

which corrosion is most likely to oc-

cur. For example, corrosion is accel-

erated by high humidity, particularly

when temperatures are just above

freezing. In such conditions, the cor-

rosive material is kept in contact with

the vehicle’s surface by moisture that

slowly evaporates.

Mud is particularly corrosive because

it dries slowly and holds moisture in

contact with the vehicle. Although the

mud appears to be dry, it can still re-

tain moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also acceler-

ate corrosion of parts that are not

properly ventilated so the moisture

can be dispersed. For all these rea-

sons, it is particularly important to

keep your vehicle clean and free of

mud or accumulations of other mate-

rials. This applies not only to the visi-

ble surfaces but particularly to the

underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from

getting started by observing the fol-

lowing:

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is

to keep your vehicle clean and free of

corrosive materials. Attention to the

underside of the vehicle is particularly

important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area

— where road salts are used, near

the ocean, areas with industrial

pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you

should take extra care to prevent

corrosion. In winter, hose off the

underside of your vehicle at least

once a month and be sure to clean

the underside thoroughly when

winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the ve-

hicle, give particular attention to

the components under the fenders

and other areas that are hidden

from view. Do a thorough job; just

dampening the accumulated mud

rather than washing it away will ac-

celerate corrosion rather than pre-

vent it. Water under high pressure

and steam are particularly effective

in removing accumulated mud and

corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,

rocker panels and frame members,

be sure that drain holes are kept

open so that moisture can escape

and not be trapped inside to accel-

erate corrosion.

8-88

Maintenance

Keep your garage dry

Don’t park your vehicle in a damp,

poorly ventilated garage. This cre-

ates a favorable environment for cor-

rosion. This is particularly true if you

wash your vehicle in the garage or

drive it into the garage when it is still

wet or covered with snow, ice or mud.

Even a heated garage can contribute

to corrosion unless it is well ventilated

so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condi-

tion

Scratches or chips in the finish should

be covered with “touch-up” paint as

soon as possible to reduce the possi-

bility of corrosion. If bare metal is

showing through, the attention of a

qualified body and paint shop is rec-

ommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are

highly corrosive and may damage

painted surfaces in just a few hours.

Always remove bird droppings as

soon as possible.

Don’t neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor

mats and carpeting and cause corro-

sion. Check under the mats periodi-

cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.

Use particular care if you carry fertil-

izers, cleaning materials or chemicals

in the vehicle.

These should be carried only in prop-

er containers and any spills or leaks

should be cleaned up, flushed with

clean water and thoroughly dried.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume,

cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-

er, and air freshener from contacting

the interior parts because they may

cause damage or discoloration. If

they do contact the interior parts,

wipe them off immediately. See the

instructions that follow for the proper

way to clean vehicle interior surfaces.

NOTICE

Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electrical/

electronic components inside the

vehicle as this may damage them.

NOTICE

When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use

neutral detergents or low alcohol

content solutions. If you use high

alcohol content solutions or acid/

alkaline detergents, the color of

the leather may fade or the surface

may get stripped off.

8-89

Cleaning the upholstery and in-

terior trim

Vehicle interior surfaces (if

equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from inte-

rior surfaces with a whisk broom or a

vacuum cleaner. If necessary, clean

interior surfaces with a mixture of

warm water and mild non-detergent

cleaner (test all cleaners on a con-

cealed area before use).

Fabric (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-

ric with a whisk broom or vacuum

cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-

tion recommended for upholstery or

carpets. Remove fresh spots immedi-

ately with a fabric spot cleaner. If

fresh spots do not receive immediate

attention, the fabric can be stained

and its color can be affected. Also, its

fire-resistant properties can be re-

duced if the material is not properly

maintained.

NOTICE

Using anything but recommended

cleaners and procedures may af-

fect the fabric’s appearance and

fire-resistant properties.

Leather (if equipped)

• Feature of Seat Leather

- Leather is made from the outer

skin of an animal, which goes

through a special process to be

available for use. Since it is a nat-

ural object, each part differs in

thickness or density.

Wrinkles may appear as a natural

result of stretching and shrinking

depending on the temperature

and humidity.

- The seat is made of stretchable

fabric to improve comfort.

- The parts contacting the body are

curved and the side supporting

area is high which provides driv-

ing comfort and stability.

- Wrinkles may appear naturally

from usage. It is not a fault of the

products.

CAUTION

• Wrinkles or abrasions which ap-

pear naturally from usage are

not covered by warranty.

• Belts with metallic accessories,

zippers or keys inside the back

pocket may damage the seat

fabric.

• Make sure not to wet the seat. It

may change the nature of natu-

ral leather.

• Jeans or clothes which could

bleach may contaminate the

surface of the seat covering fab-

ric.

8-90

Maintenance

• Caring for the leather seats

- Vacuum the seat periodically to

remove dust and sand on the

seat. It will prevent abrasion or

damage of the leather and main-

tain its quality.

- Wipe the natural leather seat cov-

er often with dry or soft cloth.

- Use of proper leather protective

may prevent abrasion of the cov-

er and helps maintain the color.

Be sure to read the instructions

and consult a specialist when us-

ing leather coating or protective

agent.

- Light colored (beige, cream

beige) leather is easily contami-

nated and the stain is noticeable.

Clean the seats frequently.

- Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It

may cause the surface to crack.

• Cleaning the leather seats

- Remove all contaminations in-

stantly. Refer to instructions be-

low for removal of each contami-

nant.

- Cosmetic products (sunscreen,

foundation, etc.)

Apply cleansing cream on a cloth

and wipe the contaminate spot.

Wipe off the cream with a wet

cloth and remove water with a dry

cloth.

- Beverages (coffee, soft drink,

etc.)

Apply a small amount of neutral

detergent and wipe until contami-

nations do not smear.

- Oil

Remove oil instantly with absorb-

able cloth and wipe with stain re-

mover used only for natural leath-

er.

- Chewing gum

Harden the gum with ice and re-

move gradually.

8-91

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt

webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild

soap solution recommended for

cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow

the instructions provided with the

soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the

webbing because this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window

glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the ve-

hicle become fogged (that is, covered

with an oily, greasy or waxy film),

they should be cleaned with glass

cleaner. Follow the directions on the

glass cleaner container.

NOTICE

Do not scrape or scratch the inside

of the rear window. This may result

in damage to the rear window de-

froster grid.

8-92

Maintenance

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty in-

formation contained in the Service

Passport in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an

emission control system to meet all

emission regulations.

There are three emission control sys-

tems which are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control sys-

tem

(2) Evaporative emission control sys-

tem

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function

of the emission control systems, it is

recommended that you have your car

inspected and maintained by an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer in accor-

dance with the maintenance sched-

ule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from mis-

firing during dynamometer test-

ing, turn the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system off by

pressing the ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is

completed, turn the ESC system

back on by pressing the ESC

switch again.

1. Crankcase emission control

system

The positive crankcase ventilation

system is employed to prevent air

pollution caused by blow-by gases

being emitted from the crankcase.

This system supplies fresh filtered air

to the crankcase through the air in-

take hose. Inside the crankcase, the

fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,

which then pass through the PCV

valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission con-

trol system

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel

vapors from escaping into the atmo-

sphere.

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel

tank are absorbed and stored in the

onboard canister. When the engine is

running, the fuel vapors absorbed in

the canister are drawn into the surge

tank through the purge control sole-

noid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve

(PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is

controlled by the Engine Control

Module (ECM); when the engine

coolant temperature is low during

idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-

orated fuel is not taken into the en-

gine. After the engine warms up

during ordinary driving, the PCSV

opens to introduce evaporated fuel to

the engine.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

8-93

3. Exhaust emission control

system

The Exhaust Emission Control Sys-

tem is a highly effective system which

controls exhaust emissions while

maintaining good vehicle perfor-

mance.

When the engine starts or fails to

start, excessive attempts to restart

the engine may cause damage to the

emission system.

Vehicle modifications

• This vehicle should not be modi-

fied. Modification of your vehicle

could affect its performance, safety

or durability and may even violate

governmental safety and emis-

sions regulations.

In addition, damage or perfor-

mance problems resulting from

any modification may not be cov-

ered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle

to operate abnormally, wire dam-

age, battery discharge and fire. For

your safety, do not use unautho-

rized electronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions

(carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present

with other exhaust fumes. There-

fore, if you smell exhaust fumes of

any kind inside your vehicle, have

it inspected and repaired immedi-

ately. If you ever suspect exhaust

fumes are coming into your vehi-

cle, drive it only with all the win-

dows fully open. Have your vehicle

checked and repaired immediate-

ly.

WARNING

Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain car-

bon monoxide (CO). Though color-

less and odorless, it is dangerous

and could be lethal if inhaled. Fol-

low the instructions on this page

to avoid CO poisoning.

• Do not operate the engine in con-

fined or closed areas (such as ga-

rages) any more than what is nec-

essary to move the vehicle in or

out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an

open area for more than a short

time with the engine running, ad-

just the ventilation system (as

needed) to draw outside air into

the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped

vehicle for any extended time with

the engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to

start, excessive attempts to restart

the engine may cause damage to

the emission control system.

8-94

Maintenance

Operating precautions for cata-

lytic converters (if equipped)

WARNING

The exhaust system and catalytic

system are very hot while the en-

gine is running or immediately af-

ter the engine is turned off. To

avoid SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Do not park, idle, or drive the ve-

hicle over or near flammable ob-

jects, such as grass, vegetation,

paper, leaves, etc. A hot exhaust

system can ignite flammable

items under your vehicle.

• Keep away from the exhaust

system and catalytic converter

or you may get burned.

Also, do not remove the heat

sink around the exhaust system,

do not seal the bottom of the ve-

hicle, and do not coat the vehi-

cle for corrosion control. It may

present a fire risk under certain

conditions.

Your vehicle is equipped with a cata-

lytic converter emission control de-

vice. To prevent damage to the cata-

lytic converter and to your vehicle,

take the following precautions:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for

Petrol engine.

• Do not operate the vehicle when

there are signs of engine malfunc-

tion, such as misfire or a notice-

able loss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the en-

gine. Examples of misuse are

coasting with the ignition off and

descending steep grades in gear

with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high

idle speed for extended periods (5

minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any

part of the engine or emission con-

trol system. All inspections and ad-

justments must be made by an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Avoid driving with a extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, dam-

aging the catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautions

could result in damage to the catalytic

converter and to your vehicle. Addi-

tionally, such actions could void your

warranties.

8-95

Gasoline Particulate Filter (GPF)

(if equipped)

Gasoline Particulate Filter (GPF) sys-

tem removes the soot in the exhaust

gas. The GPF system automatically

burns (or oxidizes) the accumulated

soot in accordance with driving situa-

tions, unlike a disposable air filter.

In other words, the accumulated soot

is automatically purged out by the en-

gine control system and by the high

exhaustgas temperature at normal/

high driving speeds.

However, when the vehicle is contin-

ually driven at repeated short distanc-

es or driven at low speed for a long

time, the accumulated soot may not

be automatically removed because of

low exhaust gas temperature. In this

case, the accumulated soot may

reach a certain amount regardless of

the soot oxidization process, then the

GPF lamp ( ) will illuminate.

The Gasoline Particulate Filter (GPF)

lamp stops illuminating, when the

driving speed exceeds 80 km/h (50

mph) with engine rpm 1,500 ~ 4,000

and the gear in the 3rd position or

above for approximately 30 minutes.

When the GPF lamp starts to blink or

the warning message “Check ex-

haust system” pops up even though

the vehicle was driven as mentioned

above, we recommend that you have

the GPF system checked by an au-

thorized HYUNDAI dealer.

With GPF lamp blinking for an ex-

tended period of time, it may damage

the GPF system and lower the fuel

economy.

CAUTION

We recommend you to use only

the regulated gasoline fuels, when

your vehicle is equipped with the

GPF system.

When you use other gasoline fuels

which contain unspecified addi-

tives, they may damage the GPF

system and cause exhaust emis-

sion problems.

8-96

Maintenance

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)

(if equipped)

The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

system removes the soot in the ex-

haust gas. Unlike a disposable air fil-

ter, the DPF system automatically

burns (oxidizes) and removes the ac-

cumulated soot according to the driv-

ing condition. In order words, the ac-

tive burning by engine control system

and high exhaust gas temperature

caused by normal/high diving condi-

tion burns and removes the accumu-

lated soot.

However, if the vehicle continues to

be driven at repeated short distance

or driven at low speed for a long time,

the accumulated soot may not be au-

tomatically removed because of low

exhaust gas temperature. More than

a certain amount of soot deposited,

the malfunction indicator light ( )

illuminates.

When the malfunction indicator light

illuminates, it may turn-off after driv-

ing the vehicle at more than 60km/h

(37 mph) or at more than second gear

with 1500~2500 engine rpm for a cer-

tain time (for about 25 minutes).

If the malfunction indicator light ( )

is not turn-off or blinking continuesly

in spite of the procedure, visit a pro-

fessional workshop and check the

DPF system. HYUNDAI recommends

to visit an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er/service partner.

If you continue to drive with the mal-

function indicator light blinking for a

long time, the DPF system can be

damaged and fuel consumption can

be worsen and the engine durability

can be worsen by oil dilution.

CAUTION

Diesel Fuel (if equipped with DPF)

We recommend you to use only

the regulated diesel fuels, when

your vehicle is equipped with the

DPF system.

When you use other diesel fuels,

which is high in sulfurs (above 10

ppm) or contains unspecified addi-

tives, it may damage the DPF sys-

tem and cause the white smoke

emission.

Lean NOx Trap (if equipped)

The Lean NOx Trap (LNT) system re-

moves the nitrogen oxide in the ex-

haust gas. The smell can occur in the

exhaust gas depending on the quality

of the fuel and it can degrade NOx re-

duction performance, please use the

regulated automotive diesel fuel.

• The LNT warning light blinks if the

LNT performance is degraded.

( )

In this case, the warning light illumi-

nates and the warning alarm sounds

while showing a warning message

“Self Regeneration” on the cluster

display.

For more details, refer to “Self

Regeneration Mode” in chapter 8.

8-97

4. Selective Catalytic Reduc-

tion (SCR) (for diesel engine)

(if equipped)

Selective Catalytic Reduction system

catalytically converts NOx to nitrogen

and water by using reduction agent,

urea solution.

DEF level / Urea level



Type A

OTM090070L

DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid) level

gauge display shows the approxi-

mate amount of remaining urea solu-

tion inside the urea solution tank.

You can check the DEF level in the

Utility view on the cluster.

Refer to “View Modes” section in

chapter 4.

Low urea warning message

Warning message will appear in four

steps on the cluster according to urea

solution level in the tank.

OJX1099041L

First warning

The SCR ( ) warning light and ‘Low

urea’ warning message appears on

the instrument cluster when urea lev-

el is low. Refill as soon as possible.

OJX1099043L

Second warning

If urea is not refilled after the first

warning, the SCR ( ) warning light

and ‘Refill urea’ warning message

appears on the instrument cluster

when urea level is low. Refill as soon

as possible.

8-98

Maintenance

OJX1099042L

Third warning

The SCR ( ) warning light and ‘Refill

urea in 000 km or vehicle will not start

/ Refill urea in 000 km. Otherwise ve-

hicle will not start’ warning message

appears on the instrument cluster

when urea solution tank is nearly

empty. Refill immediately.

The displayed driving distance (000

km) and actual driving distance may

vary depending on driving habits and

driving conditions.

OJX1099044L

Fourth warning

The SCR ( ) warning light and ‘Refill

urea tank or vehicle will not start / Refill

urea tank. Otherwise vehicle will not

start’ warning message appears on the

instrument cluster when urea solution

tank is empty. The vehicle cannot be

restarted once the engine is turned off.

Refill immediately.

8-99

Selective Catalytic Reduction system malfunction

When there is a problem with the Selective Catalytic Reduction system such as

disconnected electrical components, use of incorrect urea, etc., the following

warning message will appear on the instrument cluster. If this occurs, we rec-

ommend that the system be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If you continue to drive without the problem solved, it may adversely effect sys-

tem performance or the vehicle cannot be restarted once the engine is turned

off.

Malfunction Driving 50 km after malfunc-

tion

Urea system failure

(= no urea injection)

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sys-

tem failure / Urea dosing system

error Check urea system

Incorrect urea de-

tected

(= abnormal urea) Incorrect urea detected

Refill with correct urea in 000

km or vehicle will not start / Re-

fill correct urea in 000 km. Oth-

erwise vehicle will not start

Abnormal urea con-

sumption

(= post treatment

failure)

Check urea system

Service urea system in 000 km

or vehicle will not start / Service

urea system in 000 km. Other-

wise vehicle will not start

Restarting the vehicle

Vehicle restart restriction

Low urea level Refill urea tank or vehicle will not start / Refill urea tank. Otherwise

vehicle will not start

Urea system failure

(= no urea injection) Service urea system in 000 km or vehicle will not start / Service

urea system in 000 km. Otherwise vehicle will not start

Incorrect urea de-

tected

(= abnormal urea)

Refill with correct urea in 000 km or vehicle will not start / Refill

with correct urea in 000 km. Otherwise vehicle will not start

Abnormal urea con-

sumption

(= post treatment

failure)

Service urea system in 000 km or vehicle will not start / Service

urea system in 000 km. Otherwise vehicle will not start

The vehicle can be restarted after the problem is solved. If the ‘Refill urea tank

or vehicle will not start / Refill urea tank. Otherwise vehicle will not start’ warning

message appears, refill the urea solution tank. After refilling the tank, place ig-

nition switch or Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position and wait until the

message disappears. If the vehicle cannot be restarted after refilling urea, we

recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

8-100

Maintenance

Adding urea solution

OSU2I082060

OSU2I082061

Refilling urea with a refill hose

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Ensure the all doors are unlocked.

3. Press the rear center edge of the

fuel filler door.

4. Pull the fuel filler door outward to

access the fuel tank cap.

5. To open the urea solution tank

cap, turn it counterclockwise.

6. Fully insert the refill hose and add

urea.

7. Do not overfill.

8. To close the urea solution tank

cap, turn it clockwise.

Refilling urea from a refill bottle

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Ensure the all doors are unlocked.

3. Press the rear center edge of the

fuel filler door.

4. Pull the fuel filler door outward to

access the fuel tank cap.

5. To open the urea solution tank

cap, turn it counterclockwise.

6. Add urea. Do not overfill.

7. To close the urea solution tank

cap, turn it clockwise.

Use only specified urea solution

(Refer to “Recommended Lubri-

cants and Capacities” section in

chapter 2).

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your vehi-

cle:

• Use only specified urea solution.

Never add any other urea solution

than what has been specified.

• Be careful not to add urea solution

into the fuel tank.

• While adding urea, be careful not to

allow foreign substances to enter

into the urea solution tank.

• Do not mix water or additives with

the urea solution.

Do not over fill the urea solution tank. In

cold weather, the tank will expand if the

urea freezes.

8-101

Storing urea solution

• Store urea solution only in contain-

ers made with the following materi-

als.

-DIN EN 10 088-1-/-2-/-3-speci-

fied CR-Ni steel

-Mo-Cr-Ni steel

-Polypropylene

-Polyethylene

• Do not store urea solution in con-

tainers made with the following

materials.

-Aluminum, copper, copper alloy,

non-alloyed still, and galvanized

steel

Urea solution dissolves the metal ma-

terials, severely damaging the ex-

haust purification system.

Information

Urea solution is a water-soluble sub-

stance, which is inflammable, non-tox-

ic, colorless and odorless.

NOTICE

• The following situations may

damage the DPF system.

-Fuels or any unauthorized liq-

uids are added to the urea

solution tank

-Additives are mixed in the

urea solution

-Water is mixed in the urea

solution

• Use only specified urea solu-

tion.

When any unauthorized urea

solution is added to the tank, we

recommend that you contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• When any foreign substances

enter the urea solution tank, the

following problems may occur.

-Increased emission

-DPF system malfunction

-Engine failure

• Never add used urea solution as

its quality cannot be guaran-

teed. Always add new urea solu-

tion.

WARNING

• Do not apply any external impact on

the DPF system. It may damage the

catalyst, which is equipped inside

the DPF system.

• Do not modify the DPF system by

redirecting or lengthening the ex-

haust pipe. It may adversely effect

the DPF system.

• Avoid contact with the drained wa-

ter from the exhaust pipe. The water

is slightly acid and harmful to skin.

If contacted, thoroughly wash it off.

• Any modification of the DPF system

may cause system malfunction. The

DPF system is controlled by a com-

plex device.

• Wait for the DPF system to cool

down before maintenance, as it is

hot due to heat generation. Other-

wise, it may cause skin burn.

• The Selective Catalytic Reduction

system (for example, urea solution

nozzle, urea solution pump, and

DCU) operates for approximately 2

minutes more to eliminate the re-

maining urea solution inside, even

after the engine is turned OFF. Be-

fore working on the vehicle, make

sure that the Selective Catalytic Re-

duction system is completely turned

OFF.

Poor urea solution or unauthorized

liquids may damage vehicle com-

ponents, including the DPF sys-

tem. Any unverified additives in

the urea solution may clog the

SCR catalyst and cause other mal-

functions, which require the ex-

pensive DPF system to be re-

placed.

8-102

Maintenance

WARNING

• When the urea solution contacts

with the eyes or the skin, you

should thoroughly wash the

contaminated skin area.

• When you swallow the urea

solution, thoroughly rinse your

mouth and drink a lot of fresh

water. Then, immediately con-

sult a doctor.

• When your cloth is contaminat-

ed with the urea solution, imme-

diately change your cloth.

• When you have an allergic reac-

tion to the urea solution, imme-

diately consult a doctor.

• Keep children away from urea

solution.

• When opening the urea solution

tank cap at high outside tem-

peratures, ammonia vapors may

escape. Ammonia vapors have a

pungent smell and primarily

cause irritation of the:

-Skin

-Mucous membranes

-Eyes

You may experience a burning

sensation in your eyes, nose

and throat, as well as coughing

and watering of the eyes. Do not

inhale ammonia vapors. Do not

allow urea solution to come in

direct contact with your skin. It

is hazardous to your health.

Wash any affected areas off with

plenty of clean water. If neces-

sary, consult a doctor.

• When handling urea solution in

closed space, ensure good ven-

tilation. When the bottle of urea

solution container is opened,

pungent smelling fumes may es-

cape

NOTICE

• Wipe off any urea solution spill-

age with water or dampened

cloth. When the urea solution is

crystalized, wipe it off with

sponge or cloth, which is damp-

ened in cold water.

When the urea solution spillage

is exposed in the air for an ex-

tended period of time, it is crys-

talized in white, damaging the

vehicle surface.

• When urea solution overflows

onto vehicle surface, wash out

vehicle surface with clean water

to prohibit corrosion from oc-

curring.

• Store the urea solution tank only

in well ventilated locations.

When urea solution is exposed

to hot temperature at approxi-

mately 50°C (122°F) for an ex-

tended period of time (for exam-

ple, under direct sunlight),

chemical decomposition may

occur, emitting ammonia vapor.

• In case the vehicle was parked

at very low ambient temperature

(below 11°C (33°F) for a long

time, the urea solution will be

frozen in the urea solution tank.

With frozen urea, the tank level

may not be detected correctly

until the urea solution melts. In-

correct urea or diluted urea may

increase the freezing point, so

only use specified urea solution.

The time for the urea solution to melt

varies in accordance with driving condi-

tions and outside temperatures.

8-103

5. Self Regeneration Mode

Cluster Display Type

If the warning message “Self Regen-

eration” is stored in inspection mes-

sage tap, it is operable in cluster dis-

play warning message page.

WARNING

• Make sure the vehicle parked on

safety zone (to avoid the flam-

mables like grass and traffic ac-

cident)

• Check remained fuel above 1/5

of full level fuel gauge to prevent

fuel overheat

• Open the hood to prevent en-

gine room overheat

• Self regeneration should be

done only when DPF indicator

illuminates



Type A

OSU2I089044



Type B

OSU2I089042

• If the warning message “Diesel

filter regeneration required, See

owner’s manual.” appears on

the cluster display, Self Regen-

eration is required.

8-104

Maintenance

To initiate Self Regeneration

1. Engage parking brake and shift le-

ver at P state.

2. Turn on the engine

3. Warm up the engine and check en-

gine temperature gauge at the

middle position

4. Turn on the air conditioner and set

the blower to the maximum.

5. Turn on the high beam.

6. Operate the rear defog function.

7. Hold the OK button on the cluster

display warning message page.



Type A

OSU2I089045



Type B

OSU2I089039

8. Turn off and turn on the engine

again.



Type A

OSU2I089046



Type B

OSU2I089037

Not Operating Condition

Under below condition, Diesel Cat-

alyst regeneration process may be

interrupted. (Engine RPM drops to

idle state)

- Engine overheat or insufficient

warm-up

- Shift lever change to D or R

state

- Acceleration pedal is pressed

- Movement of Vehicle (Vehicle

speed over 0)

8-105

Service Check

If the DPF indicator change from illu-

minates to blink or Engine Check

Lamp(MIL) illuminates with DPF indi-

cator in spite of the procedure, please

visit an authorized Hyundai dealer

and then check the Diesel Catalyst

and engine system including oil level

inspection.

Please note that the vehicle accelera-

tion is limited to protect engine sys-

tem when DPF indicator blinks or En-

gine Check Lamp(MIL) illuminates.



Type A

OSU2I089047



Type B

OSU2I089040

Operationg Self Regeneration Mode

If the self regeneration mode starts,

the message “Filter regenerationg…”

and the remaining time appears.

It takes around 30~60 minutes.



Type A

OSU2I089048



Type B

OSU2I089041

Self Regeneration Mode Fail

The regeneration operation could be

canceled if the driver press the OK

button firmly while operating the self

regeneration process.

8-106

Maintenance



Type A

OSU2I089044



Type B

OSU2I089042

If the system still needs the self re-

generation process after cancelling

the operation, the warning message

appears. (Diesel filter regeneration

required.)

If the driver press the OK button firm-

ly, it can restart the self regeneration

mode again. (The Self regeneration

conditions should be satisfied.)



Type A

OSU2I089048



Type B

OSU2I089041

The self regeneration process stops if

any of the self regeneration condi-

tions is cancelled. If the self regener-

ation process is cancelled automati-

cally, the system maintains

“Self-regeneration stopped” mes-

sage.

If the driver press the OK button firm-

ly, it can restart the self regeneration

mode again. (Self regeneration con-

ditions should be satisfied.)

8-107

Segment Type

Regeneration

The self regeneration procedure is

conducted as follows.

1) Repeat key position at LOCK (or

ACC)  ON state 5 times (within

30 seconds)

2) Start engine

3) Monitor engine state

: Within 20 seconds, engine RPM

rise to about 2000 and it contin-

ues for 30~60 minutes. After the

end of regeneration, engine RPM

drop to idle automatically.

4) Stop the engine (Key Off), wait for

20 seconds and restart the engine

5) Check malfunction indicator turn

out

CAUTION

Under below condition, Diesel Cat-

alyst regeneration process may be

interrupted. (Engine RPM drops to

idle state)

- Engine overheat or insufficient

warm-up

- Shift lever change to D or R

state

- Acceleration pedal is pressed

- Movement of Vehicle (Vehicle

speed over 0)

WARNING

If vehicle doesn’t enter regenera-

tion mode or if regeneration mode

is interrupted, stop the engine

(Key Off), wait for 20 seconds and

retry the self regeneration proce-

dure.

WARNING

Self regeneration should be done

only when DPF indicator illumi-

nates. Frequent regeneration may

cause engine oil dilution and

shortening of Diesel Catalyst dura-

bility.

Service Check

If the DPF indicator change from illu-

minates to blink or Engine Check

Lamp(MIL) illuminates with DPF indi-

cator in spite of the procedure, please

visit an authorized Hyundai dealer

and then check the Diesel Catalyst

and engine system including oil level

inspection.

Please note that the vehicle accelera-

tion is limited to protect engine sys-

tem when DPF indicator blinks or En-

gine Check Lamp(MIL) illuminates.

8-108

Maintenance

Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

First, read the manual;
Check if your question has been asked previously;
Try to ask your question as clearly as possible;
Did you already try to solve the problem? Please mention this;
Is your problem solved by a visitor then let him/her know in this forum;
To give a response to a question or answer, do not use this form but click on the button 'reply to this question';
Your question will be posted here and emailed to our subscribers. Therefore, avoid filling in personal details.

new questions and answers
new manuals

You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.

Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Hyundai Alcazar - 2023 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 5.56 mb in size.

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.

Info

Hyundai Alcazar - 2023 Manual

Product: